While painting on paper is fairly common, using watercolor on wood can create interesting effects and a distinct style, making it a great medium. Wood also allows the watercolor to stick better to the surface, and the colors appear brighter, especially when you prepare it well using proper primer and varnish.
Since watercolor paint is a diverse medium that is robust and easy to apply, it can be used on various flat surfaces, such as watercolor paper, wood, glass, and fabrics. Most artists prefer wood panels since they’re compatible with most paints, and their natural wood grains can add elegance and texture to the work of art.
However, working with wooden surfaces can also be quite tricky since they are porous in nature. So, you must create a suitable and well-prepared flat surface before you paint watercolor on wood, and this can be done by choosing the right natural grain and applying primer.
Besides these techniques, you must know other important steps to create a watercolor painting on a wood panel. We will discuss those steps in this guide, so keep reading!
How To Use Watercolor On Wood: A Step-by-Step Guide
Materials You Need
As with any other art medium, achieving the best results to create watercolor paintings on wood highly depends on the materials used. Good quality materials - from wood and varnish to art supplies like brush and paint - all of them play an important role in the process of creating long-lasting art.
Many artists who work with watercolor paints have started utilizing various eco-friendly surfaces, such as a thick canvas and synthetic, recyclable materials like Yupo papers. However, watercolors on wood remain the most preferable for their unique pattern and smooth surface.
Here are the materials you will need to get started:
High-quality watercolor paint
Sandpaper
Dust removal kit
Primer for prep work
Varnish for sealing
Paper towel or damp cloth
Mask, eye goggles, and gloves for safety
Water and paintbrush
These materials are easily available at craft stores, so you need not worry about their availability.
Step 1: Know Your Watercolor Paint
We are all aware of how watercolors work, but we’d like to reiterate a few key points for better understanding. Firstly, different watercolors have different compositions. However, most of them are made using gum arabic, a binding agent that combines with water to activate different colors. Some other brands also use linseed oil as a binding agent for their watercolor paint.
So, it’s important to look into the binding agents used and other chemicals included in the paint when you purchase it from the local craft store. You can also avoid the hassle of checking every watercolor product by using trusted brands, such as Daniel Smith or Winsor & Newton.
After purchasing the watercolor paints, activate the pigments in a palette to understand how they might appear on different materials.
Step 2: Preparing the Wood Surface by Sanding
Most often, you find a wood panel or piece that has a nice natural grain or texture - that’s why you must sand the wood to prepare it for watercolor. Use fine-grit sandpaper to sand the areas where you will add paint. This will create a smoother finish that will help the pigment pop when activated.
If you have a large piece of wood or a wide wood panel, you can try sanding a smaller area in the middle. This will alleviate the surface surrounding the middle, giving a framed look. Many artists use this method since it’s quite difficult to frame wood. Attach the sandpaper to a drill for better grip and control, and ensure you sand the wood in a well-ventilated room.
Step 3: Remove Dust And Wood Shavings
After the sanding process is over, you’ll find several wood shavings and a significant amount of dust on the wood and the workstation. You must remove this unless you want a different kind of texture that utilizes wood shavings - but be warned, they’re quite tricky to incorporate.
The best way to remove the fine particles from the surface is by simply blowing the loose debris off. We recommend using a vacuum cleaner with the blower settings and adding a thin nozzle to the opening. Blow the air both with and against the wood grain. This will create a striated intersection on the wood, which will give you a canvas-like appearance.
Alternatively, you can use a bottle of compressed air, which is often used to remove dust from computer keyboards.
Step 4: Apply Primer
When the wood is properly sanded, wipe down the surface with a damp cloth and paper towel to prepare it for primer application. Since watercolor paints contain gum arabic, they may be tacky while applied on a surface with no primer. Moreover, a primer helps the watercolors move fluidly on the surface, making it easier for you to blend and layer them.
The best primer for watercoloring on wood is watercolor ground, preferably in an iridescent gold color that compliments the natural finish of the wood. You can use this primer directly from the container and apply them on wood, metal, canvas, etc. At first, apply a light coat with a synthetic flat brush to get a smooth texture, but if you want a rough texture, use a brush with natural bristles instead.
Moreover, you must remember that the watercolor ground makes the surface more absorbable, so ensure you use little water. When applied in thin layers, the iridescent gold primer will create the perfect canvas for your art.
Another primer you can use instead of watercolor ground is Gesso, which is affordable and easy to use. Mostly used for acrylic and oil paints, an even layer of super heavy or light Gesso that resolves absorption issues and allows the watercolor to move more freely. The most prominent benefit of Gesso is that it doesn’t yellow over time, but it requires thorough sanding if you decide to use more than one layer.
Step 5: Painting with Watercolor on Wood
Painting on wood with watercolor is similar to painting on other surfaces - you can follow your favorite painting technique, preferred texture, and artistic goals. However, we recommend applying the paint with thicker layers compared to when you apply watercolor on canvas or paper. A thicker consistency with less water content will stick better onto the wooden surface and prevent dripping.
Alternatively, you can apply a great number of very thin layers of watercolor paint. In this case, you need to be extra careful so that the layers aren’t too thin to avoid dripping and are thick enough to have a visual impact.
Step 6: Finishing and Sealing the Wood
The final step in creating a watercolor painting on wood is sealing it with a varnish. This step ensures your artwork lasts longer - the varnish protects the wooden surface from humidity, preventing it from rotting or yellowing with age. When it comes to watercolor paintings, we recommend sealing the wood with clear-coat spray before applying varnish, like Krylon.
If you want to protect your watercolor painting further, consider applying an epoxy resin layer (artist-grade) to the already sealed surface of the painting. This will provide extra protection to the gum arabic in watercolors, which are vulnerable to moisture.
You can also protect your painting with glass by making a customized wooden frame, but ensure the glass isn't too thick. Glass can provide robust protection against humidity and prevents warm color from fading due to bright lighting.
Advanced Techniques
Wood serves as an excellent medium to experiment with different painting techniques. We’ve already discussed how artists prefer building the painting layer by layer, especially when it comes to wood. This offers better results than simply daubing it on the surface, but it takes quite a lot of time and patience. So here are some other techniques you can employ to achieve your artistic goals:
1. Blending
Properly using blending techniques in your watercolor painting can give you the advantage of creating certain interesting textures and shadow effects. To get started, choose a particular color and create a dark and light version using white and black, as required.
Start with either the dark or light shade. Then, while the paint is still wet, add the other shade and blend them gently. Make sure the first layer of color starts to pop through the second layer - the two shades shouldn’t totally mix with each other.
2. Ombre Effect
Ombre is a very popular technique among artists, who use it to express a single shade through various iterations by reflecting light from different angles. For example, you can start with a very dark shade of color and progressively lighten it until it’s totally white.
The easiest way to create the perfect ombre is by “washing” the wood before applying paint. Simply cover the surface with a thin layer of water, and then add a dark pigment at the bottom of the wooden piece. While moving towards the top, keep adding pigment in small amounts and ensure you wash it down to create lighter shades. And although this method can be a bit messy, it creates a scattered yet romantic effect.
These two methods aren’t the only ways you can create interesting watercolor paintings on wood. Experiment with different shades, textures, and water content to find a style that suits you best.
How To Use Watercolor On Wood FAQs
What kind of wood can I use for watercolor painting?
Most wood species can be compatible with watercolor paints, but we recommend using soft wood types. Consider pine or even balsa since they absorb the paints better, making them last longer. Hardwood, such as oak, maple, or rosewood, has a tendency to soak too much watercolor, which prevents them from showing up brighter and lasting longer.
Do I need to prepare the wood before painting with watercolor?
Yes, absolutely. Preparing the wood before applying watercolor paint is important since it ensures you have a fresh, smoother surface to work with. Unwanted texture and ridges can ruin your painting by disintegrating the color and not giving you the pigment you wanted.
What types of watercolor paints should I use for painting on wood?
Most watercolor types are compatible with wood as a medium. If you properly prep the wood, apply high-quality primer and varnish. And just to be on the safe side, consider purchasing brands that are trustworthy and have been on the market for a long time.
Can I mix watercolor paints with other mediums, such as acrylic or oil paint?
Yes, you can. Combining watercolor paints with acrylic or oil paints can give you a thicker application, which easily sticks on the wood surface and doesn’t drip.
How do I protect the watercolor painting on wood?
The best way to protect a watercolor painting on wood is by applying a nice coat of varnish on the completed piece of art. You can also frame it with glass to protect it from humidity and dust, helping your art last longer.
To Sum It Up
Wood can be a good medium for watercolor painting, especially if you want unique patterns and textures that cannot be achieved on paper or canvas. The one disadvantage of using watercolor on wood is the amount of time lost in thoroughly preparing the surface, but the awe-inspiring results are more than enough for compensating it.
And if you’ve never tried watercolor on wood or considered doing it, you may want to try it out - the whole process is fun and worthwhile. You’ll get better color payoffs, better ombre and layering effects, greater durability, and unique textures, which will help you create memorable art. This experience will also help you understand how watercolor paints respond to different mediums.
Alternatively, if you want to try something less complicated first, consider using textured clay to get the hang of how textured surfaces like wood really work.
Watercolor canvases are the most popular art media among professional artists due to their huge margin of error, low absorbency, and high durability. Such qualities allow you to experiment with different art styles and techniques, such as wet-on-wet, gradient, lifting, etc., to create unique watercolor paintings.
Many watercolor artists prefer to work with watercolor paper since it’s a versatile medium with high mobility and absorbency.
This traditional art medium is coveted in the painting world due to its durability and the fluidity it allows the watercolor paints to achieve. However, many people are unaware of how well these paints work on watercolor canvas.
The quality of your artwork will depend on the kind of canvas surface you use since some watercolor paints appear brighter and blend better on certain watercolor canvases. But to start working with watercolor canvas, you need to gain a full understanding of the medium and the process of painting watercolor on it.
In this article, we will walk you through all the important details and help you gain mastery over yet another medium. Read on!
Watercolor Paper Vs Canvas: Which One is Better?
Before we further our discussion of watercolor canvas, let’s take a look at how paper and canvas fare when pitted against each other. We’ll discuss six determining factors: absorbency, versatility, lifting capacity, convenience, durability, and availability.
1. Absorbency
Watercolor canvases and papers have almost equal capacity when it comes to absorbing watercolor paints and fixing the painting surface. However, similar to watercolor painting on wood, you have to be extra careful while painting on canvas so as not to disturb the underlying layer. So, there’s going to be a significant learning canvas as you slowly adapt to the techniques and brush strokes that are compatible with normal canvas.
Moreover, building up each layer by washing and putting a glaze or varnish will be extremely difficult on your first try. But don’t lose hope - after a few tries, you’ll master painting on a canvas board and create amazing watercolor paintings.
Once you’ve learned how to blend and layer on watercolor canvas, you’ll notice that canvas surfaces accept watercolor paints less readily than paper. This low absorbency is ideal for painting styles like the wet-on-wet technique since it gives the watercolor artist more time to experiment with the pigment.
2. Versatility
Watercolor canvas is much more versatile than watercolor paper - you can easily create watercolor canvas art using acrylic paints, ink, and even pencils. Ideal for mixed media art, watercolor canvas allows sketching outlines of your subject matter and erasing any errors made. And you’ll find that artwork is much easier to display on stretched canvas instead of paper.
3. Lifting Capacity
Lifting capacity refers to the degree of ease of removing paint colors from the surface or washing it to start over. And watercolor canvas certainly has this capacity - all you need is some clean water and a paper towel, cloth, or sponge. Gently rub it on the canvas surface and get the paint off the surface. You can either erase and fix the error or completely erase your watercolor art to white to start over.
It is often possible to lift paint from watercolor papers as well, but it only works on hot and cold-pressed watercolor paper.
However, this lifting capacity of watercolor canvas products can often be a disadvantage, especially if an artist uses a lot of glazing. This technique is quite difficult on canvas since it requires a lot of patience to move around the watercolor paint without lifting any previous layer. You’ll have to learn how to glaze on canvas through a lot of trial and error, but try to master how to do it quickly without mixing the colors.
4. Convenience
You might often need to prepare your watercolor paper before painting, but a standard canvas doesn’t have this problem. After you purchase canvas boards or pads from the art supply store, you can directly start painting on them without any preparation.
This is because most watercolor canvases are made from 100% cotton (Gossypium hirsutum) and are acid-free, but only a few watercolor papers have this quality. So, purchasing a traditional canvas will be much more affordable than looking for high-quality, artist-transfer paper.
5. Durability
Unlike watercolor paper, normal canvases don’t warp or wrinkle around the edges that easily - it is much more durable in this sense. Plus, they can resist wear and tear or any breakage that is caused by moisture or abrasion. However, you’ll find paint pooling in certain areas of a poor-quality watercolor canvas.
6. Availability
Watercolor canvases are widely available across most art stores, and you’ll find a wide range of sizes as well. The common type used by many artists is the stretched canvas, which allows you to paint on all four sides of the canvas board, giving you more dimensions to work with.
What To Consider While Choosing A Watercolor Canvas?
Always go for acid-free watercolor canvases that are made from 100% organic textile, such as cotton or satin. Keeping these two parameters in mind will save you from various difficulties during painting.
Firstly, an acid-free cotton canvas won’t react to watercolor paints and can create dissimilar colors, and secondly, they’re environment-friendly and not harmful to your health. But ensure you’re purchasing authentic watercolor canvas boards and not just normal boards covered in Gesso.
And since there are various kinds of canvases, including canvas pads, canvas boards, and stretched canvases, many people often get confused when faced with the options. Usually, the difference lies in the size of the canvas, so as long as there’s a label mentioning that it’s compatible with watercolor paints, you’re good to go.
There are two ways you can get started with watercolor canvas. Either you can buy a readymade canvas board, or you can prepare one using watercolor ground. However, preparing canvas can be quite challenging on your first try, so we recommend using readymade ones initially.
Materials You Will Need
Let’s look at the materials you will need to create a watercolor painting on canvas and prepare the surface before you begin painting if required.
Canvas pad/ board
Watercolor ground
Watercolor Gesso
Watercolor paints
Paintbrush, sketch pens, pencils
Paper towel or damp cloth
Watercolor Palette
Fine-grit sandpaper
Varnish
Transfer paper (optional)
Masking fluid
Toothpick or earbuds
All of these supplies should be of good quality. Doing so is a foolproof way of avoiding various challenges one can face while painting, such as color pooling, high absorption, curling, warping, etc.
Preparing Canvas For Watercolor
If you prefer preparing your own watercolor canvas board instead of buying readymade ones, then this basic tutorial is for you. First thing first - you’re going to need watercolor ground, which is a specialized watercolor gesso to help the canvas absorb water-based paints.
Absorbent ground is necessary since most canvases aren’t absorbent enough to keep the colors in place. Even if you add a thin layer of normal gesso without applying ground, there are chances of the paint running off.
Before you prepare the watercolor canvas, you’ll be faced with various watercolor ground choices, but we recommend using the one by Daniel Smith if you’re a beginner. Try using an absorbent ground that is transparent and smooth in texture since it will ease the process of spreading.
The aim is to get a flat, smooth surface for painting, so you can also sand the canvas after applying gesso. Here’s a detailed look into the process:
Step 1
If your watercolor canvas pads or boards are raw, apply two layers of standard gesso to cure the canvas before applying the absorbent ground. Let it completely dry.
Step 2
Apply at least two to six layers of watercolor ground to your pre-stretched canvas, and allow each layer to dry completely before applying the next one. Moreover, if you want a textured surface, start applying the watercolor ground more roughly, starting from the second layer. In this case, you’ll have to apply more layers than you normally would for a smoother surface.
Step 3
Let the watercolor ground cure for at least 24 hours before painting watercolor on it. When it’s completely dry, you can start painting watercolor, oil, and acrylic paints on the surface.
Tip
If you want a very even and smooth surface to paint on, use a fine-grit sandpaper to sand the canvas when it’s completely dry.
Applying Watercolor Paint on Canvas
Now that you know the basic differences in the effects of watercolor paints on canvas and paper, you’re ready to get started. Keep in mind that there will be a period of experimentation and adjustment, which you’ll use to get ahead of the learning curve.
From learning how much paint to use in a single stroke to the glazing process, there’ll be quite a few things you need to get the hang of. So, we recommend utilizing your first watercolor canvas art as a test run.
Experimenting with different brush strokes, paint dilution, and concentration is the key to unlocking the power of blending, layering, and lifting techniques. You can reuse your watercolor canvas simply by lifting colors to correct any errors - this helps prevent waste and achieve a finished painting.
So, as long as there aren’t any layers of sealant or varnish, you can continue to tweak your artwork with different techniques. If you’d rather not lift colors repeatedly, you can cover the error with watercolor grounds and start all over again.
Step-by-Step Guide:
There aren’t any specific instructions for creating a watercolor painting on a canvas pad or board since every artist has their own art style. The basic steps are similar across different painting types, whether you’re using acrylic paint, watercolor, or oil paint. But you can always follow some recommended guidelines to make your first attempt successful. Follow these steps:
Step 1
Before you use watercolor on canvas, lightly sketch the subject and ancillary drawings on the surface with a pencil. If you’re worried about leaving grease stains on the pre-stretched canvas, consider using transfer paper while sketching. Masking fluid is another agent that helps in safeguarding your canvas and waterproofing the painting. You can also use this fluid if you wish to keep certain areas of the painting uncolored - do it at this step itself.
Step 2
Now you can begin painting watercolor on canvas. If you want a more solid base for your painting, use a background wash before getting started. Then proceed to add layers, details of the subject, and glazing. However, be wary while applying the glaze since it can be tricky - experiment with your mixing time and paint-water ratio.
And as always, there’s always the option of lifting color and starting over if you haven’t applied a sealant.
Step 3
If you’re feeling adventurous, try creating mixed-media art. Watercolor paints are compatible with various other media, such as acrylic and oil-based paints, so take advantage of this ability. You can also incorporate watercolor paints in an acrylic painting and vice versa - take your pick!
Step 4
As we’ve mentioned before, any error you make while you use watercolor on canvas can be corrected through color lifting. But there are other techniques as well. Simply use earbuds or a toothpick to scrape some of the paint off the area where you’ve made a mistake. And since watercolor canvas is quite durable, you won’t need to worry about ripping or tearing it.
Moreover, you can correct a fully dried painting - simply add water to the area using a round brush and scrub the paint off.
Step 5
Ensuring your watercolor canvas art is completely dry is a huge step towards increasing its longevity. Let the painting dry for at least 24 hours - this will also give you enough time to decide whether you want to make any changes before sealing.
Protecting Your Watercolor Canvas Art
The high resistance of canvas against humidity and debris is the most common reason why most artists prefer this medium after trying it. So, it doesn’t require glass or a wooden frame to protect it from the elements.
If you decide to hang your art on the wall as decoration, ensure you apply a thick layer of UV-resistant spray varnish or sealant. It’s always better to use spray varnish than brush a sealant on the surface since it can smear or lift the paint.
Remember that you can’t make any changes to the watercolor painting once you’ve sealed it, so ensure everything is in order. Also, ensure you spray the varnish only when the artwork is completely dry.
Moreover, you only need about three light layers of sealant to protect your painting, but ensure you let each layer dry for 20 minutes before applying the next. When you’re done sealing the painting, let it cure for a while, preferably for another 24 hours, before handling it. Properly sealing after you use watercolor on canvas makes it water-resistant, ultra-violet rays resistant, smudge-proof, and durable.
Different Watercolor Techniques
Learning about the basic techniques of watercolor painting can go a long way in preparing you to create a masterpiece. Of course, trial and error is a compulsory part of the journey, but having some knowledge reduces the chance of errors.
1. Lifting Technique
This technique is very useful for correcting areas or creating low-pigmented subjects such as clouds or eyes. It actually “lifts” the pigments from the surface of the watercolor paper or canvas. To do this, first, you cover the entire painting surface with a light coat of water and then paint the area with any color you want.
Ensure you use a lighter shade since lifting a darker shade is quite difficult, and we recommend scraping the paint in this case. Then, before your paint dries, use a clean brush or paper towel and firmly press it on the area where you don’t want color. This way, the paper towel or brush will soak the excess paint, leaving behind a colorless or lighter area.
2. Gradient Technique
This basic yet effective technique lets the watercolor bloom from a lighter to a darker shade. While creating a color gradient, you should pay close attention to the water-paint ratio to get a beautiful result. It is mostly used to paint sunsets, oceans, or landscape backgrounds.
After priming the surface with water, start with a dark shade of any color and add a thick layer on the uppermost part of the canvas or paper. While the paper is still wet, quickly keep adding layers and bringing the color to the bottom with clean, horizontal strokes without dipping the brush in an additional color. As you create layers upon layers, the brush consistently loses color, creating the beautiful gradient effect we’re aiming for.
For sunsets that include different colors, you can re-do the process with another color on top of the completed gradient while the surface is wet.
3. Wet-on-Dry Technique
The previous techniques involved the “wet-on-wet” art styles, so we’ll talk about something different here. A wet-on-dry technique denotes using paint on a dry surface - this process helps you make certain details stand out and set properly onto the canvas.
First, wet the surface and create a background with one color - apply it evenly and let it completely dry. You can use gradient or lifting techniques to create beautiful backgrounds in keeping with the theme of the main subject.
Once the background is completely dry, take a thin or pointed brush and draw your details using darker pigments.
Warning
Don’t add a lot of water to the paint since it can lead to unwanted blending or diffusion.
4. Wet-on-Wet And Wet-on-Dry Combination
This combined method is very popular for creating oceans or lakes with ripple-like effects. After covering the paper or canvas with water, you need to use the same technique as when creating a gradient effect. The only difference here is that you need to totally disconnect your brush from the paper occasionally to create negative spaces.
Next, while the paint is still wet, add darker pigment to create more depth - do this with wavy brushstrokes. However, the darker strokes should reduce in frequency as you reach the top of the canvas or page. This wet-on-wet technique allows the darker pigment to seep into the lighter one, creating a rippling, water-like motion.
Moving on to the wet-on-dry portion, using a side-to-side motion, apply blue strokes swiftly, but let the color fade as it moves to the top. Ensure you don’t add too much water to the color this time - the strokes should be dark and detailed.
Even though this technique is quite elaborate, it can be very effective in creating difficult themes such as water and sunsets.
Tips For Creating Watercolor Painting On Canvas
Now that you know all about creating watercolor paintings on canvas, here are some suggestions you can follow to enhance the experience. These tips will make the process a lot easier and enjoyable:
1. Start Off With Landscapes or Bouquets
Many artists prefer canvas to watercolor paper since it helps you to experiment more freely by allowing you to correct errors without worrying about starting over. And errors can get particularly daunting when creating a landscape with various minute details, such as trees (including branches, leaves, flowers), sky gradient, water, etc. So, we suggest taking advantage of the margin of error given by canvases and starting off with a serene landscape like a pine forest.
2. Drying Time
Wait for at least 24 hours before applying varnish or paint coating to your finished piece. This will prevent the colors from accidentally washing off or blending with the varnish or coating product. Also, read the label of the varnish carefully and follow the directions while working with it.
3. Choose The Right Varnish Method
Always use spray varnish on the canvas for watercolor paints since applying glaze or coating with a brush can lift the colors from the painting you’re trying to safeguard. Moreover, using a spray-on method is more convenient - you’ll be done with just three coats and won’t need to wash your brush or hands repeatedly to take the solution off.
4. Take Your Time
It is a common misconception that you must seal the painting immediately after completion. However, you can wait for a few weeks before you decide to apply the varnish. This will give you enough time to decide whether you’re satisfied with the finished product. But ensure you keep it in a dry, cool place away from contact.
5. Create Your Preferred Texture
Watercolor ground often creates a chalky, uneven texture that many people might not prefer. If you want a smoother surface, simply sand it down with fine-grit sandpaper. Then, take a cloth (preferably with no lint or lose threads) and remove the excess dust. Now you have a smooth, even canvas for watercolor.
How To Paint Watercolor On Canvas FAQs
Do I need to prime the canvas before painting with watercolors?
No, a pre-stretched canvas you purchase from the art store is already primed with watercolor gesso or absorbent ground. So, you won’t need to prime a readymade canvas – just start painting as you normally would on watercolor paper. But if you decide to make your own canvas, then preparation is necessary. Refer to the step-by-step guide on preparing a canvas, as this article mentions.
What kind of watercolors should I use on canvas?
A traditional canvas allows you to use pretty much all kinds of watercolors, including gouache, watercolor in tubes, pans, liquid watercolor, markers, etc. All you need to do is ensure the surface is wet enough for the pigment to show up and blend with others. Moreover, when using watercolor markers, the surface requires sanding since markers don’t thrive on textured canvases.
Overall, you need to be careful about the paint-water ratio for most kinds of watercolor products.
Can I mix watercolors with other mediums on canvas?
Watercolor canvas is a great surface for creating mixed-media art. Since the material is quite durable, unlike cold and hot pressed paper, it readily accepts other media like acrylic paint, ink, graphite pencil, etc. Many experts recommend experimenting with different media on canvas to achieve different depths and dimensions.
How do I prepare my canvas for watercolor painting?
If you decide to make your own raw canvas before painting, our step-by-guide on preparing a canvas will be helpful. As such, you need to cure the canvas with at least two layers of standard gesso. Then, you need to apply two to six layers of watercolor ground.
Depending on the texture preference, you can either roughly or smoothly apply the absorbent ground from the second layer. Let the canvas cure for 24 hours after this process. Once completely dry, sand the surface for an extra smooth base.
What techniques can I use for watercolor painting on canvas?
You can use all watercolor techniques on canvas – lifting, layering, blending, gradient, ombre, wet-on-wet, wet-on-dry, etc. Just be careful about the paint-water ratio and let the colors dry properly, and you’re good to go.
How do I ensure the watercolors don't bleed on canvas?
Typically, watercolors don’t bleed on canvas unless you’ve neglected to use the right water-to-paint ratio and drying time. After painting one section, let the area dry completely before you paint the next section – this will prevent the color from bleeding unnecessarily. Moreover, priming the canvas well is another way to ensure it readily accepts the paint.
How do I frame a watercolor painting on canvas?
You can directly hang the painting or let it rest against a shelf or wall when the artwork is cured and dried. However, if you don’t prefer the raw look of canvas, you can get it framed in a wooden or glass frame based on the preferred aesthetic. If you’re unsure how to fix it in a frame, send it to a photography shop specializing in framing.
How do I care for my watercolor painting on canvas?
The spray varnish that you’ll use after finishing the paint will sufficiently protect it from UV rays, humidity, and dirt. However, you can never be too careful – so you should put the canvas in a dry area that is away from direct sunlight and human traffic. You can also consider framing it in a wooden frame to protect it from rodents and debris.
To Sum It Up
Before ready-made canvases were invented, artists had to stick to watercolor papers for their art. And even though the paper did allow brighter hues and mobility, people started demanding permanent structure as the art style evolved. Thus, watercolor canvas gained popularity as the most preferred art medium for watercolor, gouache, and even oil-based paints.
If you’ve never tried painting on canvases before, we recommend using it since it allows you to experiment with different techniques more freely. And if you do make mistakes, you can always lift the color or scrub the area to get the paint off. You’ll never know the full scope of your artistic abilities, especially when it comes to watercolors, if you don’t try painting on canvas!
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is one of the best high-quality options to add depth to your artwork. The QoR watercolor medium by Golden is a close second and can help you increase the luminosity of your painting. On the other hand, the Holbein Ox Gall Medium is best for working with painting techniques like wet-on-wet.
Sometimes, a good watercolor medium is all you need to elevate your paintings.
A medium helps you alter the properties of your wet paint. For instance, you can play with the consistency, texture, and drying time of your paints by mixing them with a suitable medium.
However, which one should you go for and why? In this article, I will tell you about the top 5 watercolor mediums in detail.
Increases the granulation of color, giving a mottled...
For maximum effect dilute colour generously with medium...
What I like
Easy to apply and remove
Helps create a smooth wash easily
Adjusts gloss and texture
Lasts long
What I don't like
Extremely runny texture
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is a must-have for every watercolor enthusiast. It can help you add a decent texture and depth to your paintings. All you need to do is use your best watercolor markers or pencils to sketch your drawing and mix this medium with your choice of watercolor paint or ink. This way, you can easily experiment with a granulated effect!
The best thing about this medium is that you get to work with various textures. You can achieve anything from subtle changes to bold transitions by adjusting the granulation medium you add to your paint.
For instance, when I wanted to paint a house using watercolors - I used the granulation medium to create textures that resemble that of bricks or wood. Or, if I wanted to create elements like a leaf, this medium helped me achieve a textured and mottled appearance for the same.
It is important to note that the Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is a little runny in texture, which is great if you want to create a soft blended look in your painting surface. However, you can find better options if you are looking to paint precise details in smaller sections.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Matte | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle | Volume: 75 ml or 2.5 oz.
Watercolor Medium is a general purpose medium used to...
It also increases the gloss and saturation of colors when...
What I like
Increases luminosity
Improves pigment intensity
Ability to provide both matte and glossy finish by varying the amount of medium used
Comes with a dropper
What I don't like
No instruction manual
If you like adding a transparent, glossy texture to your paintings, the QoR medium by Golden might be the best option. It can be used to create a variety of glazes and textures and is suitable for both beginner and professional watercolor artists.
You can adjust the glossiness of your painting by varying the amount of medium you add to your paint. For instance, I used to add a normal amount if I wanted my artwork to shine brightly and fewer drops to achieve a more matte finish.
The QoR medium also allows you to enhance the intensity of your watercolor pigments, which is why it is popularly used to work with vibrant colors. I used this medium to add beautiful elements like a flower, tree, or sky to my paintings. It also helped me create a smooth and even dry wash, which helped me further elevate my art piece.
This medium has a dropper, making it very easy to use. However, you can also use a brush or spray bottle to apply it as per your convenience.
The only drawback with this product is that it comes with no instruction manual, which might be a problem for beginners who rely on such manuals to learn product use. Other than that, the QoR medium is definitely worth a try.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Gloss | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle with dropper | Volume: 59 ml or 2 oz.
Improves flow and transparency of a watercolor paint
Works great with watercolor painting techniques, such as wet-on-wet
Extends the drying time of your watercolor paint
Enhanced adhesion allows the artwork to last longer
What I don't like
Strong odor
Made from the extract of cow bladder, the ox gall medium is popular for increasing flow and transparency of watercolor paints. The one sold by Holbein is a great option, especially if you are looking for a medium to prevent blotching on your watercolor paper.
The Holbein ox gall medium allows artists to create smooth and even washes in their artworks while giving them great control over the flow of watercolor paint. All these features make this artist-grade wetting agent an ideal medium for the wet-on-wet watercolor painting technique.
Using this medium, I could easily create smooth transitions, gradients, and hues in my watercolor painting. It also prevents the paint from drying out quickly, which helped me paint for long hours without needing to constantly re-wet my painting.
However, the Holbein ox gall medium has a strong odor. If you are sensitive to strong smells, there might be better options for you.
Contains gum arabic, honey, water and a preservative
Thin with water
What I like
Made up of good-quality materials like gum arabic and honey
Easy to use
Can make paints more versatile
Smooth texture
What I don't like
A little costlier than the others
The Sennelier watercolor binding medium is easy to use and best for artists who want to avoid sticking to a particular watercolor paint pigment or consistency. It has a smooth and consistent texture and blends decently well with watercolors.
This Gum Arabic-based medium enhances the flow and transparency of watercolors, which is why they are popularly used while painting with certain techniques, such as glazing and layering. Apart from that, you can mix this medium with your watercolors to create your custom palette or use it to modify the existing properties of your paints.
If you like purchasing only high-quality art tools, the Sennelier watercolor binding medium will not disappoint you. It comprises ingredients, such as gum arabic, honey, and water. As a result, the medium works well to help enhance the overall quality of your artwork.
This medium comes from a very reputed brand and is a little costlier than other mediums. However, a great quality product seldom comes at a low price.
Color: Clear | Finish type: Semi-gloss | Form: Liquid |Package: Bottle | Volume: 200 ml or 6.8 oz.
Thickens watercolors and gouache to give an impasto effect
What I like
Gel texture
Thick consistency
Easy to blend
Can be used to create effects with impasto medium
What I don't like
Makes the paints appear slightly lighter than they originally are
Sometimes, all your painting lacks is a little opacity - and that is exactly what the Winsor & Newton Aquapasto watercolor medium provides you with. Its gel-like texture medium allows you to create a sense of depth in your artwork and play with several effects.
The consistency of this watercolor medium is quite thick but can be thinned out to achieve your desired texture. It blends with wet paint easily, and there are no hassles even when using the Aquapasto medium with acrylic paint sets.
Using this blending medium, I got to work with a huge spectrum of effects. It helped me create everything from smooth and glossy effects to rough textures. Like any good blending medium, it slows the drying time of your painting - thus making it easier to paint for a long time.
The Aquapasto is well-known for its thickening abilities while working with watercolors and gouache. Hence, you can also use it to create an impasto gel medium effect in your painting.
However, if you prefer using luminous paints in your artwork, you might not love the Winsor & Newton Aquapasto. It makes watercolors appear slightly lighter and less transparent.
Color: Transparent | Finish type: Matte | Form: Gel |Package: Tube | Volume: 60 ml
Factors To Consider While Buying Watercolor Mediums
1. Quality
The quality of mediums you use can make or break your artwork. Hence, only go for high-quality ones made up of ingredients like gum arabic and cellulose. Also, ensure that they are acid-free to prevent accidental damage to your paintings (and to yourself!).
2. Type Of Medium
Depending on the type of your painting, you may require a specific kind of medium. You can choose from various mediums, such as gesso, varnish, and masking fluid while looking for one. Further, it is best to go for gum arabic-based mediums if you want a binding effect in your paintings.
3. Compatibility
You need to ensure that your art tools are compatible with your choice of medium. For instance, applying a medium that needs water for activation on watercolor sketchbooks that can only hold a small amount of water is not a good idea. Doing so may lead to the paper getting damaged.
4. Budget
Finally, you should find a medium that suits your budget well. You should carefully assess the functions you need your medium to serve and then decide on a budget that doesn't strain your wallet.
FAQs Related To Watercolor Mediums
What are the different types of watercolor mediums available in the market?
The different kinds of mediums available on the market are texture medium, granulating medium, permanent masking medium, lifting preparation medium, and so on. You can also go for an iridescent medium or a varnish, depending on the type of your painting.
How do watercolor mediums differ, and which one should I use for my painting?
The mediums differ in texture, consistency, and their effects on the watercolors you combine them with. You should choose one based on the blending techniques you will use in your artwork and the textural effects you wish to create.
Can I mix different watercolor mediums to achieve a specific effect?
Yes, you can mix different mediums to achieve a specific effect. However, check their compatibility first to see whether they will work together. You may also experiment with their proportions and apply them to your artwork.
How do I store my watercolor mediums properly to ensure their longevity?
You should store your mediums properly in a cool and dry place to ensure their longevity. It is best to keep them away from direct sunlight exposure and extreme temperatures. Additionally, make sure to wipe the cap of your medium bottle using a paper towel so that it is sealed properly.
How do I apply watercolor mediums to my painting, and how do I know how much to use?
You can apply mediums to your painting by using tools like a wet brush, sponge, or spray. The amount of medium that you use should depend on several factors such as the kind of finish you want in your illustration and the consistency of paints that you are aiming for.
What are the benefits and drawbacks of using watercolor mediums in my paintings?
A good medium (binding medium, lifting preparation medium, etc.) can help you increase the vibrancy of your paints and enhance their transparency. You can also use a medium to create a wide range of effects, such as adding gloss or creating an iridescent medium. However, certain watercolor mediums can alter the color of your paint by either lightening or darkening its hue – thus making it difficult to achieve your desired shades.
Conclusion
It is best to experiment with different mediums to find which one suits you best. Additionally, you should apply them in layers to increase depth and add texture. Following these tips can help you create stunning artwork. You can also go through a tutorial on sites like Skillshare to practice your skill of medium application.
The Winsor & Newton Granulation Medium is one of the best options. It provides much room for a creative experience, and you can add a lot of depth and texture using this medium.
However, if you like a glossy finish in your paintings, the QoR watercolor medium won't disappoint you. The Holbein ox gall is the best medium to create wet or dry washes and works well if you like creating smooth transitions.
And with that, I have reached the end of this blog post. Goodbye!
Water volleyball is fun, exciting, and safe, so it can be played by people of all ages. Moreover, the rules of this game are straightforward, so beginners won’t have a tough time understanding it, which is why it’s a popular sport among college students.
Is one of the best volleyball pool nets lying in your garage?
Sure, summer is the best month to play water volleyball; after all, jumping into the water and passing a ball between two teams without dropping it sounds fun. And the rules of water volleyball are similar to traditional volleyball, but the risk of injury is low.
Here we’ll walk you through 13 things you wouldn’t find in any volleyball rule book. Keep reading!
Water Volleyball 101: 13 Things You Need to Know
1. The Number Of Players Varies
As against traditional volleyball, each team in water volleyball usually consists of four players– called a four-by-four. If you’re playing in the pool and want to crowd it, you can have a team of six players or six-by-six.
In water volleyball, if players wish to play a co-ed game, they can add two women and two men to each team or three-and-three.
With teams of four players, two are supposed to be in the back, while the other two will be on the net. Even if you play the game with six players, the setup will remain the same.
Are only five people willing to play water volleyball? Well, go ahead because water volleyball is a highly versatile sport.
2. Water Volleyball Rules Are Similar To Regular Volleyball But Has A Few Differences
Water volleyball rules are quite similar to regular volleyball, but there are a few dissimilarities too. They are as follows:
A. Number Of Players
The number of players in water volleyball can be between two and four, depending on the size of the pool. However, court volleyball isn’t as flexible as the former; as such, only six people are allowed in the game, with three on the backline and three on the front.
B. Winning
In water volleyball, the winning score depends on the mutual understanding of players and can either be 11, 15, or 25. Furthermore, the winner must have a two-point lead and win two out of three matches.
On the other hand, the first team who reaches 15 points in the fifth game wins the game in regular volleyball. Moreover, the winning team must lead the game with a lead of two points. Not just that, but it must also win three games out of five to emerge as a winner.
C. Scoring
The scoring rules of water volleyball differ from that of court volleyball.
Such as, in water volleyball, you win points whenever the ball lands in the water after passing through the net on the opponent’s side. You also win a point whenever the ball touches the net but doesn’t pass through.
Meanwhile, you win points in court volleyball whenever the ball strikes the court. But remember, the opponent team will win a point if your team members strike the ball more than thrice in a row. Whenever two players of a team touch the ball simultaneously, it is considered as one hit.
One similarity that both water volleyball and court volleyball share is that the opposing team will win a point if you double-hit the ball.
3. Elderly People Can Play Water Volleyball
Court volleyball can injure your lower back, shoulder, knee, and fingers, taking a toll on a player’s body. Moreover, as people age, their knees and back become less flexible, so they cannot play court volleyball.
For elderly people, water volleyball is an excellent sport because water is easier on the joints. Among older adults, it has become highly popular, and YMCAs and athletic clubs are training teams for water volleyball.
4. Water Volleyball Is A Great Exercise
Court volleyball is an excellent way to keep yourself fit, but there’s a high risk of injury. But playing the same sport in water boosts your strength and muscle toning without exposing you to back or knee injuries.
5. Water Volleyball Has Different Names
Did you know that water volleyball is often called pool volleyball? Most people call it pool volleyball because it’s usually played in swimming pools.
However, you can play it in any water body of the required size and depth as long as you know how to set a net. And if you don’t know how to build a pool volleyball net, look for tutorials online, and you’ll be good to go! You can even make a pool volleyball net by using backyard volleyball net with having to proper tools for the pool.
Another name for water volleyball is splash volleyball because of all the splashing that occurs in water.
Spanish people call it Voleibol Acuatico, while Brazilians refer to it as Aqua-Volei. On the other hand, Italian residents call it Acqua Pallavolo, and it’s known as Wasser Volleyball in Germany.
6. Water Volleyball Is Different From Water Polo And Water Aerobics
Water volleyball, water polo, and water aerobics are water activities, but they are different from each other.
Water aerobics is a fantastic exercise for older adults because the buoyancy makes it easy for them to use their muscles without putting excessive strain on fragile bones and joints. Unlike water aerobics, water polo is a sport similar to basketball or soccer. In water polo, the player’s objective is to throw the ball in the opponent team’s goal.
However, it’s a tough game because it’s played in a deep swimming pool so that players’ feet don’t touch the floor of the swimming pool.
7. Official Court Dimensions Must Be Followed
Even in water volleyball, players must follow official court dimensions if they intend to play “officially.” A 30 x 60 feet court with a net of about 24 feet long is perfect for playing water volleyball. Note that the net must dangle one foot above the water.
And those wondering what size pool for volleyballisideal, let us tell you that a pool of four to five feet is sufficient for enjoying the sport.
The court must be adjusted to accommodate players’ ability level and strength. Like, people whose cardiovascular health isn’t good may enjoy playing in a small space.
While the court can be adjusted, you can’t do much when it comes to the size of the pool. So, if your pool is 20 ft wide, your court will also be the same size.
8. Water Volleyball Isn’t An Olympic Sport
Contrary to what people say, water volleyball isn’t considered an Olympic sport. Certainly, this may invite a lot of mixed reactions from people, but we think that it isn’t regarded as an Olympic sport because it isn’t bound by formal rules.
9. Biribol Sport Originated Before Water Volleyball
Dario Miguel Pedro, a Brazilian professor, developed the Biribol sport in the 1960s, which is similar to water volleyball. As against water volleyball, Biribol is a popular sport in Brazil, with numerous teams in Brazilian towns and a Brazilian National League.
10. Water Volleyball Is Played In Many Colleges
Besides local leagues, YMCAs, and athletic clubs, water volleyball is popular among college students and is played in many colleges. Lenoir-Rhyne University in Hickory, North Carolina, University of San Diego, California, University of South Florida, and Iowa State University, to name a few, are colleges where water volleyball is played.
11. Water Volleyball Is A Great Pick-Up Game
Are you a member of a club that has a swimming pool? If yes, that’s great because finding a couple of people who are fond of playing water volleyball won’t be difficult.
The water of the swimming pool acts as an equalizer, allowing people of varying skill levels to work together as a team. And since the rules of the game aren’t set in stone, you can play it with two or three players on each team.
12. Water Volleyball Is Played With A Ball Specifically Made For The Sport
While you can use soccer or beach balls to play water volleyball, it’s advisable to use a ball made explicitly for the game. Or, to be precise, you need to have a waterproof ball to enjoy water volleyball, which soccer and court volleyballs aren’t.
In this regard, the GoSports Water Volleyball 3 Pack is an excellent option, whose outer layer is soft and is eight-inch in size. And the best part? It’s a three-ball pack, so you can play the game uninterrupted even if your ball flies out of the swimming pool. However, you can use a soccer ball or a beach ball in case you’re in a pinch.
13. Water Volleyball Is A Fun Sport
Water volleyball is boring– said no one ever! After all, you don’t get hurt in the water; the rules of water volleyball are pretty straightforward, and not to forget, every player is in a cheerful mood.
Water Volleyball Wrapping It Up
That’s pretty much it– things about water volleyball that no one told you before!
Like sack races, water volleyball isn’t an official sport, but both are enjoyable. Be it a beach, pool, pond, or lake– water volleyball can be played anywhere, provided the water body is of the appropriate depth and size.
And since it doesn’t exert much pressure on the joints, it makes for an excellent sport for people who no longer play court volleyball. Irrespective of whether your team wins or loses, remember it’s just a game. Have fun, folks!
If you think gardens are just for greens, then you may not be totally right!
And one of the things that you certainly don’t want to miss out on is a water feature. After all, who wouldn’t like coming back to the sound of trickling water after a long day at work? Besides, these structures invite several pollinators like birds and butterflies, which ultimately facilitate plant growth.
So, here we are with the 48 best water feature ideas that will turn your garden into your favorite zone. Whether you’re a DIY enthusiast or not, we’ve something for each requirement.
Now, let’s get started, shall we?
Best Water Feature Ideas
Mixed Metal Water Fountain
If you have got some leftover metal parts in your garage, then this first idea is just for you. Transform a humble metal tank into the showstopper of your backyard using some galvanized metal, washers, a low shutoff water pump, washers, and a tap.
Place your favorite greens inside the tank, and you’re done! For the finishing touch, bring in the old watering can.
Plant Pot Water Fountain
This simple structure consists of two plant pots, one smaller than the other. The bigger one forms the base, so throw in a large pail and cover it with a pot saucer. Add in some river stones above it and make way for the other pot. Don’t forget to seal any drainage holes. Lastly, drop a solar pump for water flow.
Galvanized Bucket Solar Fountain
Simplicity has its charm, and so does a plain galvanized bucket. Grab your favorite aquatic plants like cyperus involucratus (baby tut), taro, canna lily, Siberian iris, liriope, etc., while still planted in their respective containers; the roots will keep the water clean.
Then, put them in the bucket and fill water till you cover the roots. Finally, submerge a solar fountain pump.
Bubbling Water Fountain
Okay, now constructing this feature is likely to take quite a lot of time, so make sure you have enough on hand. Using a mortar mix, prepare two circular molds (the fountain) with a water inlet and a well-like base that’ll house the fountain pump. While we like the earthen look, you can paint the feature to amp up the setup.
Wooden Barrel Water Fountain
While taking a quick breather from DIY projects, let us introduce you to this classic wooden barrel-style water fountain. What we liked the most about it is the interiors are lined with a plastic coating to prevent any moisture or mold buildup. That said, you can always build one with any material of your choice, or even change the colors if you like.
Tiered Flower Pot Fountain
Remember the plant pot water fountain we talked about? Well, here’s a variation that you can try for larger backyards. This time, we got three PVC pots instead of two and drilled a hole in the bottom of the base pot to feed the plug through it. We also found that two-part epoxy putty works better to seal the drainage hole, especially for warmer areas.
Ceramic Cascade Birth Bath Fountain
Planning to get rid of that old ceramic tea set? You might want to wait till you see this next water fixture. Thanks to a concealed solar water pump, the mesmerizing water flow from one level to the other is a sight to behold. Plus, it can be the perfect holiday gift for friends or family.
Tiny Egg Fountain
A smaller alternative to the bubbling water fountain is this ceramic sphere fountain top, which is ideal for your patio or indoor garden. Here again, you can create the spheres, but we think you should get the pre-drilled ones at a nursery. Similarly, find a plastic tub that’s big enough to hold the spheres. Set it up with a fountain pump, and that’s about it.
Solar-On-Demand Fountain
Bring regality to your backyard with this weathered stone-finished water fountain. But there’s more than just looks that made us include it in the list. Not only can you switch it on and off with the press of a button, but the unit also stores solar energy for nighttime use. A full day of sun exposure equals six hours of charge.
Patio Water Wall
As they say, ‘Rome wasn’t built in a day’! Sure, this patio water wall won’t be among the quickest constructions but is worth the time and effort. If you can find a safe space, you can even place it in the garden, but we prefer the patio placement. After all, what is better than the serene sound of water to calm the senses?
Blue Planters Waterfall
Blue amidst green is quite a symbiotic relationship as each color helps the other to stand out. And the fun part about the design is that it houses some really simple and cheap materials to steer the water circulation. If you don’t find blue pots, buy plain terracotta pots and paint them before use. Sounds like a creative weekend activity for your kids, right?
Disappearing/Underground Water Fountain
Not in the mood for a prominent fountain structure? Then how about an underground installation? A decorative rock fountain that has just the water stream on display is a brilliant compromise between an open pool and a free-standing arrangement, but you may need extra help for the construction. And allow us to suggest a colored water stream for an added appeal.
Three-Tier Fountain
We thought recreating the tiered flower pot fountain for a bigger version would be a costly affair till we came across this structure. Just head to a thrift shop nearby and pick up some fixtures, spacers, and basins. The measurements and numbers will depend upon the desired height of the fountain. Finish off with a layer of paint, or keep the rustic charm as is.
Spring-Inspired Pond
If you’re looking to upgrade the walkway, then here’s a DIY water feature that may well be the perfect accent. Moreover, you can even recycle the existing slabs to support the pond, so that’s a win-win! Throw in whichever aquatic plant you like, or skip this step, but ensure water circulation to prevent building a mosquito breeding ground.
Tea Pot Fountain
There’s a high chance that this free-standing feature makes you say ‘how did I even build it’ after installation! An old iron teapot becomes the water source, while the water flows into the barrel base via a shallow bowl. Aside from being relatively simple to assemble, it can be easily put away when not in use.
Water Garden
We’re loving how this compact wooden garden has brought so much life to the space. Plus, building one such frame isn't a lot of hard work-just keep the right tools in the vicinity. However, ensure that you line the insides with a water sealant for durability. Furthermore, drill a couple of holes in the bottom for drainage if required.
Overflowing Ceramic Pot Fountain
If you’re fond of the rhythm of babbling water, we recommend this overflowing ceramic pot fountain. The water bubbles up from the spigot to create a dramatic effect, that honestly, we’re living for.
As the cool overflowing water hugs the outside surface before disappearing into the gravel reservoir below, let your fingers experience the soothing tactile pressure. Simply magical, we say!
Nested Ceramic Pot With Fountain
By placing a second, larger ceramic pot at the bottom, you can create a big ‘center of attraction’ piece, especially for larger spaces. Or, create a miniature version for your indoor garden. Throw in some river rocks to streamline the water flow.
Old Flower Pot Fountain
Loosely based around the ‘Leaning Tower of Pisa’, this structure is perhaps the best use of old terracotta pots that are about to be thrown away. Because of its angle, the river rocks are clearly visible even from a distance. But make sure that you seal any holes to prevent the water from flooding the ground.
Circular Water Wall
The appearance may tell you otherwise, but this circular water well is actually pretty sturdy, and you can make it even more stable by opting for thicker glass. Apart from that, you’ll need a fair bit of welding to secure the structure on the ground, so call in some professionals. Install a couple of landscape lights for that alluring effect.
Stacked Stones Fountain
For centuries, stone stacking has been known as an active form of meditation. But given the busy lives of people today, it may be a better idea to install this structure once and for all. The number of stones will depend on the desired height of the fountain, but make sure that all of them have flat surfaces to aid seamless stacking.
Watering Can Fountain
Nothing speaks of countryside vibes like this watering cans and galvanized tank fountain. Connect the three in a way so that water flows from one to another without exposing the pump or tubes. In that sense, the only prerequisite may be a fence or wall that can support the structure. A pro tip: use old metal hangers as the brackets.
Bamboo Trickling Waterfall Basin
Heavily inspired by Japanese gardens, the trickling waterfall basin uses a long length of bamboo supported by two narrower lengths, which help trickle the water down to a ceramic basin. In this particular instance, the white color represents the zen element, but you can also choose a darker color to create a beautiful contrast. The result? A corner you wouldn’t want to leave easily!
Pretty Little Pail Fountain
Try this super simple pail fountain to break the monotony of greens in your garden. It basically uses just one element- a pail. Add tons of gravel to fill the bucket to the point where only the stream is visible. The bits of sea glass bring a pop of color to the monotony of cream and gray.
Cascading Copper Wall Waterfall
If you grow too many colorful flowers in the garden, then this cascading copper wall waterfall is the perfect accent to provide visual balance. Grab a simple copper sheet and attach it to a box-like reservoir. We also suggest polishing the sheet before assembly for a smooth water flow.
Fun And Fancy Wheelbarrow Waterfall
Don’t we all have that first wheelbarrow, which is too close to disposing of? Well, by converting it into a funky waterfall, you can keep it as memorabilia of your initial gardening days. The tilted angle gives a feel as if it’s ‘building’ its reservoir. But a bit of illusion doesn’t hurt anybody!
Loop de Loo Waterfall Chain
Seasonal water features are a great way to save water without compromising on uniqueness. For example, this copper chain waterfall can be hung from the shade of the patio on rainy days. Likewise, multiple chains within a few inches of each other will create a uniform water flow.
Ceramic Urn Fountain
A ceramic urn fountain can be the perfect decor to make add a touch of elegance to those dull corners of the garden. Plus, you don’t need a lot of tools or equipment to make this. One thing to know- some people prefer planting the pot directly in the soil, so we think it’s better to add a liner in the hole for reinforced stability.
“Treasury Of Rocks” Pail Fountain
It’s safe to say that one of the most liked river-side views is that of the shining pebbles underneath clear water. And this fountain emulates that frame to a good extent. You can slightly modify it by adding or removing the metal containers. However, don’t skip a standout piece like the stunning blue bobble to create that dramatic statement.
Vineyard Inspired Barrel Fountain
The best way to show your love for wine is by dedicating a structure in the honor of your favorite wine brand. All you need is an old wine barrel that’ll serve as the reservoir cover when inverted. Bring the tube through the bottle to secure it firmly atop the base. Alternatively, you can use two or three bottles for a unique look.
“Water Tumbling Down The Wall” Feature
This fun yet attractive water feature can be thought of as an expanded version of the teapot fountain. Water starts flowing from the old watering can to the pipes to the downspout to the bucket. The latter is equipped with a spigot that ultimately lets the water into the galvanized washtub. Frankly, we can look at the water flow for hours and still won’t get bored!
Now, let’s take a look at some of the larger water features that can be included in your landscape.
Tall Stone Gateway Water Feature
Confused between a fountain and a pond? Don’t be anymore. This striking stone gateway water feature lets you have the best of both worlds. Get the natural sunlight to bounce off the fountain stream and meet the pond below for a mesmerizing view. Heads up: you’ll need plenty of time and work to get this one done, so plan well in advance.
Cascading Waterfall With Stairs
A cascading waterfall that runs over rocky steps makes for a sight to behold. You can surround it with a mix of plants and boulders, which will also double up as its boundary. That said, features like these require a lot of space. So, customizing it to fit smaller spaces may not be a bad idea.
Pond With Fish And Plants
As traditional as it may sound, the traditional charm of a fish pond remains an unmatched phenomenon. The secluded bench completes the harmony between everything that’s a part of this serene waterscape. Moreover, the plant reflections and tickling sound of water create a relaxing environment for the koi fishes. Just make sure to add them after you’re done with the rest.
Asian Style Water Garden
Water features don’t always have to be limited to the outdoors. For example, this garden pond draws inspiration from a combination of feng shui and bonsai art to extend its boundary to the transition area between the indoor-outdoor space. A couple of chairs here and a bean bag there will make you not want to leave this corner.
Water Garden With Wooden Bridge
With this setup, you can leave it to the onlookers to choose their respective points of focus. But whatever draws your attention, we bet you can’t ignore the tranquil connection between the water, rocks, bridges, and flowers. We love this flat-shaped bridge, but you can also opt for the conventional curved variant.
Natural Water Feature With Rock Edging
You don’t need fancy ornaments to accentuate a simple natural water body, as is evident from our next example. We’re really impressed with how the rock barrier adds depth to the pond by cutting between the green and the almost-green water. Another advantage is that you can start off with a smaller pond, and then expand it over time.
Crystal Waterfall On Brick Wall
Yes, we know, crystal waterfall sounds every bit fallacious, but it makes for an extremely unique view, nonetheless. The secret? basins with concealed LED lights. As the water falls from the wall, it reflects the light below, thereby giving a sparkling effect like that of crystals.
Water Feature With Spurting Jets
We usually think of water jets to be part of hot tubs, but not anymore. While the water jets here create a dome-like structure with the stream, you can alter the placements to replicate any shape you want. Accordingly, change the accents to things that best complement the resultant effect.
Multi-Layer Rock Garden
The versatility of multi-layer rock gardens makes them a suitable choice for both central and corner positions in your garden. As the cascading stream makes its way from one level to another, the oxygenated water enhances the positive vibes in the surrounding areas. And if quacking isn't an issue, feel free to bring in a couple of ducks.
Rain Shower Fountain
This rain shower fountain is your literal getaway to a rainy day! Use a pressure-treated lumber frame to build this gorgeous frame for anytime rain at the convenience of your backyard. Not only can you install a waterproof strip of LED lighting, but you can also customize the dimensions according to the size of your garden.
Looking Glass Water Feature
We’re in awe of how the glass ball looks as if it has risen from the water bed to show the future. While we feel that this plain transparent ball works the best for the cause, you can replace it with any other color or even shape.
Mini Oasis With Waterfall Feature
Rejuvenate your senses with the sound of trickling water by building a circular boundary made from rough-hewn stone. It uses a long ‘keystone’ to initiate the water flow that collects at the pond-like structure below. A mix of prostate and bright flowery plants like chrysanthemums, zinnias, lazy susans, etc. softens’ the rough edges of the stones.
Tornado Garden Fountain In Glass Container
Not many designs define ‘out-of-the-box’ thinking like this tornado-shaped waterfall. It sits inside a glass cylinder, which is in turn, surrounded by a circle containing contrasting pebbles. And as always, adding a few LED lights will let you enjoy the view even in the dark.
Spurting Face Water Feature
We bet this idea takes you back to the hit 90s show “Legends of the Hidden Temple'’. As talks about reviving it for a version with adult contestants doing the rounds, this spurting face water feature will become the highlight of your garden in no time. And may we strongly recommend installing a couple of red LED lights for the eyes.
Water Fountain With Regular Steps And Stones
If you’re into contemporary designs, then this modern water feature should be on your list of must-haves. It’s basically a combination of stones, decking, and water plants that come together for this classy waterscape. The only thing to consider- the price of assembling this one may be on the higher side.
Traditional Garden Design With Vases
Here’s a design that will double up as a water provider to birds. Equipped all the vases with a water fountain pump to accommodate more birds. Besides, you can turn it into a seasonal affair by activating the pumps only during summer.
Gazebo Water Feature
Is your backyard blessed with a pond and gazebo? Then how about creating a winding path adorned with stones and flowers that surrounds the pond and leads to the gazebo? The different textures and colors certainly come together for a gorgeous landscape.
Garden Filled Pond
Before we wrap up, here’s a simple yet elegant water feature idea that’ll save you a lot of money and time. Simply add in a lot of aquatic plants in the pond to create a colorful centerpiece. Besides, the roots of the plants will keep away mold formation on the water surface.
Bathtub Pond
To end the list with something simple, here’s a DIY plant-filled pond that’s perhaps the best way to recycle your old bathtub. By attaching a fountain pump, you can circulate the water or leave it stagnant. In the case of the latter, make sure you change the water regularly to keep it clean.
Final Thoughts
That’s all from us on the best water feature ideas.
Hopefully, we’ve brought enough options to the table for you to choose from. And now, we leave you to take the final pick. Almost all our recommendations can be customized to fit a given space, so that’s a bonus!
On that note, we’ll take your leave, but not without a quick pro tip: circulating water involves less maintenance. So, try to install a fountain pump in your structure.
Polyurethane is the most popular finish for hardwood floors. Why, you ask?
It’s because the most important features of a good finish are good and long-term protection for the floor. That’s not all; the finish has to fight off impurities, such as grime, dust, and dirt to keep the floor healthy. And polyurethane does all that effectively.
But then, the question arises - should you opt for water-based or oil-based variants? And that’s exactly what we’ll discuss in this guide today.
This floor finish dries up rather quickly after application. Usually, it takes about two hours to dry up well enough to apply more coats. The advantage of this is that you can apply many coats in a single day.
As a result, your job might be done faster with this water-based floor finish. And it will even be low on odor. What’s more, a clear finish will keep things convenient and quick because all you need is water to clean up the floor when you want to.
Furthermore, a water-based polyurethane floor finish accentuates the ‘character’ of the wood slightly. So, if you just want a protective floor finish without much ado, apply this finish to the hardwood in your room.
Also, if you already like the color of the wood on the floor, simply highlight it with this solution. For example, if you love the way maple speaks to you, buy a water-based polyurethane floor finish to keep it that way!
Some Disadvantages
The biggest consideration before using water-based polyurethane is the expense involved in coating the floor with this finish. Water-based finishes are almost twice as costly as oil-based variants.
Furthermore, water-based polyurethane floor finishes contain only 30-35% solids. This is not enough to protect the floor in one application. That becomes one of the reasons for you to apply four coats as opposed to two or three, which may seem sufficient upon application.
That’s not all; the look of the floor after the coating dries up, may not be shiny or bright at all. In fact, the floor can exude almost a dead-pan look. You may face some difficulties in following the strokes of your applications because the water-based finish is completely clear.
In other words, marking the strokes at the right places might be necessary to do a neat job.
The best part about using oil-based variants for the floor is that the applications get fewer in this instance. The finish costs much less than water-based solutions for floor finishes. Moreover, it does not require too much maintenance over a considerable period of time.
Also, it goes perfectly with certain kinds of wood. It leaves an amber glow to the floor that looks rich and glossy in some instances.
Oil-based polyurethane contains 45 to 50% solids. It is the presence of these solids in the floor finish that give it a protective layer after application.
Some Disadvantages
The coats of this oil-based polyurethane floor finish take a long time to dry up. The waiting time between each application is five hours. When you apply the final coat to the floor, you might as well say goodbye to the room for one half of the day!
So, it takes twelve hours for the finishing touches to settle and dry up. Before using this floor finish, it is best to organize the house or working space in such a way so that you don't need the room for a day.
How To Maintain The Floor Finish
For starters, sweep the floor every day or vacuum it from time to time to pull out the latent impurities stuck there. Put carpets or rugs in those areas that are used frequently by people. Apart from that, you may vacuum the dust off the rugs once in a while to maintain the house.
This is a simple and effective way to clean and preserve the floor finish, irrespective of your preference - water or oil-based polyurethane.
On that note, we will sign off. Till next time, take care!
This is a discontinued product, no longer available on the market.
The Waring Pro ICT400 might have received rave reviews, but does that mean it will work for you?
Obviously, not all of us have the same cooking style or requirements. Therefore, it's essential to answer this question with the help of thorough research. Undoubtedly, it's one of the most advanced and performance-driven models on the market.
But we decided to look into every aspect before giving our recommendation. While it offers a range of benefits, it has a fault or two that didn't escape our critical analysis. Nevertheless, there are no significant disadvantages that could discourage purchase.
We can also assure you that our assessment is reliable, as we tested all the important parameters, so you can decide without a second thought.
Let’s get down to business.
Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop
Why Buy This Product?
The ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop is truly one of the best options in this price range. However, we won't ask you to take our word for it; instead, take a look at the advantages it offers, starting with...
Smart Controls
The first thing that caught our attention is the user-friendly controls, streamlining your kitchen experience from the get-go. The buttons are pretty self-explanatory, and you don't need to sweat about which does what.
Each of them is intuitively placed on the front of the cooktop, ensuring easy access and visibility. That said, the panel includes on/off, timer, heat, and up/down functions. The heat control lets you set the desired temperature, and as such, you can use the up and down key to adjust it from time to time.
Besides, the LCD screen shows you the current temperature throughout use, so you can monitor the operation with ease. The timer function lets you set the preferred duration for the cooking time, allowing you to multitask while the cooktop runs. And the best part is that it beeps when the cooking is done.
Heating Elements
Many of us opt for induction units to reduce gas consumption and invest in alternative power sources. Therefore, if you too are thinking along the same lines, the ICT400 will not disappoint. For starters, it's one of the most efficient models, using up to 70% less energy compared to conventional units.
Also, since it includes 2 burners, you can individually adjust the heat setting for both. The right one includes 5 heat settings, while the left one comes with 8. This is a thoughtful arrangement, ensuring maximum customization and control.
High-Quality Surface
We're very impressed with the premium-quality glass surface, providing durability and hassle-free operation. Furthermore, it's a cinch to clean, which is a life-saver for homeowners who like to keep things low-maintenance. But then again, make sure to use the right cleaning solution, as an incompatible one might damage the surface.
Other than that, the surface features two circles on the burners, so you can place the cookware in the right spot. This ensures even heat distribution while eliminating hot spots. Besides, the surface is responsive, meaning it automatically shuts off the heat 30 seconds after the pot or pan is removed.
Power Settings
Regardless of the cooktop model you buy, it's ultimately the power capacity that will determine its operation. The ICT400 runs on 120V and ideally should be used with a converter. As for the burners, the left one includes 8 power levels ranging from 200W to 1200W. Meanwhile, the right burner has the same starting level and goes up to 600W.
You can use the burners simultaneously and at maximum power settings. The right one is primarily meant for simmering and slow cooking, while the left burner is ideal for high-heat preparations.
Ventilation
This model is not only exhaust-free but also well-vented, so you can work without overheating issues and nauseating fumes. Long story short, it's equipped with a side cooling fan, enabling glitch-free performance throughout. So, even if you're using both burners and cooking at the highest timer setting (150 minutes), the fan will ensure smooth operation.
Sensors
This Waring Pro model is truly futuristic, given that it includes built-in sensors that ensure safety and practicality. For instance, if you turn on the cooktop but don't place the induction cookware, the burners won't start to heat.
Also, as soon as you remove the pot or pan, the surface starts to cool down. This indeed makes it a safer choice, especially if you have overactive children at home.
Prevents Overheating
With conventional cooktops, you have to continually monitor the heat level, so you don't burn the food. Also, there's a chance you might accidentally leave it on longer than required. All of these are legitimate concerns, and hence this Waring Pro model is the perfect solution to overheating problems.
Basically, if your pot or pan starts to overheat, it emits a long beeping sound and turns off the unit. So, even if you got busy with something else and lost track of time, this cooktop has got your back.
Compact And Lightweight
While it includes 2 burners, the ICT400 does not take up a lot of space on the kitchen counter. It's sleek and lightweight, clocking in at 7 lbs., which is easily far more manageable than dated induction models. Therefore, it's a perfect purchase for modern kitchens where space is a serious issue.
What Could've Been Better?
Obviously, the ICT400 is not perfect, but then again which induction cooktop is? While it has a few minor flaws, none of them are deal-breakers per se. That said, we couldn't help but notice the noise produced by the cooling fan.
It may not be the loudest mechanical whirring, but we would have preferred a quieter operation. Apart from that, this model only accepts cookware with magnetic capability, meaning you can't just use any pan, even if it's labeled as induction safe.
This could be a problem for some users since you might have to buy separate utensils for this cooktop. That aside, it's still a very functional option and deserves a place in your kitchen.
Pros
Uses up to 70% less energy than conventional models
Intuitive button controls and LCD heat indicator
Features 2 burners with multiple heat settings
Built-in sensors ensure safety and practicality
Automatically turns off unit to prevent overheating
Cons
The cooling fan is a bit noisy
Only accepts cookware with the magnetic capability
Waring Pro ICT400 Verdict
That's all from us!
Despite a few shortcomings, the ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop is undoubtedly a must-buy. So, if you're looking for an energy-efficient model that will reduce costs in the long run, this one surely fits the bill.
And the fact that it's easy to use further adds to your convenience, especially if you're a kitchen novice. Plus, it includes two burners with multiple heat settings, which is a win-win in our books. Whether you want to experiment, cook faster, or simply seek the benefit of hassle-free meal preparation, this model is bound to impress.
So, go ahead and give it a shot. Don't forget to share your experience with us in the comments section below.
Most new cafes now-a-days boast of a wall mounted toilet. They have become a fad because of their small sizes and how they can help small bathroom spaces seem bigger. The fact that they're easier to clean than regular floor toilets is another plus, that has made businesses adopt them very fast.
This new style has its fair share of critiques though, with people claiming that when it goes wrong, you need professional help. In defense of it though, we have to understand, that most of us are not experts in dealing with standard toilets either, and we do need help with plumbers. However, wall-mounted toilets are costlier than their floored counterparts.
Why the costlier alternative? What makes wall mounted toilets so great at working through our days? Is minimalism going to be "in" forever? These are questions worth answering, but, for now, it seems that wall-mounted toilets are here to stay.
History of the Wall-Mounted Toilets
Flush toilets have been around since centuries. However, wall mounted toilets have started finding its way to the U.S. homes fairly recently. There is no need to worry though, across the Pacific, the Europeans have adopted the wall-mounted toilets readily.
This is because most European homeowners usually live in multi-family housings rather than single-family ones. Hence, easy cleaning and small toilets are the obvious choices. This is also why airports and businesses with a high amount of traffic often prefer the easy-to-clean wall-mounted toilets. The easy cleaning, small space taking toilets are preferred by people who know that they can save a lot of time and add to the entire house.
What makes wall-mounted toilets so different is that unlike the other toilets, here the tanks are mounted on the wall, thus, reducing the space the toilet takes. So, it is no surprise, which it is being adopted by new homeowners who live in a space-crunch.
What creates derision among the homeowners is the fact that wall-mounted toilets are not easy to install. For people living out of apartments, this means the monumental task of getting their entire bathroom wall renovated. However, this could mean you get to build new designs for yourself
The whole idea of wall-mounted toilets is confusing though, hence, the pros and cons list that follows. So, here we go.
Why love Wall mounted toilet?
There are loads of reasons to love wall-mounted toilets, but, here we list the obvious ones.
It saves water
The environment concerns all of us, and with wall-mounted toilets, we can give back. Most wall-mounted toilets actually follow the EPA directions for water-use and significantly reduce your water use.
Gravity-based wall-toilets for example, minimize water use by reducing the pressure that the water usually needs. Also, since, cleaning is easier, you are going to toil that much less on the weekends on your toilet and save on water.
It is easy to clean
Cleanliness is a scary thing. If there's one thing a guest is to notice at your home, it is the condition of your toilet and how clean it is. For most people with day jobs, cleaning toilets become more of a chore.
With wall mounted toilets, which handle the ongoing flow of public at huge businesses, this is an easy fix. Wall-mounted toilets offer a space under the toilet which you can mop easily and hides a large part of the toilet behind the wall, de-cluttering your toilet space.
De-clutter your toilet
Wall-mounted toilets can easily be minimalist designer pieces, and while, bathroom and designers are not really words that go together, in this case, they are a fantastic combination. Take for example the Ilbagno collection designed by Robert Lazzeroni which marries the classic and modern looks.
Or simply go for Studio Triplan's new beautiful line which works its way around minimalism. The line offers elegant curvatures and beautiful pieces to compliment your wall-mounted toilets and your entire bathroom.
You can couple your toilet with a corner shower and you would be saving many a square-feet as you go along.
It saves a lot of space
Builders love wall-mounted toilets. Why? Because it means that they do not need to compromise on living space to provide more space for the bathroom. It also goes forward to explaining why the entire idea of wall-mounted toilets is perfect for small homes.
Wall-mounted toilets barely take up space in the bathroom allowing you to go about your daily activities without worrying about getting your clothes soiled or anything else.
Aesthetics! Aesthetics! Aesthetics!
Today's homeowners cannot be content with keeping toilets simply clean and spacious. Bathrooms are valuable spaces. People spend a long time in their bathrooms, cleaning up, preparing themselves and even solving crosswords!
Hence, it is necessary as a whole to have a bathroom that does not compromise in space and showcases a positive vibe that people can feel attracted to. It aids concentration and mindset.
With these pros in the bag, what about the things that make wall-mounted toilets a bit unacceptable in the lives of the modern homeowner? Well, here it goes.
Reasons to hate the Wall-mounted toilets
Very hard to build
This is not your weekend Do-It-Yourself project. Wall-mounted toilets are notoriously hard to install because of the work that goes into it.
Wall portion needs to be removed and put together again to fit in the tank within and work needs to be put in for bolting the toilet in. They require a lot of renovation which might not be allowed by the landlords of your apartment.
Wall support
Well, you are going to sit on these toilets, so, it is really fair that the support from the walls needs to be solid. At best, you have to look forward to no changes at all, but, sometimes this means entire portions of the wall need to be rebuilt to support the toilet structure.
This means that the entire cost of renovation increases, and the wall-mounted toilets become hard to install in regular homes.
Hard to repair
Remember the main parts of the wall-mounted toilets are behind a wall. So, while, this means the ugly pipes and other things would not be sticking out, the repairing is very difficult without professionals.
If there are any ways in which your toilet malfunctions, there would be a need to call a professional and troubleshoot. Oftentimes, if the problem is with the setting this might mean another set of renovations for the walls too.
So, what's the verdict?
Wall-mounted toilets are really good for the modern homeowner but, they need that extra care going in. While they have some noteworthy features that add to their comfort and cleanliness levels, they are not very economical in the long go. So, it is up to you.
It comes down the question of saving the environment and being fashionable while minimizing work, versus paying a lot more and having the threat of rebuilding entire walls to suit your bathroom. This is a dilemma I suppose for modern living itself, but, this is as it goes. You might love or hate the wall-mounted toilets, but, they are here to stay.
All images displayed are the property of their respective owners, image discovered via Pinterest.
Don't you love a delicious smoothie, shake, or healthy soup to start your day? Having the right blender can help you enjoy them regularly.
Most fitness freaks around the world may already be acquainted with the family-owned brand known as Vitamix. However, for those who don't know about it, let us tell you all you need to know.
Vitamix blenders have been around for almost 100 years. This goes to show how reliable and loved their products are amongst customers. However, with several options to choose from, finding a suitable one for your needs may become tricky.
Fortunately, we have created an in-depth comparison and review of the Vitamix 5200 and Vitamix 5300. Hopefully, it will help you make an informed choice about the right blender for your needs.
So without further delay, let's get straight to the deets!
Let us begin this guide by introducing the evergreen Vitamix 5200.
The Vitamix 5200 blender came out in October 2007. Initially, it was set out to replace the flagship model of the same brand - the Vitamix 5000.
This superb blender features a large 64 oz. glass pitcher that effortlessly blends juices, smoothies, shakes, soups, ice creams, and a multitude of other creamy, soupy edibles. The large-capacity pitcher provides adequate quantity for a family of four to five, so you don't need to worry about frequenting the blender during busy days.
An expert eye will observe that the shape of the pitcher is strategically designed to help push food more easily towards the blades. This ensures an even texture during the blending process so you can achieve professional-quality, creamy foods and drinks within minutes.
Most users appreciate the color options provided by the manufacturer. Those who are picky about purchasing matching or complementary items will love the color options, as you can pick and choose a product color that best fits into your decor.
A major selling point of the Vitamix 5200 is its ease of use. No customer wants to spend hours trying to figure out how to use a blender, and Vitamix 5200 makes it convenient for you with its super easy controls.
The sturdy build quality, reliability, and ease of use are the primary reasons why it has become so popular amongst customers.
All said and done, there were a few minor drawbacks with the 5200 which customers pointed out after using the product extensively. Fortunately, none of them were significant enough to affect its sales, and it remained a top-rated product in the market.
The next release, which is the Vitamix 5300 blender, came out in November 2016. It was nearly a decade later that the manufacturers released the new model.
The first noticeable difference in the Vitamix 5300 is its size. This model is around 3 inches shorter than its predecessor, which you may think is a disadvantage, but it's not. We will delve into the details of its size and functionality in just a bit.
The Vitamix 5300 is visibly different from the 5200, which is a direct result of the manufacturers' taking specific steps to address customer issues. This model addresses most of the complaints with aplomb, which gives credit to the manufacturers' listening skills.
Most customer complaints were addressed and required changes were made.
With a full-body plastic construction and a visibly smaller base and pitcher, the Vitamix 5300 soon began entering customers' homes. Furthermore, both models come with a 7-year warranty, which is excellent news for most users as it eliminates the need for costly repairs and replacements.
Another well-placed strategy employed by the manufacturers is the modification in the width of the pitcher and the size of the blades. Since the Vitamix 5300 is 3 inches shorter than its predecessor, many customers are worried about its blending abilities compared to the 5200.
Fortunately, this concern was quickly addressed by the implementation of a slightly wider pitcher base. Alongside this change, they also made the blades slightly longer so they could reach the ends of the pitcher with ease.
Comparison Of Vitamix 5200 Vs. Vitamix 5300
Now that you know a little bit about both blenders, it's time to dive into their comparison. We have divided each section according to its features and how they stand against one another. This detailed comparison should help you choose the right blender for your requirements.
Container Size
The first noticeable difference between the Vitamix 5200 and 5300 is its size and build.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 measures 7.25 inches wide, 20 inches long, and 8.75 inches deep. As you may well imagine, it is relatively bulky and takes up quite a bit of counter space. That being said, the 64 oz. the pitcher itself is not very heavy or bulky. You will be able to carry it easily or even hold it for extended periods without arm fatigue.
Furthermore, the cord wrap feature ensures that annoying cords and wires don't unnecessarily take up extra counter space.
Keep in mind that with the lid on, the 5200 measures 20.5 inches. Most customers reported being able to fit the blender into their shelves after removing the lid. Although it wasn't an ideal fit, it seemed to work better for most people.
The pitcher is relatively narrow and allows you to add a number of ingredients without running out of space. Moreover, the blades run smoothly and effectively to blend everything into a creamy consistency.
Vitamix 5300
Moving on to the Vitamix 5300, the first thing that comes to mind is its noticeably smaller size. The pitcher capacity has been kept the same - 64 oz. However, 3 inches have been shaved off the top to make it shorter and easier to fit into cabinets and shelves.
This change was made after continual customer reports and complaints about the blender not fitting comfortably into most cabinets. The skyscraper-like 5200 was efficient but too large for most kitchens. Its bulky appearance was not a favorite amongst most customers.
The manufacturer heard of these complaints and decided to take action, creating a shorter and wider 5300. This model fits far more comfortably into most kitchen spaces and cabinets. Furthermore, its noticeably sleeker design was a welcome addition into most customers’ homes.
Those worried about how this change affected its blending capacity - don't fret. Although the size was reduced, its pitcher capacity remained the same. To top it off, it became slightly wider to accommodate the same amount of ingredients (or more) in the pitcher.
The best part - the blades were also minutely changed so that the new model could blend perfectly without complaints.
Durability
For all intents and purposes, the Vitamix 5300 is marketed as a better and newer version of the 5200. In many areas, this account is accurate. However, when comparing the durability of both models, we found some surprising results.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 not only looks stronger and sturdier but quite arguably, it actually is. With a strong, polycarbonate construction and sturdy design, this blender has been known for its capacity to take a beating. In fact, the 5200 is the perfect blender for daily use - even if you accidentally knock it around a few times, it won't sustain much damage.
Another noticeable feature is the tamper. This model features a 12.5-inch tamper that is visibly larger and thicker compared to the one on the 5300. Not just that, it is also sturdier and easier to use, thanks to its significant size.
An interesting characteristic to note about the container is that it is completely heat-resistant and BPA-free. Also, the shape of the pitcher is strategic, enabling it to push the ingredients toward the blades organically, creating a smoother, finer blend.
Vitamix 5300
The Vitamix 5300 features an all-plastic construction that is robust and sturdy, but not as much as you might expect. The comparison is even starker when you place it beside the older 5200.
Although the 5300 is quite durable on its own, we noticed that its plastic body is prone to cracking. Of course, this is not something you need to constantly worry about if you purchase the blender, but it is something worth mentioning nonetheless.
Moving on to the tamper, the 5300 features a shorter and thinner one - 9.76 inches. Furthermore, its design has been changed entirely, giving it a unique shape and structure.
An observation we made while using both blenders was that we had to use the tamper more often for the 5300 than the 5200. This might be because of the shape of the pitcher or the power of the motor. Either way, we noticed that food particles tend to float around the 5300 more often than its predecessor.
Motor Power
One of the most vital aspects of a blender is the power of its motor.
Vitamix 5200
The 5200 does not fall short of our expectations. Not just ours, customers who have reviewed the product have generally been happy with its blending power.
Getting down to technical details, let's talk about the actual power of its motor. The 5200 features a 2-peak horsepower motor that has been both designed and manufactured by a Swedish company.
Its powerful motor enables the razor-sharp stainless steel blades to spin at an astonishing speed of 37,000 rpm. The 3-inch blades are excellent for blending, pureeing, grinding, and breaking down all kinds of food.
Vitamix 5300
Comparing the 5200 and the 5300, there isn't a significant difference between the motors - at least on paper. The 5300 features a slightly better 2.2-peak horsepower motor and 4-inch laser-cut stainless-steel blades. These blades are powerful and have adequate friction to help you make hot soup without the need for a stove.
You may be wondering why the 5300 has blades that are an inch longer than the 5200 when the total size of the container is smaller. Well, keep in mind that although the 5300 is shorter, it is slightly wider than the 5200.
To compensate for its additional width and enable the blades to reach the edges of the pitcher, the powerful blades have had an inch added to them.
Now, you may be wondering if the .2 horsepower makes any difference to the new model. To be honest, the difference is not significant. You may notice some differences when blending harder substances like ice, which is noticeably easier on the 5300. However, for other blending purposes, both models work as well as each other.
Noise Levels
Have you ever faced the issue of cranking up your blender early in the morning only to wake the entire household up? It can get pretty distressing, especially when all you want to do is make your morning smoothie.
Well, let's compare the noise levels of both blenders and see which one is quieter, thus, better.
Vitamix 5200
The variable speed control feature is one of the best aspects of a blender - at least most users seem to think so. The range of speed offered is from 1 to 10, with 1 being the slowest and 10 being the highest.
At the lowest speeds, the blender is relatively quiet, so you won't risk waking your family up early in the morning. However, it can get pretty loud at the highest speed setting and is sure to disturb people around you.
Vitamix 5300
Although it may sound odd, the Vitamix 5300, even with its more powerful motor, is quieter than the 5300. That being said, it is definitely loud enough to create some disturbance, especially in a quiet environment. However, what surprised us was that it was relatively quieter than its less powerful counterpart.
Those who prioritize low noise levels might find peace with the 5300, especially comparing it to the 5200. Keep in mind that it is virtually noiseless at its lowest settings (1, 2, and 3), which is excellent.
Controls
What is a good blender without easy controls? Well, both models of Vitamix are known for their superb controls, which are intuitive and easy to use. However, here is a detailed comparison of both, so you understand each machine better.
Vitamix 5200
The controls on the Vitamix 5200 are minimalistic and intuitive. Right in the middle of the base, you will see a speed dial that enables you to control the speed of the motor easily. It is an old-school dial with numbers featured around it. They are relatively easy to spot and don't require a deep understanding of the machine.
This speed dial allows you to control the speed levels from 1 to 10, depending on what you're blending and what consistency it should be.
On the left of the speed dial is the high/variable speed switch. Turning it to the "high" position enables the motor to run at its most powerful speed - which is 10. You will not be able to control or change the speed once it is in this setting. It works excellently when you want to blend something without having to watch over it constantly.
However, switching it to the "variable" speed option allows you to control the speed manually. This option is fantastic when you want to blend large chunks of food or reach a specific consistency.
Furthermore, you don't need to stop the machine to add more ingredients. The handy tamper allows you to add them effortlessly without having to turn off the motor constantly.
Lastly, you will find the power switch on the right side of the speed dial.
All said and done, Vitamix failed to include the "Pulse" setting on this model, which several customers complained about. To achieve the same effect, customers had to turn the on and off the machine repeatedly, which can get annoying after a certain point.
Fortunately, the manufacturers paid attention to customer reviews and complaints and integrated this into the next model.
Vitamix 5300
One of the aspects which most customers, including us, were excited to test was the "pulse" feature. This small but significant addition has completely changed the way we experience the blender - and it is a welcome change.
Instead of the high/variable speed control switch on the left-hand side of the speed dial, you now have the "pulse" switch.
This feature will change how you blend your food items and drinks, turning them into a thick, creamy consistency instead of a thin, watery liquid.
The “Pulse” feature essentially produces short bursts of power that automatically turn on and off without your intervention. This helps you achieve a certain creamy consistency which can be otherwise hard to achieve.
Without this excellent feature, customers were forced to manually turn on and off the power to replicate a "pulsing effect." Although it was effective, it cannot be compared to the convenience of the "pulse" button on the 5300.
Moving on, the rest of the controls are pretty much the same on the 5300 as it was on its predecessor. On the right side of the speed dial, you will find the power button. Of course, you can control the speed of the motor using the dial in the middle, which is exceptionally effective when you want more control over the blender.
Cooling System
As you may remember, we mentioned how it is possible to make hot soups in a blender without the requirement of a stove. Moreover, the powerful motor and blades often create enough energy and friction to heat the inside machinery of the blender.
It is vital to place an effective cooling system that ensures that your blender works seamlessly without overheating. Well, here is what we found about the cooling systems in both blenders. Check it out below.
Vitamix 5200
The Vitamix 5200 features an efficient radial cooling system that uses cooling fans to prevent the motor and blades from overheating. This feature is crucial, without which the blender and its motor can significantly overheat and experience burnout.
Furthermore, overheating can cause a ton of other issues for the machine. By the end of it, customers will be forced to make costly repairs and replacements.
Fortunately, most of these overheating issues are eliminated thanks to the cooling fans. The heat-resistant material of the container is also conducive to this process, allowing you to blend hot, creamy foods with ease.
An important point to note here is that although the cooling fans are excellent, they do not completely protect the machine from overheating. For this, the manufacturers should have added a type of thermal protection system, which is, unfortunately, missing from this model.
Vitamix 5300
Similar to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 also features built-in radial cooling fans that prevent overwork and overheating of the motor. This reduces the strain produced by the machine, thus, increasing its service life and ensuring that it works at its optimal condition for years.
Fortunately, the manufacturer provides an excellent 7-year warranty which covers most of these essential items - like the motor. So, if you face any issues with the motor or blades, be sure to turn to customer support for assistance.
Moving on, the 5300 features an additional system that further enhances its functionality and longevity. This feature is the built-in thermal protection system. Again, this is a new feature that has been added only to the 5300 and is missing from its predecessor.
The thermal protection system enhances the durability and power of the blender, enabling you to make hot, creamy foods like soups right from the blender. It can be difficult for most people to imagine making soup without a stove. However, the powerful motor and blades make this possible, which is why having an overheating protection system is imperative.
Cleanup
What good is using a blender daily if cleanup is a nightmare? Imagine if you had to manually wash your blender after every use. Most people might be dissuaded from using the machine daily if that were the case.
Well, let's talk about the cleanup process of both blender models to see if they are convenient for daily use or not.
Vitamix 5200
One of the great things about the Vitamix 5200 is that it is dishwasher-friendly. Every time you blend, puree, or grind something, you can place it in a dishwasher and forget about it till the next time it's required.
Moreover, you can also choose to manually clean it using most commercial cleaners and soaps. Of course, make sure that you use the right dishwasher soap that will remove food residue, food stains, and odors.
The tamper provided also helps you clean the stuck, stubborn pieces of food residue from the blender with ease.
However, the best part about cleaning this blender is the self-cleaning mode it comes with. This patented "Easy Cleaning" system is virtually effortless and helps you clean the blender without hassle each time.
Add some water and a few drops of dish soap into the blender. Then, run it on its highest speed setting for 60 seconds. If needed, repeat the process, dump out the contents, and allow the blender to try. Cleanup has never been easier!
Vitamix 5300
Similar to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 also features a handy tamper that enables you to reach the edges and corners of your blender. Use this tool to manually clean any bits and residue of food that are visible.
Then, you can pop it into your dishwasher and allow it to clean automatically.
If not, you can also use the "Easy Cleaning" feature, which you will find on both models. Using this feature is the same as the 5200. It makes cleanup extremely easy, convenient, and hassle-free for daily use.
Which Blender Is Right For You?
There are several factors to consider when picking the best blender for your needs. As you may have realized from our detailed comparison, both blenders have strong and weak points. However, depending on your requirements, the "best" blender may vary from person to person.
So, what are the factors to consider when picking the right blender? Let's have a look.
Durability
If you are looking for durability, there is one clear winner here. In our opinion, the Vitamix 5200 wins hands down. Its strong polycarbonate material with heat-resistant characteristics makes it an extremely robust blender for daily use. You don't need to worry much about knocking it around accidentally during use.
Compared to the 5200, the Vitamix 5300 scored slightly lower because of its all-plastic body. Although the body is heat-resistant as well, it doesn't match up to the same standards as the 5200 in this regard.
Space
Those who don't mind the additional counter space of shelf space taken by the 5200 may find it the best option. That being said, most customers faced an issue with storage and complained about it.
After hearing these complaints, the manufacturers decided to design a slightly shorter model that would fit into most storage spaces easily.
However, keep in mind that the 5200 may be ideal for those who want to blend smaller amounts of ingredients at a time. The large-capacity pitcher of the 5300 is excellent for big families but may cause wastage for smaller ones.
Moreover, you may be required to store the excess food you make as it isn't possible to consume the entire contents of the pitcher in one go.
If storage space is of utmost importance to you, then go for the 5300. Furthermore, if you don't mind blending a lot of ingredients and ending up with excess food, this may be the best option.
Pulse Feature
One of the most significant drawbacks of the 5200 is the absence of the "Pulse" feature. If this is important for you, the 5300 is, without a shadow of a doubt, the clear winner.
Container
The Vitamix 5200 features a classic container that is large, and slightly bulky but does not have a large capacity. On the other hand, the Vitamix 5300 has a low-profile container with a wide base. This enables you to add more ingredients compared to the 5200.
Depending on which aspect matters more to you, the choice between the two is clear.
Budget
The Vitamix 5200 is almost $100 cheaper than the 5300. If budgetary constraints are a concern for you while choosing the best blender, we recommend the Vitamix 5200.
However, if you are willing to spend about $100 more to enjoy the advanced features and low-profile design of the 5300, this might be a better option for you.
Summing It Up
And with that, it's a wrap.
In our opinion, if you are looking for a budget blender and don't necessarily mind the extra space it takes in the cabinet or shelf, opt for the Vitamix 5200. But, if storage space is important to you, and you want to try out the features offered by the newer model of the same brand, consider the Vitamix 5300.
Leave a comment below to let us and our fellow readers know which Vitamix model you prefer and why. Stay tuned for more reviews and guides.
Do you want to try your hand at gardening but simply don't have enough room at home? Consider vertical gardening - a trend that's becoming increasingly popular!
Many people struggle with space in their homes, whether it is to introduce a new gaming center, kitchen island, or even just a few plants. If you have been considering trying the art of gardening but can't find enough space for it, we've got the solution for you.
Vertical gardening is a recent trend that is becoming popular because of its practicality and aesthetics. This trend involves planting upwards instead of downwards. Vertical gardens are space-saving, look great, and most of them can be fun DIY projects to enjoy.
You can recycle almost anything - from old cans to teapots, birdhouses, pencil stands, and so much more. So, if you're ready to take the next step but are stuck with ideas, we've got 59 creative picks for you.
Now, without further ado, let's begin!
Best Vertical Gardening Ideas
Landscape Fabric Garden
For our first vertical garden idea, we decided to use landscape fabric as planters. The material is soft and breathable, allowing the soil to breathe freely without restriction. Moreover, this idea packs quite a visual punch. You can choose to create more than one' pocket' vertically and pot different types of plants for added aesthetics.
This vertical garden idea is relatively simple to recreate at home. All you need is some landscape fabric, needle, thread, and scissors. Assuming you don't already have your seedlings purchased, you can buy different colored plants to add appeal to the vertical garden.
Pastel Planters
Our next idea involves using planters you already own (or getting a couple of new ones, if you don't have any at home). They are relatively inexpensive and will not create a dent in your expenses.
Of course, you can also use old cans that you can easily recycle. Bring out your acrylic paints and use pastel shades for this idea. The result is something sophisticated, minimalist, and simply gorgeous.
Use ordinary rope and a puncher to create holes in the can or planter. Thread the rope through them and hang your planters, complete with your new seedlings.
Recycled Plastic Containers
Let's face it; all of us have one too many plastic containers lying around the house. For our next vertical garden idea, how about recycling some of these old containers to create a beautiful vertical garden for your home?
Paint the plastic containers with any shade you wish - white, black, or multicolored. Make sure to choose a shade that complements the color theme of your home.
You can even punch a few holes in the containers to allow proper air circulation. It's really that simple! Plant a couple of succulents or evergreens for your indoor vertical garden.
Old Wooden Boxes
Do you enjoy spending time on DIY projects? If yes, then you'll love our next vertical garden idea that you can make entirely from scratch.
For this idea, pick out a few old wooden boxes (could be jewelry boxes or anything you think is usable). If you want to get really creative, take a saw and a hot glue gun, and create shelf-like inner borders in various shapes. If not, just glue a couple of boxes together to create a unique geometric shape.
Place cactus potting mix and your plants, and your vertical garden is ready to be hung!
Ceramic Pots
If you find yourself constantly running to the market to buy herbs for your dishes, how about growing them instead? For our next creative vertical garden idea, we present ceramic pot vertical gardens that are ideal for your kitchen herbs.
The best part about this DIY project is that you can customize the pots in any color. Paint them a classic white or black that will complement most interiors, or opt for a more creative project by painting designs and patterns using acrylic paints. Remember to use safe paints that will allow the soil to breathe easily.
Chicken Wire Fence
Our next idea features a time-consuming yet straightforward DIY project that is fun to create and looks super aesthetic. If you have an extra chicken wire fence lying around the backyard, it could be the perfect vertical garden setting for an outdoor garden.
You'll need a few pots (or as many as you wish to hang on the fence). Attach wire around the necks of the pots, hanging them vertically from the wire fence. Pot all your favorite plants in this outdoor vertical garden, remembering to trim off any excess wire to avoid injury.
Tin Can Planters
We all have old tin cans lying around our homes. Maybe you might have old beer cans, paint cans, or even canned fruit and other foods lying around. Well, these cans are perfect for making an innovative DIY vertical garden.
Get your paints and brushes out because this idea requires some creativity on your end! Paint the recycled cans in bright shades that will add a pop of color to your indoor or outdoor garden. Use wire or ropes to hang the cans from a fence or your walls. Place your favorite potted plants, and voila!
Diamond Hanging Planters
Here is another great DIY project for the creative bugs among us. Create your own hanging planters using old hangers, plywood, hooks, a drill, some screws, and finally, your pots and plants.
Using the correct dimensions, cut out a circular base on which you will keep your ceramic or plastic pot. Cut off the horizontal base of the hanger and add a diamond-shaped base instead. Stick the rounded pot base, spray paint the pot in your favorite color, and that's it!
Vertical Box Garden
Our next vertical gardening idea looks extremely simple and elegant. The color theme can be decided by you (you don't need to follow out color combination exactly if you don't wish to).
This vertical gardening idea uses planter boxes painted in bright, eye-catching colors against a neutral colored board. You can change the color combination or even add planters in different shades for a bold effect.
This planter fence can be placed indoors or outdoors, depending on the style you have in mind. Place it next to the entryway of your home for a warm, welcoming feel.
Rustic Garden
If you like the old, rustic appeal of slightly chipping paint, wooden borders, and the use of classic whites, you'll love our next idea. Creating this is quite simple as long as you have the right tools.
You'll need a couple of poplars, white paint and terracotta pots. Cut the poplar into symmetric pieces and connect the pieces using nails and screws or glue. Paint the planks white, and apply petroleum jelly on small areas before painting it entirely in white.
Once it's dry, rub off the areas with a paper towel to create the 'chipping off' style. Finally, add the terracotta pots with pot hangers, and you're done!
Wall Of Green
This vertical gardening idea is relatively bold and may take slightly more effort to maintain and upkeep. However, as you can see by the image, the result is eye-catching.
You can create a literal 'wall of green' by potting plants in close proximity along a vertical wall. It is crucial to ensure that these plants are sun-friendly (if you plan on keeping this wall outdoors).
The result is striking, as your wall of green welcomes your guests with warmth and brightness. The leaves tumble downwards in a kind of waterfall effect.
Brass Ring Hanging Vertical Garden
Here is an excellent idea for a vertical garden that looks extremely classy and sophisticated. The brass ring hanging vertical garden can be placed anywhere in your home or even outside. In our humble opinion, this design looks best against a neutral colored wall, but you might be more creative and figure out a different setting for it!
This piece looks best when complemented with terracotta potted plants. However, you can also experiment with plastic or ceramic pots. Opt for a plant with long, beautiful leaves for the best effect.
Clay Hanging Pots
Clay pots have an inherently minimalist appeal to them. However, you may not have enough room in your home to place all your beautiful plants.
We ask you to consider hanging the clay pots vertically instead of placing them on the floor for our next idea. You can opt for rope, wire, or even buy a hanging kit online for hanging the pots. Depending on the rest of your decor, the material you choose for hanging the pots can make a huge difference.
Upcycled Ammunition Cans
This is probably one of the wackiest ideas out there, but have you considered using upcycled ammunition cans as planters? If you can get your hands on them, these could add a unique and attractive appeal to any home.
The best part about this idea is that you don't need to paint, varnish, or make any major additions to these cans. Even if they are worn out or chipped, they will work great. In fact, this might even add to its appeal!
Plants Not Pipes
Some people can be really creative, and the proof lies in how brilliantly someone designed this metal pipe planter. Each pipe has been painted in metallic shades of gold, silver, bronze, and copper.
The addition of beautiful succulents has brought together the entire look to create a unique ensemble. When creating this at home, remember to use thin wires to attach the pipes in a ladder-like formation. Of course, you can choose to use just one pipe instead of multiple, if that's the look you're going for.
Wooden Diamond Vertical Garden
Does the name sound confusing to you? How can wood and diamonds possibly be integrated to create a vertical garden? Well, it's actually quite simple.
This wooden diamond vertical doesn't use any real diamonds, but diamond shapes created using wood. Now that sounds do-able, right? To create this unique trellis, you'll need a couple of power tools at hand. Use different varieties of plants against a neutral colored wall to create the most astonishing effect.
You can choose to cover an entire wall with this vertical garden design. Alternatively, you can experiment with a smaller area first and then move on to the entire wall design.
Pallet Gardening
Here is an excellent idea where you can recycle old pallets that can be found in abundance in any stacking inventory. If you want, you can add your unique spin by painting it with bright colors or patterns. But even if you decide to use it as it is, the result can be quite simplistic yet intriguing.
The pallets can be used as horizontal planters where you place your potted plants. Add a different species of plant in each row to add variety to your vertical gardening design.
Steel Mesh Wall
By looking at this steel mesh wall, you'll realize how simple yet effective this idea can be. With this wall design, you can choose to make it as large or small as you wish. In fact, this design hardly takes up any space on the wall because it is almost flat!
Again, you can place as many or as few plants as you wish to - depending on how you envision your vertical garden. Add terracotta pots, ceramic, plastic, or old recycled bottles turned into planters on your wall.
Living Sculpture
Our next vertical gardening idea is another unique and extremely striking piece. This one features a living sculpture - and yes, it's precisely what you're thinking. This wall panel is created by using a fascinating interplay of wood, greenery, and moss.
The best part about this idea is that it can be placed on the wall, as a centerpiece, in the entryway, or anywhere else you wish. It is a versatile piece of artwork that will look stunning in any place in your home.
Plant the miniature forest on a metal tray to allow easy portability.
Copper Pipe Hanger
Coming to our next vertical gardening idea, we bring you the copper pipe hanger. This one is made using ordinary curtain hangers, but we decided to give it a copper paint job that would entirely transform its appeal.
You will need some hardware to install this one, but it is a fun DIY project, and the result is super aesthetic. Remember to use strong wires or wool thread to hang the small planters. We recommend using light pots and plants as you don't want to risk creating a mess in case the entire piece falls due to excessive weight.
Mason Jar Kitchen
This next vertical gardening idea features extremely compact 'gardens' in mason jars. Attach each jar to a wooden plank and decorate it in your kitchen for quick and easy access to all your favorite herbs.
All you need is a few mason jars, soil, and your favorite herbs for this DIY project. Get hold of a couple of cedar fence boards, and you're done! You can label each tiny 'herb garden' using chalk (to make it easy) or opt for a more creative approach to labeling.
Hanging Herb Garden
We have already featured a couple of hanging hear gardens on our list; however, this one is super easy and looks exceptionally classy when it is done. This hanging herb garden has been created with the help of a shower curtain rod, clay pots, and curtain brackets. The other items, like the herbs and soil, can be purchased later.
While you can hang this absolutely anywhere that has space to hang curtain rods comfortably, most people tend to use this idea in the kitchen. It gives you easy access to all the herbs you need to use without having to run outdoors constantly.
Basket Blooms
A basket full of blooms sounds like a sweet deal right off the bat. The countryside inspires this next vertical gardening idea. Using a lumbar wall fence as a background, hang as many wooden baskets as you can, covering the entire facade of the wall.
Plant the season's most vivid blooms or opt for a variety of herbs, creating your very own herb basket garden. This works best against a neutral wall that'll draw all the attention to the colorful blooms.
Crates And Foliage
Old crates are plentiful, and you might even find some lying around your backyard. Well, how about transforming these old crates into a DIY vertical gardening project? This project looks aesthetic and is super functional for growing most types of plants and herbs.
Find some space in your garden and create a pyramid structure using old crates stacked on top of each other. If their positions look too precarious to you, reinforce its stability by using wooden planks for support.
Rustic Planter Gardening
Our next vertical gardening idea is similar to our previous one but has an entirely different, rustic appeal. This one has been made using pallets and reinforced with iron bars. Two buckets have been hung using chains for support on either side of the structure, creating a completely antique appeal.
The tin buckets can be used for planting other varieties of plants or herbs. Label each planter with the name of the herb or spice you have potted. Place this outdoors to create your vertical garden or indoors for a herb garden inside the home.
Minimalist Wood Garden
Moving over to our next idea, we have the minimalist wood garden. This one features cedar boxes stacked in a 'boxed' design to add appeal while saving space in your home. The vertical garden can be filled with beautiful, small plants and using the appropriate soil needed.
You can even choose to plant succulents that require less maintenance and watering. This will ensure that the cedar does not rot due to excessive watering. Place it against a neutral background for the best effect.
Muted Terracotta Pots
If you have a dull, neutral-colored wall in your house that needs some sprucing up, then consider our next idea for your vertical gardening project. To create this look, get a couple of terracotta pots and paint them in muted, pastel shades of your choice. This image features muted blue shades hung against a white wall.
The uniformity of the blue terracotta pots against the brightly colored flowers provides a striking appeal. It can transform the look of any dull wall, making it a wonderland of bright flowers.
Soda Bottles
Almost all of us drink soda or some kind of drink that comes in plastic bottles. Most of the end, we end up throwing the bottles away. However, you can turn this trash into treasure with our next idea in a few simple steps.
Using a paper cutter or a sharp knife, create a large gap in the plastic bottles. Fill it with soil and plant flowers or herbs of your choice. Finally, hang them using ropes, wires, or a clothesline.
Shoe Rack Vertical Garden
Ever thought of repurposing an old, cloth shoe organizer into a vertical garden? Well, most of the work is already done for you, as the shoe organizer features multiple 'pockets' for planting your fresh flowers and plants in.
The size of these pockets is ideal for planting individual flowers and herbs. Place the vertical garden outdoors for a mess-free planting and watering experience. You can get a little more creative and paint some of the pockets in bright colors or patterns.
Dresser Garden
If you have an old drawer that you were planning on throwing away, keep it for this next vertical gardening project. The clever use of these old drawers for planting colorful blooms can be eye-catching and functional at the same time.
Use spray paint or traditional painting tools to add a splash of color to the old drawers. Place it outside your home in the garden or your entryway for a great addition to any home. Remember to varnish the paint, so it doesn't suffer damage through pollution, dust, or sun damage.
Driftwood Sculpture
Do you love succulents but can't find the appropriate place to adorn them in your home? You can make a living sculpture out of pieces of driftwood and beautiful red and green succulents for our next idea.
The living sculpture is exceptionally aesthetic and can turn any bare wall into a masterpiece within seconds. Succulents can be an ideal choice of plants for this idea, as they require low maintenance and are not excessively thirsty for water or sunlight.
Self-Irrigating Vertical Garden
As the name suggests, this vertical garden is self-irrigating and completely low maintenance for those gardeners who can't make time to tend to their plant pets.
Of course, creating this will take about 3 to 4 hours, but it can be an enjoyable DIY project for those who like to do things with their own hands. Overall, the result will be something magnificent that works as a great addition to your garden.
Tree Trunk Planter
There is no end to some individuals' creativity, which can be seen from our next vertical gardening idea. Using a desiccated tree trunk and some beautiful succulents, this next piece looks like something straight out of an art vault.
You can make this yourself by using a part of an old tree trunk and some of your favorite plants. Opting for succulents will make maintenance and upkeep easier, as they are inherently low-maintenance plants. Place it against a neutral board for added effect and texture.
Bookshelf Garden
Using a couple of planks of wood and cedar troughs, you can create a kind of leaning bookshelf that features all of your favorite plants. Making this bookshelf is relatively simple; all you need are a couple of basic tools, wood, and plants.
Place this leaning bookshelf against a neutral wall to draw attention to this new addition. Alternatively, you can also paint the wood in bright colors and add beautiful green foliage.
3D Wall Garden
We have a 3D wall garden that looks stunning against almost any backdrop for our next vertical gardening idea. Use metal frames to border to bulging, green leaves to create a contemporary meets vintage appeal for this one.
It is best to use ferns requiring minimal attention and care, as it may not be practical to regularly water these plants. The modern aesthetic of this wall garden looks best when placed against wooden backgrounds. However, don't keep that from experimenting with your own style.
Bird Bath
This is a perfect addition to any garden, as it works as a birdbath and a vertical garden in one. Although it looks complicated, it is relatively easy to create and will not take too many tools.
It is best to use different sizes of terracotta pots for this one, as you will need to stack them on top of each other. Paint them in bright colors and place a large plastic container on top filled with water for feeding visiting birds.
Zen Garden
If you are looking to take a minimalist approach to your vertical garden, then this idea might be perfect for you. Take a couple of zinc plates, saucers, bowls, and anything else that catches your eye. You can use a variety of shapes and sizes for this one.
These planters bring all the attention to its minimalist appeal and look stunning against almost any backdrop. Use plants or succulents with minimal foliage for this idea if you want it to match with the rest of the minimalist decor. Of course, you can also choose to plant bright flowers if you wish.
Birdhouse Garden
This next vertical garden idea is perfect for nature lovers, as it brings together all the beautiful elements of nature. If you have birdhouses lying around your home, then you already have most of the work done for you! However, if you don't have any, don't worry. You can still create this beautiful piece without much hassle.
Plant your succulents or herb garden by using birdhouses as a planter. Paint them in bright shades or keep the old, worn-out look for a slightly different appeal.
Hanging Bucket Garden
Looking to save space while recycling old materials around your home? This tin bucket hanging garden can be a perfect addition to your home, office, or any space you can spare. Of course, it doesn't take up too much space in the first place, making it ideal for gardeners looking for a compact vertical garden solution.
Adding a door frame for the border can add a unique touch to this hanging bucket garden idea. Make sure to use plants that require low maintenance, so you can keep the vertical garden looking fresh all year long.
Seed Containers
Coming to our next vertical gardening idea, we have decided to use old seed containers as planters. This is relatively easy to find, especially if you have a farm and buy seeds in bulk. The containers can be stacked on top of one another or hung on a wall to create your vertical garden.
Clean the inside of the container thoroughly before proceeding. Place the soil and plant your flowers, herbs, or other plants carefully. Arrange the seed containers indoors or even outdoors. You can keep the front label as it is for added appeal.
Vintage Dressers
Sure, many of us have antique-looking dressers at home, which we don't plan on using anymore. Throwing these away can be difficult, as they might have sentimental value. With our next idea, you don't need to worry about throwing away your old dressers. Simply repurpose them into an outdoor vertical garden!
Simply haul your vintage drawer outside, fill it up with soil, and place your favorite plants inside it. You can even decorate a couple of pots and planters on the tabletop to add more foliage to your vertical garden.
Exposed Root Vertical Garden
Our next vertical gardening idea features tiny plants with exposed ball roots. You might be skeptical about its appearance while reading about it, but trust us, it can add an elegant appeal to any home corner.
These tiny plants are hung by wires or threads from the ceiling. They act as a focal point to any room which is otherwise looking dull or bare. Opt for plants that grow slowly, as they are perfect for this hanging vertical garden idea. Adding some moss to the roots will provide the plants with optimal moisture and minimal maintenance on your end.
Futuristic Garden
Do you enjoy a futuristic and sci-fi appeal in your home decor and art? This next idea features protruding shelves arranged in neat vertical rows from top to bottom. Bright green moss is tucked into the shelves, making it look like the foliage is pouring out from the mouth-like shelves.
This idea is perfect for any modern or contemporary house setting. Using singular colored shelves adds definition to the entire structure, making it look like something out of a sci-fi film.
Coffee & Soup Tin Planters
Before throwing out your old coffee and soup tins, consider recycling them into DIY planters for our next idea. Collect as many coffee and soup tins as you can. They can be of different sizes, so don't worry about them not matching. You can even collect painting tins or anything else you can find around.
Take a couple of brightly colored paints and go wild! Paint all the tins in different, vivid colors. Plant some soil and add your plants, herbs, and flowers. Now, stick them to the walls, a fence, or even hang them using wire or ropes.
Grid Pots
Adding a grid will immediately ensure that whatever art piece you are planning looks symmetrical and clean. Create grids (as small or as large as you wish) along the walls using metal bars, rusted metal, or even wood if you wish.
Now, add lightweight terracotta planters to the grid using wires or by sticking them securely. Ensure that you do this correctly, as you don't want the pots falling and creating a bigger mess. Add your plants, and voila! A desert-themed vertical garden for your home is made easily and efficiently.
Scrap Wood Stained Planters
Do you have any old wooden boxes around your home? If not, don't worry. You can find these almost anywhere without even having to spend any money on them.
Get hold of a couple of similar sized wooden containers or boxes. Cut off one of the sides, so that it is entirely open with only three sides (a three-sided wooden box). Now, carefully stick these to the wall, add soil, plants, and you've got your vertical garden ready!
Stain the wooden boxes using natural dyes such as tea, coffee, vinegar, beet, spinach, etc. This will add a beautiful tint to natural wood.
Modern Art Vertical Garden
If you want your vertical garden to look like something straight out of a modern art museum, this next idea may be perfect for you. Although it seems complex, the idea behind it is extremely simple. You need two elements to create this piece - white frames and bright green moss.
This eye-catching decor is perfect for an office, a home-study, the partition between the living room and dining room, or even a modern bedroom. Use delicate wires to hang the frames from the ceiling, so it looks like they are floating in mid-air.
Ikea Lack Table
No space is too compact for introducing a garden. This is our motto. Hence, we have provided almost five dozen ideas for vertical gardens ideal for compact spaces. For our next inspiration, we decided to use the Ikea lack table hack.
For this, you'll obviously need an Ikea lack table, some chains, paint, and sonotubes. The sonotubes will act like miniature planters that you place inside the design.
This DIY project forces you to think out of the box. The result is something thoroughly breathtaking and something that looks like it's been purchased from a modern-art gallery.
Hanging Wall Gardens
This indoor hanging wall garden looks extremely simple and even a little rustic. However, it may be the perfect addition to your kitchen, living room, or any other space of your home.
You can choose to do a DIY project out of this idea by cutting up wood and creating this shelf yourself. Of course, you can also choose just to buy the hanging bracket and attach it to any wall. Place small (lightweight) plants on each shelf. Add a salt and pepper shaker and create a herb rack for your kitchen in no time!
Ladder Garden
Here is our next vertical gardening idea that makes use of a discarded ladder to create your garden. The idea behind it is extremely simple - just create a ladder with shelves using basic cutting tools and some wood. If the wood is pre-cut, then most of the hard work is already done!
This ladder garden can be placed anywhere - outdoors or indoors. Plant all your favorite flowers, herbs, or succulents along the shelves. You can even use this one as a quick herb garden for your kitchen, so you don't need to keep running to the garden to pick fresh herbs for your cooking.
Tiered Potted Garden
This next vertical garden is perfect for those beginner gardeners who are never too sure of how much water their plants need. Well, this planter takes out all the guesswork from it. The vertically stacked pots are pre-made (so you don't need to create one yourself). Buy this tiered potted garden online and place all your favorite plants in the pots.
Now, as you water the top plants, let gravity do its business. The excess water drips downwards, saturating the plants below.
Pyramid
Pyramids always look super aesthetic, right? Well, for this next vertical garden idea, create a pyramid where you can neatly stack herbs and spices or plant different varieties of seeds for each row in. Turn the pyramid into your herb rack by using each row for a specific kind of herb.
You can make this pyramid structure on your own using stacked wood pieces or buying a readymade piece online. You can even choose to get this made by a handy carpenter if you know one!
Stacked Raised Bed
This stacked raised garden bed is relatively simple to create on your own. You can even use old drawers, containers, or wood pieces to build this by scratch. Of course, you will find several of these ready-made raised beds in the market if you wish to purchase one instead.
Fill up each stack to the brim with soil, and plant your seeds, seedlings, or plants and flowers carefully. Water them as required and watch your vertical garden bloom.
Monogram Wreath
Many homeowners like to hang monogrammed designs in and around their homes. For our next idea, you can create a living monogram wreath using a monogram planter, some moss and succulents, and paints if you're feeling adventurous.
You can create the monogrammed planter on your own or buy one from a store or online. Spray paint (or use ordinary paints) in a bright color of your choice. Fill the inside of the planter with moss and your favorite succulent plants, and voila! Your living monogram wreath can be decorated in your entryway, inside your home, or in the garden.
Plumbing Pipe Garden
Plumbing pipes that are shaped vertically can be the perfect DIY planter for your vertical garden. Make sure you clean out the inside of the pipes thoroughly before you begin planting the soil and seeds in them.
If you feel that the pipes look old and washed out, spray paint them using bright neon shades. This can be a wonderful addition to your garden or patio. The plumbing pipe garden is sure to be an eye-catcher and can be used to create an industrial-looking aesthetic.
Trellis Garden
You may already have a trellis in your home, and if you do, this idea is perfect for you! That being said, if you don't own a trellis, it is pretty straightforward to make one without much hassle.
Use holders to secure tin buckets along the trellis wall. Add soil and some of your favorite plants in the tin buckets to create a DIR trellis vertical garden. This idea has a striking appeal and can provide a splash of color and nature to your home.
Floating Pot Garden
Our next vertical garden inspiration is ideal for homes that struggle with space. This idea is both compact and practical and also looks super aesthetic.
Cut out holes in wooden planks that will accommodate terracotta pots. Ensure that the holes are big enough to allow the pots to slide down only midway and not entirely. Use ropes or wires to hang the planks in as many rows as you wish, and add your plants to create a compact, space-saving vertical garden.
Teacup Garden
Our next vertical garden idea features a mosaic wall and teacups made into planters. You can choose to create the entire mosaic wall yourself or even opt for a wall you already have at home.
Use old (or new) teacups as planters by gluing them against the wall. Add soil and plants, and you're done. You can even add a few additional items like teaspoons, small saucers, or the tops of the teacups by sticking them against the wall. This creates an impressive design to the vertical garden that is sure to turn heads.
Ladder & Bucket
Surely you have a ladder and a few buckets lying around your home. If you do, then you can upcycle these items to create a unique vertical garden. Place the buckets horizontally against each rung of the ladder, and fill them with soil and plants or seeds.
If you're feeling creative, you can even paint the buckets and ladder in bright, complementary colors for extra appeal. Place this vertical garden outdoors for everyone to see.
Conclusion
Phew! We are finally done with our comprehensive list of 59 vertical gardening ideas.
While most of these DIY vertical gardening ideas are easy to create, some may require additional tools and expertise. Nonetheless, each one of these is unique, space-saving, and extremely functional.
The most important thing to keep in mind when creating any of these is to have fun with it. You may even come up with some interesting and unique ideas of your own. Please don't forget to share your ideas with us in the comments below, and let us know which idea was your favorite.
Are you tired of food going stale sitting in your fridge? If so, we might have the perfect solution for you.
Even though most of us like the idea of going to the supermarket every other day, it isn't a feasible idea. We usually buy many things in a single go, which quickly develops into a spiral where produce starts going stale.
Yes, there's always the option of meal prep, but cooked food starts tasting bland after a while. Hence, many people use zip lock bags to freeze food, but vacuum sealer bags might be a better option.
By vacuum sealing your food, you can retain the taste as well as its freshness. And, it works well for cooked and uncooked food items. However, finding the right vacuum sealer bags can be challenging, so we came up with some great suggestions.
Are you tired of meat going tasteless after storing them in zip lock bags? Don't worry, as these bags from FoodSaver will help you retain the taste of all food items for months. FoodSaver is a company making multitudes of vacuum sealer bag options along with a very own sealing system. So, let's check out the features of this product.
The first thing you will notice about this product would be its quality. The thickness of these plastic vacuum bags makes sure to lock in the freshness of cooked and uncooked foods. On top of that, it can stand temperatures of up to 195° F, making it microwaveable as well as great for sous vide water baths.
When using the FoodSaver vacuum sealing system, the plastic bags become completely airtight and watertight. Don't worry about tearing the bags, as the material is meant to resist it. Moreover, it won't get punctured even if it is in contact with sharp objects.
One of the common complaints about vacuum sealing bags is the complicated usage process. But, that's not the case with these FoodSaver vacuum bags. You can even customize the length of these plastic bags to fit any food according to your preference.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Overall, this is undoubtedly one of the best vacuum sealer bags we have come across. However, it does come at a high price compared to the other options available on the market. But, the quality of these bags is impeccable and keeps your food considerably fresher.
When getting the best vacuum sealer bags, FoodSaver is a company you can trust. Alongside the several variants of vacuum sealer bags produced by the company, these pre-cut ones are good for storing individual portions. So, let's look at the specialty of these plastic bags.
First of all, let's talk about convenience. These vacuum sealer bags are specifically pre-cut to fit around 1 quart or 946 ml of food. Hence, these are great options for people who live on their own or those who like to meal prep by dividing portions.
Furthermore, because of its multi-layer protection and high-quality plastic, these bags can be used for cooking. So, cooking your meat in a sous vide bath wouldn't be a problem with these bags. Similarly, the thickness of this plastic makes it good for storing food in the freezer for a long time, sometimes up to three years.
What's more, the plastic used in these vacuum seal bags is BPA-free. Therefore, you can store food for your kids or pets in these bags without worrying about the harmful effects of plastic. Plus, it locks in the freshness of your food, making them healthier and nutrient-rich.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This isn't really a negative thing about this product, but you must realize that it's only suitable for storing single portions. Because of the 1 quart size, storing big steaks or a large amount of food can be challenging. Moreover, when storing liquid food, try to freeze it beforehand to avoid spills while vacuuming.
Are you tired of using vacuum seal bags that cause freezer burn to your fish and meat? Don't worry, as these rolls from Wevac are the perfect solution to the problem. Along with outstanding quality, the company provides a combo of two rolls to let you pack a lot of food at the same time.
HEAVY DUTY AND PUNCTURE PREVENTION - 2 pack of 8 inch by 50...
INCREASE STORAGE TIME FOR NUTRITION AND FLAVOR - 3-6 times...
Why Did We Like It?
As someone looking forward to vacuum sealing your food to increase its shelf life, you will want plastic bags that will retain the freshness and nutrients of each item. These Wevac vacuum sealer bags let you achieve that with ease as it's pretty simple to use, even for a beginner.
Apart from that, these are commercial vacuum sealer bag rolls. Hence, the superior quality of the plastic allows you to store the food items for a longer duration. The packets even have specialized grooves to prevent the foods from developing burns from the cold surface of commercial or home-use freezers.
Furthermore, Wevac follows a no-questions-asked return policy. So, if you happen to face any issues with the vacuum sealer bag rolls, don't forget to contact customer care. We found them to be quite prompt at dealing with quality or delivery issues of the products.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the things that could have been better for this product is the sealing process. It supports most of the vacuum sealing devices available on the market, but it can take you some time to figure out the right way to get the best seal. A trick is to take the right measurement and seal the bag keeping the rough side facing up.
Tired of using expensive yet thin vacuum seal bags that don't seem to work? Try this combo from Simple Houseware that makes storing your food affordable and keeps it fresh for a long time without a constant need to check on it. And, the best part is that these rolls are compatible with the most common vacuuming systems.
Safety: BPA Free, Simmer and Microwave Safe, Great for Sous...
One for All: Designed for use with all vacuum packaging...
Why Did We Like It?
This pack of vacuum sealer bags rolls from Simple Houseware is by far one of the premium quality plastic bags we have seen on the market. Even though the material is thick, it seamlessly melts while sealing and keeps your food airtight. And, the multi-ply plastic keeps your food from getting dehydrated when kept in the freezer.
That's not all, as simmering or cooking via the sous vide method was especially simple with this bag. It's easy to seal the mouth of these bags, irrespective of the length you want to keep. If you follow the proper sealing method, the bags won't open while in the bath.
Moreover, you don't need to worry about safety as the plastic used in this bag roll is BPA-free so it doesn't react with the food. It's also safe to be used in the microwave and doesn't melt even at relatively high temperatures.
What Could’ve Been Better?
We have to say that this is one of the best vacuum sealer rolls we have tried out. While going through the past reviews, we found out that the bag doesn't perform well in high temperatures like 195° F. Don't get discouraged as it supports microwaving, but you will need to use a lower temperature setting.
Are you planning to pack a huge amount of food in one go? If yes, these vacuum sealer bag rolls from WishDirect might be the best option. It comes in a pack of four, which makes it perfect to keep the annual stocking of food in your pantry or freezer absolutely safe.
GREAT VALUE: Half of the money to buy 4 pack of 11 inch x 25...
HEAVY DUTY & STABLE: Two layers 4 mil heavy-duty vacuum seal...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, we have to say that a combo of four vacuum sealer bag rolls is an excellent product for those with big families. On top of that, each roll has a length of 25 feet, so you can easily customize the size of each bag. And, the length is pretty manageable for a single person who is vacuum-sealing the bags.
However, the best part about this plastic bag roll combo is that the material has texture on both sides. Hence, your meat wouldn't get freezer burns even when stored for a long time. We also felt that the quality of these rolls was better than other plastic bags available in the market.
Furthermore, you can seal these plastic bags with the best vacuum sealers available in the market. The bags can stand high temperatures and are compatible with microwaves, sous vide baths, and dishwashers.
What Could’ve Been Better?
A common complaint we came across while reading the customer reviews was about the rolls being a bit tight in the FoodSaver machines. Hence, if you happen to use one of the FoodSaver vacuum sealers, try to measure the inside to check its compatibility with these vacuum sealer rolls.
Pros
Simple to use
Fast and tight vacuum sealing
Good for microwaving food
Value for money
Cons
Might need to adjust for fitting into FoodSaver machine
As soon as we got hold of the Avid Armor vacuum sealer bags, we knew that it would be helpful for many people. We suggest these vacuum seal bags to those who have to pack food for commercial purposes or stock up food for a small kitchen. So, let's check out the features.
Preserves Food Quality - Keep your food fresh and delicious...
Tough Enough for Any Job - Need a trusty packing solution...
Why Did We Like It?
Let's start by talking about the size of these bags. You can get the 8 inches x 12 inches or quart-sized bags in a pack of 200 or 300 units. The size is perfect for individual portions and can even fit a good amount of cooked or dry foods.
One of the best features of this product is the cross-hatch pattern present on the plastic. This added texture allows you to store moist foods in these bags and to vacuum seal them easily. It's often hard to seal bags that lack texture as the liquid tends to escape from the packets. And, the bags are compatible with most commercial vacuum sealers.
When it comes to the quality, one side of the bag has a thickness of 3 mil, while the back has a thickness of 4 mil. So, you can be sure that the vacuum-sealed food will stay fresh and nutritious for long.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Before saying the negatives, we do have to mention that this is one of the best individual-sized vacuum seal bags available. However, the only problem you may face with it is that learning the right way to seal the bags may take some time. So, you may need to try a couple of vacuum sealers for the bags.
Do you vacuum seal foods for commercial purposes? If so, then buying a multi-pack of vacuum sealer rolls might be better to save a few bucks. This product from O2frepak comes with six plastic rolls to let you store a lot of food without needing to rebuy the vacuum bags.
Universal Design:Compatible with Any Types Vacuum Sealer...
Economical and Customized Size :6Pack 8"x20'(3Rolls) and...
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this multi-pack of vacuum sealer bags contains rolls with two width variants. Hence, it allows you to portion the food according to personal preference. It's also suitable for storing dry and cooked foods as the volumes are often different.
Coming to the quality, the plastic used to make these vacuum sealer bag rolls is pretty good. It even has embossed lines to prevent freezer burn as well as any liquids from escaping the bags. If you want to store raw meat, don't worry, as the bone guards make these bags strong against accidental cuts.
As we have said already, this pack is perfect for those who want to pack food for commercial purposes. The bags can be closed with the most common vacuum sealers available on the market. On sealing, the plastic forms a strong bond that doesn't break easily, and the food stays fresh for long.
What Could’ve Been Better?
This isn't really a drawback of the quality of these vacuum sealer bags, but it does take a lot of time to prep the bags. You will need to spend a considerable amount of time measuring and cutting the bags. A small tip, prepare the bags before you start assembling foods to save time.
Compared to other vacuum sealer bag rolls available in the market, this combo from Nutri-Lock is one of the most affordable options. However, the brand doesn't compromise on the quality and instead provides superior quality plastic bags that let you store food for a long time. So, let's check it out.
Universal - These bags are compatible with almost all...
Why Did We Like It?
As you might have noted, these vacuum sealer rolls come in a combo. The rolls have a similar length of 50 inches but vary in the width of 11 inches and 8 inches, respectively. This allows you to customize the length of each bag according to your need, making these rolls perfect for storing large pieces of food, like pork ribs or lamb shanks.
Now, coming to the quality, one of the best things about this product is the thickness of the plastic bags. At 3.5 mil, the bags contain the freshness of food items for a long time. It also makes these bags excellent for storing food in a freezer, pantry, or even for sous vide cooking.
Moreover, these vacuum sealer rolls are compatible with most clamp-style vacuum sealer machines available on the market. So, you need not worry about buying any specialized vacuum sealing system.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Even though it's pretty easy to use these bags, you will have to spend considerable time measuring and cutting the rolls. This does give you the ability to store any amount of food items according to your preference. But, based on the extent of your needs, it may take you a whole day when using these vacuum sealer bag rolls.
Last but not least, we have some pre-cut vacuum sealer bags from Wevac. The pint-sized plastic bags are perfect to portion out single servings of fish, meat, or even soups, especially while meal prepping. And, the thick plastic with an airtight seal protects the freshness of each meal. So, let's see the features.
HEAVY DUTY AND PUNCTURE PREVENTION - 6x10 pre-cut pint bags...
INCREASE STORAGE TIME FOR NUTRITION AND FLAVOR - 3-6 times...
Why Did We Like It?
There are many reasons to get these vacuum sealer bags, the first one being the commercial quality. Along with being thick, the embossed micro channels on the plastic bags help them to seal efficiently without developing any leaks. So, these bags can be easily used for sealing meat or even for sealing delicate items.
Additionally, these bags come with bone guards to prevent the plastic from tearing. Hence, you can use the bags for sealing steaks like T-bones and even ribs that have sharp edges.
Furthermore, cooking meat in sous vide baths is easier with these bags due to its watertight seal along with the ability to stand warm temperatures. Don't worry about the taste of your food, as Wevac bags are meant to keep the freshness intact, with the ability to prolong shelf life.
What Could’ve Been Better?
One of the things you need to remember while ordering these vacuum-sealed bags is a small size. As it's pint-sized, each bag can hold up to 473 ml of food. On top of that, you'll need to leave some space for sealing the bag. The good thing is that it's available in larger sizes.
Pros
Easy and convenient to use
Takes less time to assemble
Works well for sous vide recipes
Strong and durable plastic
Cons
For small sized portions only
Vacuum Sealer Bag Buying Guide
Are you still confused about which vacuum sealer bag would be best for your home? Don't worry, as we have gathered some important points to help you select the right product. We have also used these points while choosing the vacuum bags present in the list. So, do remember this before making the final purchase of any vacuum bag for storing food items.
1. Quality Of Material
The first thing to remember while getting any vacuum seal bag is to check the quality. As your aim is to store food items, the bags should be made of food-grade plastic. On top of that, it's a prerequisite to choose BPA-free material so that the plastic doesn't react with the food.
Another key point is to opt for heavy-duty material if you're looking forward to storing food for a long time. This is also true for keeping meat items in the freezer to avoid burns from the cold temperature. Moreover, a multi-layer material ensures that the food remains safe in high temperatures.
An easy way to know if the bags are made of quality material is to check the thickness. In vacuum seal bags, the value of thickness is defined by the unit of "mil." And, most brands will mention it on the packaging. Also note, that some vacuum sealer bags from brands like FoodSaver call for the use of special machines because of their thickness.
2. Size Of The Bags
A common mistake that people make while buying vacuum seal bags for food is to pick the wrong size. This is especially true for instances where a person goes for pre-cut bags. Apart from following the size of the bags according to their width and length, pay attention to the volume. This would give you an idea about the amount of food that might fit into the bag.
Moreover, if you want to store a lot of food at once, try to opt for a bag roll rather than individual vacuum seal bags. The plastic rolls typically have a length of 25 - 50 feet. But remember to leave a few inches for sealing the bag.
Furthermore, check the height of a roll to ensure its compatibility with any vacuum sealer machines you might have for sealing the bags.
Verdict
So, that's everything we had to tell you about getting the best vacuum sealer bag for storing your food. We hope that this guide will help you get the right product to keep your food fresh and nutritious for a longer time.
Among our recommendations, we will suggest the FoodSaver 11" x 16' vacuum seal roll to anyone looking for the best-quality plastic bags to seal their food items.
On the other hand, the FoodSaver pre-cut vacuum seal bags are best for storing small portions of food. However, it's a bit expensive to get these individual-sized bags.
Having said that, remember to read the proper procedure of vacuum storing any food item before attempting to keep it for long. And, don't forget to let us know about the vacuum sealer bag you like the most.
Every DIY enthusiast will encounter the unavoidable need to collect several types of UV glues at some point.
UV glues fall under the category of special adhesives and have a different function than regular superglue. The best UV glue is one that cures fast and hard while resisting scratches and stains. And since UV glues are often used to create beautiful resin designs, it would help if they were clear and tint-free after curing.
With an abundance of UV glue brands on the market, selecting the right one might be challenging. So, we compiled a list of the best products to help you discover the perfect adhesive for your project.
Without further ado, let us see some of the best UV glues available right now.
Best UV Glues
Here is the list of the 6 best UV glues that you can use to bond virtually any material together quickly and efficiently.
The first option we have for you is the UV resin glue by the brand ONGHSD. This product is available in four different bottle sizes, ranging from 25 grams to 200 grams per bottle. The glue comes in compact bottles complete with nozzles and can be squeezed directly on the surface of choice.
Resin Material - It's made of excellent harmless clear...
Widely Used - UV Resin can be used for small items...
Why Did We Like It?
Firstly, we decided to go through all the possible glues available on the market and shortlist them based on our needs. We were looking for an adhesive that was made of good quality epoxy resin or acrylic and had a short curing/drying process. And we were glad to stumble across this option which was a UV resin glue that turns completely transparent after drying.
One good thing about this light-curing glue is that it does not form bubbles and takes smooth, clear shapes upon curing. This makes it an excellent option for decorating, DIY jewelry, castings, and coatings for crafts. In case you need colored glue, you can also mix it with other solutions to get the color required.
Furthermore, the glue can cure quickly with UV light, like LED UV lamps, blacklight, and flashlights. However, make sure to store it in a dark place away from sunlight.
What Could've Been Better?
Even though this glue is quick-drying, there may be variations depending on the material to the glue is applied on. Wood and paper projects will dry and cure much sooner than other materials like plastic. Also, if the temperature is too low and the atmosphere is humid, the curing will take much longer.
Next, we have a transparent adhesive UV glue that can be used to bond, build, fix, repair, and fill most surfaces. Whether you need to fix the ends of phone chargers, jewelry, glasses, children's toys, or even shoes, this UV glue can do it all. Meaning, it is ideal for any household DIY project.
BOND ANY MATERIALS IN SECONDS - Our Bondic UV welding glue...
STAYS LIQUID UNTIL CURED - Unlike traditional glue, Bondic...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, this option is 100% waterproof and heat resistant upon drying. This means that you can use it in various locations, no matter the climate and it could even hold well on surfaces that are prone to leaks or water seepage.
Apart from that, the glue dries clear and can be painted over or sanded down once it hardens. That’s why it can be used for carpentry and woodworking projects. Apart from wood, this UV glue cures on a number of surfaces like rubber, ceramic, metal, PVC, leather, and steel wiring.
To add to that, the glue pen has an incorporated LED UV light that has an easy press button. When the Bondic UV glue is exposed to UV light, it takes a few seconds to form a permanent bond and hardens. Using this UV light glue, you can conveniently pull off multiple home decor projects.
What Could've Been Better?
This product is a good option for everyday repairs and fixes, especially since it has its own UV light. Also, it is non-toxic, so you can use the glue pen often. However, if you happen to run out of glue, the replacement comes at a pretty steep price.
Next, we selected the 4336846259 model by the brand DecorRom. While looking for the perfect DIY glue, we found this UV adhesive that dries clear and has a simple, quick curing process. This solvent-free formula is also non-toxic and great at creating durable bonds.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
First of all, this product contains ultraviolet resin, which cures to form a clear, glassy finish that is much more durable than other UV light glue. The formula contains epoxy resin which hardens to form a scratch-resistant surface, while also being resistant to stains and yellowing.
Once you apply the product from the nozzle, it self-levels and self-degasses, meaning the end result will be even and bubble-free. Understandably, it has a wide range of applications ranging from casting and coating to crafts, jewelry making, and resin paintings. You can also use glue on fabric and attach accessories safely to garments.
Now, the good part is, the UV adhesive requires no preparation and is ready to use from the tube. You can use a UV lamp to provide UV light to cure the glue, but sunshine does the job just fine too.
What Could've Been Better?
We thought this product delivered on most of the aspects we were seeking. And yet, we wished the brand released a variety of packaging sizes. The UV glue comes in only one size - a bottle that holds 60 grams of the product, but this quantity might not be enough for extensive resin-making projects.
The search for the best UV glues leads us to another brand QIAO QIAO DIY. This product is available in five sizes, ranging from a 25-gram to a 500-gram bottle. Requiring merely sunlight or a UV lamp to harden, this option is relatively easy to use for household repairs and DIY projects.
This UV resin can be cured under UV or direct sunlight...
Made of non-toxic and high-end materials,harmless and low...
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, unlike other low-quality UV adhesives, this option is suited for gap-filling because of its short curing time. No one wants to wait around pressing two surfaces together just to apply a coat of paint or sand wood. Thus, this product is the perfect option for quick fixes and small repairs in fabric and carpentry projects.
Also, this product has an easy curing process and dries clear under UV light. While other products might turn yellow or not be able to repair plastic correctly, this UV glue emerges as a reliable option for DIY builds. Although it requires ultraviolet light to cure, the UV adhesive forms durable bonds under sunlight as well.
Furthermore, you can mix UV glue with other materials like dye and pigment to create jewelry and craft projects. The squeezy bottle combined with the pointed nozzle design makes it easy to pour and apply over surfaces precisely.
What Could've Been Better?
Going through the online reviews, we found some customers stating that their projects needed rework because the glue formed bubbles. Also, if you live in cold climates with little sunlight, the adhesive will take a long time to set. For best results, it is recommended that the mold is exposed to UV light for curing.
Pros
Non-toxic formula
Anti-yellowing feature
Cost-effective
Precise nozzle for better application
Cons
May form bubbles
Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 0.88oz | UV Light Included: No | Cure Time: 30 to 90 Seconds (6W to 9W 405nm UV LED Light & Direct Sunlight), 2 to 4 Minutes (UV Lamp), 20 to 40 Minutes (Cloudy Day) | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Resists Yellowing
We decided to wrap up our list with premium UV resin glue by Limino. This product does not require measuring, mixing, or wasting time with ratios. It is a ready-to-use UV resin formula that sets to form a hard surface and is available in 200-gram bottles.
CONVENIENT & EFFICIENT - Do not need to measure, mix the...
PREMIUM - Crystal Clear UV resin with self-leveling and...
Why Did We Like It?
Straight off the bat, this UV glue comes in a handy bottle with a spout that is ideal for poring just the right amount of glue. This is one of those UV glues that self-level and de-gasses, so you do not have to worry about bubbles appearing after UV curing.
Comparable to liquid plastic, even a thin layer of this glue is enough to form a durable bond between two dissimilar surfaces. This formula falls under the category of hard UV adhesives, and it easily bonds plastic together. Its fast-curing, anti-staining, anti-scratching properties make it a popular choice for creating resin art.
With this option, it is easy to make castings, jewelry, craft decorations, figurines, and resin paintings. To add to that, this formula does not show any signs of yellowing under visible light. And you can always mix it with mica powder, colorants, and glitter to get finishes in colors of your choice.
What Could've Been Better?
Incidentally, most UV glues with an acrylic base are ideal for small repairs or decorating small projects. This also means that the formula cannot be used to make larger resin objects. For example, making an ashtray using this UV glue is not recommended as any amount of curing time will not be enough.
Pros
Ready to use formula
Non-toxic
Resistant to scratches
Anti-yellowing feature
Cons
Not ideal for larger projects
Quantity: 1 Bottle | Volume: 7.05oz | UV Light Included: No | Cure Time: 1 to 2 Minutes (UV Torch), 10 to 15 Minutes (Sunny Day), 30 to 60 Minutes (Cloudy Day) | Dry Color: Clear | Resistance: Withstands Temperature Up to 248°F, Resists Scratching, Staining, Yellowing
The Aventik Edison Bonding UV Glues Combo Tool Kit is a versatile and essential tool for DIY enthusiasts and professionals alike. It includes three types of UV glues, each designed for different materials and purposes, making it a one-stop solution for various bonding needs - whether you're fixing household items, creating jewelry, or working with electronics. The kit also features a 395nm UV pen to streamline the curing process and ensure a strong bond.
Combo tool kit of three best selected bonding function UV...
Fast Cure within 10 seconds under Aventik zoom-able 395nm UV...
Why Did We Like It?
The Aventik Edison UV Glues Kit sets itself apart with its wide range of applications, providing a solution for almost any material. Whether you're working with acrylics, PVC, glass, ceramics, metal, or PET, there's a specialized glue to suit your needs within the kit. The all-purpose UV glue is particularly helpful for tackling miscellaneous repairs. The kit's compatibility with many materials makes it an essential addition to any DIY toolbox.
The 395nm zoomable UV pen is another standout feature, turning a traditionally tedious waiting period for curing into a quick 10-second process. With a specialized UV-through lens and a high-quality LED head, the UV pen ensures fast and reliable results, offering convenience and efficiency.
What Could've Been Better?
While the Aventik Edison UV Glues Combo Tool Kit excels in many aspects, one slight drawback is the sticky residue it may leave, particularly if a thicker layer of glue is applied. Being mindful of the application amount and taking the time to clean up any excess glue will help to alleviate this issue.
Now that you have had the chance to see the kind of brands out there, it might be time to narrow down to one option. Here are a few factors you can consider before buying any new UV glue-
1. Type Of UV Glue
A. Acrylic UV Glue
Acrylic UV glues are known for their adhesion to glass, metal, and various plastic elements. The good thing is, acrylic UV glues do not shrink in size even if they are exposed to extreme temperatures or chemicals.
Furthermore, they are quick to dry and seal. However, there is a chance of the glue changing color and developing a yellowish tinge over time.
B. Epoxy Resin UV Glue
This type of UV adhesive forms some of the strongest bonds possible. It can bond to most surfaces, including wood, plastic, metal, and even glass. Epoxy resins are generally fast curing when exposed to UV light and are perfect for filling cracks in surfaces.
Upon use, you will find that epoxy UV glues emit a strong odor while curing, which is relatively harmless. This glue is often resistant to heat, and water but it is known to shrink slightly upon curing.
2. Durability
Over time, the glue can undergo various changes that diminish the appearance and integrity of the adhesion. You want to make sure to select an adhesive that does not wither over time. The best way to better understand the product is by checking customer reviews regarding durability.
3. Resistance To External Factors
Ideally, you'd want a glue that works just as well in cold climates as it does in warm ones. When it comes to epoxy UV glues, temperature, and humidity might affect the curing time if the UV light is incorrectly applied. Generally, this issue does not arise in acrylic glues since it is not sensitive to temperature.
UV Glues FAQs
What are the advantages of using UV glues?
UV glues offer several benefits, such as rapid curing time, strong bonds, no solvents, and precision application. UV glues can harden within seconds, depending on the wavelength and intensity of the UV light, and create durable and stable bonds that resist heat, chemicals, and moisture.
They are also solvent-free, making them an environmentally friendly option, and allow for a selective application and precise control over the bonding process.
Are there any limitations to using UV glues?
There are some limitations to using UV glues, such as the inability to cure through opaque or UV-absorbing materials, limited bond strength on certain plastics (e.g., polyethylene and polypropylene), and a higher initial cost compared to traditional adhesives. Despite these limitations, UV glues are extremely versatile and effective in many applications.
Are there any safety precautions to follow while using UV glues?
When using UV glues, adhere to safety guidelines such as wearing protective gear (gloves and safety glasses), avoiding direct skin and eye contact with the glue, working in a well-ventilated area, following the manufacturer’s instructions for UV light exposure and proper curing times, and not looking directly at the UV light source.
Can UV glues be used outdoors?
Yes, some UV glues are formulated to be resistant to sunlight and weather conditions, making them suitable for outdoor applications. Check the manufacturer’s specifications before using a UV glue outdoors.
How do I apply UV glue?
To apply UV glue, first clean and dry the surfaces to be bonded. Then, apply a thin layer of UV glue to one surface, align and press the surfaces together, and expose the glue to a UV light source (wavelength and intensity should follow manufacturer’s guidelines) until it cures.
How can I remove cured UV glue?
Fully cured UV glue can be difficult to remove. Some methods include gently scraping or using a razor blade to remove the glue, applying heat to soften the adhesive and then scraping it off, or using solvents or commercial adhesive removers with caution.
What is the shelf life of UV glues?
The shelf life of UV glues varies depending on the formulation and storage, typically lasting between 6 months and 2 years when stored in a cool, dark, and dry place. Always check the manufacturer’s guidelines for specific shelf life and storage instructions.
Conclusion
Here we conclude our list and guide for the best UV glue options available. Even though all the options presented are great choices in their own right, we did have a couple of favorite products.
The UV resin glue by ONGHSD was by far the most complete option with quick-drying abilities and plenty of DIY uses. Another product that we liked was the Bondic UV glue which came with a complete kit, including a small UV light.
We hope this guide assists you in figuring out the best UV glue for your home and DIY needs. Until next time, bye!
Cleaning upholstery fabric is quite a task, and calling up for professional services means spending a lot of money. But there is a way out.
Steam cleaners can be bought and kept in the house, and they will help you maintain fabrics, floors, and other surfaces. Now people have different needs, and while some might want to clean large expanses of fabric, others might want to spot clean parts of the surface.
Remember that the best upholstery steam cleaner will be able to take care of all your needs without being too bulky. It should help in deep cleaning as well as serve any extra purposes that you might have in mind.
In the next section, we will discuss the top 11 products and their benefits. We will then talk about the pros and cons in detail so that you can make an informed choice.
If you are looking for a versatile upholstery steam cleaner, then the McCulloch MC1275 will work perfectly well. It offers a host of benefits and comes with a large tank. You will be able to clean all areas of the house easily without having to hire professional services.
18 VERSATILE ACCESSORIES — Equipped for steam cleaning...
CHEMICAL-FREE CLEANING — Naturally deep clean without the...
Why Did We Like It?
A good upholstery cleaner should be able to clean all kinds of hard surfaces, and this one will fit the bill.
It can completely clean the grime, dirt, and greases off wood flooring, ceramic tile, grout, granite, sealed surfaces, grills, laminate, autos, and more. This option will offer you chemical-free performance, and you will not need harsh chemicals to see results. Instead of that, pressurized steam is used to clean the areas.
Moving on, you will get the benefits of a 48-ounce tank that can heat water within 8 minutes. Then you can constantly clean with steam for 45 minutes at a go. The steam cleaner also has a lockable steam option, and that will ensure a steady flow.
That’s not all, as you will be receiving 18 different accessories. These include a scrub pad, floor mop pads, nylon brushes, window squeegee, and a brass brush, to name a few.
What Could've Been Better?
This portable steam cleaner works very well, and you will not face any difficulties with the functioning. However, there is no extra space provided to keep the cords, and they will be hanging out when stored. While this does not affect productivity, you will have to be a little careful while storing it.
Up next is an upholstery steam cleaner that will clean stains in a jiffy. The Bissell 3624 is known for its superior suction ability, and it is perfect for houses with kids and pets. All the stains and marks that they leave behind can be cleaned easily with this option.
Every Bissell purchase helps save pets. Bissell proudly...
Our most powerful portable spot and stain cleaner for...
Why Did We Like It?
This is a portable carpet cleaner that can be easily taken around without any issues. It weighs 13 lbs and comes with a 20 feet cord that will help you reach all the corners easily.
Plus, it is known for its superior cleaning action, and it can scrub any piece of fabric. It is an essential requirement for carpet cleaning, and will ensure professional results. Using this you can get rid of pet stains from carpets, rugs, upholstery, stairs, automobile interiors, and many other surfaces.
Next, this carpet cleaner can also be used for deep cleaning and will take out embedded grime and dirt. There is a 3-inch tough stain tool for spot cleaning and a 6-inch stair tool for wider areas. The brand also provides a tough stain removal trial pack, which you can use to clean and protect surfaces.
Moreover, the Bissell pet foundation is on a mission to save homeless pets, and every purchase made by you will help save pets.
What Could've Been Better?
When we received the package, we found that the hose had not been packed well and hence, it had cracked. Therefore, we were a little worried and called customer care immediately. They were of great help and sent us a replacement product within a few days.
One of our top recommendations for portable steam cleaners is the Dupray DUP020WNA. It will ensure chemical-free cleaning with the help of steam. You can use it for all types of hard floors, and the continuous steam will do a wonderful job.
Versatile 17 Piece Kit: Includes specialized tools for...
Why Did We Like It?
Steam cleaners are supposed to be easy to use and should be able to clean surfaces without using harsh chemicals. This machine meets all the requirements and is equipped with a kit with 17 pieces. You will get a window tool, floor tool, nylon and brass brushes, extension tubes, lance, and microfiber pads, to name a few.
Adding on, you will get a large tank, and it will enable you to use the steam cleaner for 50 minutes at a stretch. A long power cord of 5 meters will allow you to move around easily without having to worry about electric plug points.
Also, steam cleaners degrease and clean floors, but this option goes the extra way and deodorizes floors as well. You can use the Dupray neat steam cleaner with any cloth or towel, and there is no need to purchase expensive pads separately.
What Could've Been Better?
You should know that this steam cleaner will take time to fill up, and that’s why you should be prepared to give it at least 20 minutes. Some might find it time-consuming, but you would not need to deep clean every day. Find time to work on the weekends, and this should not be an issue at all.
A very good option when it comes to handheld steam cleaners is the Bissell 39N7V. It is small in size, and one can easily carry it to different areas of the room and the house. Eliminate the usage of all kinds of hard chemicals and replace them with this.
No products found.
Why Did We Like It?
To begin with, we loved the color-coded brushes that come with the pack. These brushes have separate uses and are needed for different kinds of messes. The varied colors will help you identify the one that is needed easily.
Plus, you will get a grout tool, a flat scraper tool, and an angle concentrator tool in the pack. The grout tool will help clean grout in the bathroom and any tiled areas.
On the other hand, the flat scraper tool can be used to clear dirt, grease, and grime from stovetops, microwaves, and ovens. The angle concentrator will allow steam to flow in and clean hard-to-reach areas.
Moreover, steam cleaners are supposed to be able to clean up germs and bacteria, and this option will do a great job at it. It uses a powerful high-pressure mechanism that will not only clean but sanitize surfaces and will eliminate 99.9% of germs and bacteria.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing that we noticed here is that you cannot work from far when you are using this steam cleaner. For the perfect steam cleaning, you will be required to hold the steam jet nozzle close to the surface, and then you can work with it. This way, you will not face any problems.
If you are looking for more options when it comes to portable steam cleaners, then the Hoover FH11300PC is a brilliant choice. It will help in cleaning up conveniently, and you can scrub, spray and remove stains easily. We were very happy with the performance and ease of usage offered.
PORTABLE CARPET CLEANER MACHINE: Featuring a lightweight...
CONVENIENT DEEP CLEAN: This spot and upholstery cleaner...
Why Did We Like It?
A major problem with upholstery steam cleaners is that they tend to get dirty, and molds can start growing inside. However, this product is equipped with self-cleaning technology, and it is extremely beneficial. It will flush the hose every time you use it, and that will immediately remove the bacteria and dirt.
Next, this upright upholstery cleaner is equipped with dual tank technology, and you will be able to keep the clean and dirty water separately. In the end, just empty the dirty water, and the machine will be clean. It can store 36 ounces of dirty water at one time.
Furthermore, you can use this upholstery cleaning machine for deep cleaning mess made by pets and kids. It is perfect for everyday usage, and one can reach every place with it. Take care of corners and hard-to-reach places with the long hose that this comes with.
What Could've Been Better?
While this new upholstery steam cleaner can clean spots and fabric on furniture easily, it is not suitable for cleaning large spaces in a short amount of time. It is small in size and is known to be a portable cleaning option. But if you want to use it in large spaces, then the process can be time-consuming.
Now that we have reached the middle of this list, it is time to introduce the AutoRight C900054.M steam cleaner. It will ensure that your car is always clean, and this option is used by a number of car repair and servicing shops.
CAR STEAM CLEANER: Uses pressurized, 212°F high-temperature...
VERSATILE STEAM MACHINE: Clean your vehicle’s leather,...
Why Did We Like It?
A good quality upholstery steam cleaner should be able to run long enough for you to clean all the parts of the house well. This option comes with a 40-ounce boiler tank, and it can provide 45 minutes of continuous cleaning.
Plus, there is a built-in handle that can be used to move the device around whenever needed. It weighs 9.75 pounds, and you can carry it around easily in your house. You can also use it for your cars, and they will work on leather, carpets, car interiors, upholstery, and dashboards.
Moving on, you will be getting 11 accessories in the kit, and that should serve all your purposes. You will also be able to take it across surfaces, and it will clean off all kinds of stains left by pets and humans. No chemicals need to be used, and hence, you do not have to worry about the color fading off.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing we did not like about this product is that it did not come with a bag to keep the tools in. Hence, there is a chance of misplacing them, and we bought a separate bag to keep the tools in. The brand could take a look into this and provide an additional pouch along with it.
Do you have to take care of tough spots and stains? Then the Bissell 2837 is going to help you out with it. It is equipped with advanced technology, and it will work its way through stains and marks. We are very happy to see that it runs on battery.
Every Purchase Saves Pets. BISSELL proudly supports BISSELL...
Rotating DirtLifter PowerBrush. Our only portable carpet...
Why Did We Like It?
Pet accidents can happen at any time, and good upholstery steam cleaners should be able to take care of it. We used to get very worried when the mess was made on upholstered furniture. But this option uses a rotating DirtLifter PowerBrush, which works like a charm on the sofas. It loosens and helps clear off pet stains while keeping the fabric from fading.
Next, most upholstery cleaning machines need a power outlet to connect, but this one does not need that. It offers the convenience of a cordless option where you can use the lithium-ion battery to run the machine.
That’s not all, as you will be getting a ready-to-use PRO OXY spot and stain formula that acts as a cleaning agent. You can use both of them without mixing any water, and the process involves no hassle at all.
What Could've Been Better?
The one thing that you need to keep in mind regarding this upholstery cleaner is that it will only run for 20 minutes while it takes a few hours to charge. Now that means if you need to cover large areas, you will have to charge it in between and then continue using. That would take a lot of time.
There is no need to hire a professional cleaning service when you have got the LIGHT 'N' EASY Steam Mop 7688ANW in the house. This is one of the upholstery steam cleaners that stand out because of the ease of usage offered. It works best for houses with infants and pets.
On-demand HI, MED and LOW steam settings fit for various...
Detaches into a separate handheld steam cleaner for...
Why Did We Like It?
Garment steam cleaners are essential if you need to wear wrinkle-free outfits every day. This option is very similar and will give you the opportunity to remove wrinkles from clothes, as well as it will give you the benefits of a natural upholstery cleaner. Many customers also use it for cleaning bathrooms and kitchens.
Moving on, you can easily shift among high, medium, and low settings and the steam will flow accordingly. It can be used on various surfaces like vinyl, laminate, marble, grout, tile, stone, sealed wooden floors, as well as on fabric. You can slant and use it on any surface, or you can remove the handle and use it for garments.
Besides, the steam cleaner uses steam at 212 degrees Fahrenheit to remove sticky substances and stains. It will easily dissolve the dirt and grease and then suck it in. You can use it with tap water and distilled water, and it will work well to clean most home essentials.
What Could've Been Better?
We would have liked it better if the upholstery steam cleaner manual was a little more detailed. This one does not contain enough information, and you might face some challenges while using the manual. We will recommend calling up customer service and asking them for help.
Another very efficient and portable steam cleaner in the market is the Hoover BH12010. You can move it around and clean messes without having the device attached to a cord. We were able to carry it on vacations where our pet accompanied us. It can be stored easily and will not take up to much space.
ONE BATTERY. CLEANS ANYWHERE: Enjoy automatic cleaning and...
TOOLS FOR EVERY MESS: This spot and upholstery cleaner...
Why Did We Like It?
Good steam cleaners ensure convenience and power at the same time, and this option provides one with both. You can literally grab it and go, thanks to the less weight. It will only weigh 7 pounds and you can take it in your car easily.
Plus, the compact size makes it easy to store, and you can keep it in narrow storage spaces. That is not all, as the item has dual tanks that keep the freshwater solution separate from the dirty water. You can easily empty it without much hassle and then fill the other tank with a cleaning solution.
Also, you will get a scrubbing tool and a removable hose along with the pack. These will help in cleaning areas better. A trial solution will be provided so that you can immediately start working.
What Could've Been Better?
While you will easily be able to work on fabric and upholstered furniture, they have to be near you. The hose that is provided along with it is not very long, and you cannot reach far places. Keep this in mind before purchasing, and you should not face issues.
There are steam cleaners meant for cleaning as well as sanitizing a place, and the COSTWAY Steam Cleaner will work out for both. It features an ergonomic design that will ensure easy portability. We have been using it for multiple kinds of surfaces, and it has been working out great.
[Efficient & Deep Clean]Our Steam Cleaner uses up to 226 °F...
[Large Water Capacity]The Steam Cleaner includes a 1.5L...
Why Did We Like It?
Steam cleaners come with some accessories, and this one is equipped with 19 of them. We had tools to clean every kind of surface, be it tiles, carpets, metal, mirrors, or glasses. There is no need to use harsh chemicals as the device will take care of it all. You can work to eliminate 99.9% of pathogens, bacteria, molds, viruses, and bedbugs.
Next, the steam tank is large, and you will get a capacity of 1.5 liters. That will ensure that you can work for 45 minutes at a stretch. The steam reaches a temperature of 226.4 degrees Fahrenheit, and that would mean that the grease and dirt would dissolve completely.
You will also be happy to see that there is a pair of wheels that is attached to the body. A comfortable handle is provided so that you can drive it around easily. There is no need to lift it because the wheels will allow easy movement.
What Could've Been Better?
While the product worked out well for us, we were not very satisfied with the customer service. We wanted some more information about using the tools provided. But nobody picked our call when we reached out to customer care, and we ultimately took the help of Youtube videos.
Our final suggestion is the Kiato Handheld Steam Cleaner, which is known for its lightweight design and large tank capacity. This product has multiple uses, and you will be able to clean floors and fabric with it easily. We are also happy with the sufficient water tank that is provided.
Handheld steam cleaners need to be lightweight and easy to carry. You should be able to move one around, and this option will allow you to do just that. Once you have a target area set, you can spray continuously. The dirt will dissolve and then be sucked in by the machine.
Besides, the water tank capacity is 450 ml with a load capacity of 250 ml. So, you will not have to refill often, and you can concentrate on cleaning the place. Also, there is a power cord of 16.4 feet that is attached to the steam cleaner. You can work with it from a distance for 8 minutes constantly.
Moreover, you will be getting a 10-piece accessory set, which includes a nozzle with brush, fabric steamer tool, and wipers, to name a few. You will be able to clean countertops, kitchen ink, toilets, floors, pet mattresses, and sofas.
What Could've Been Better?
If you are trying to get rid of molds and mildew, then you will be required to scrub a lot. Although the steam will make it easier to get the molds off, you will have to use the scrubbing tool provided and put in some amount of effort.
Pros
Lightweight and portable
Long cord of 16.4 feet
Dissolves dirt easily
10-piece accessory set included
Cons
Molds will require scrubbing
Upholstery Steam Cleaners Buying Guide
Now that you know about the top steam cleaners on the market, it will be easier to select one for your house. But you must have realized that different options serve various purposes, and keeping your needs in mind is very important. To provide you with an example, the best upholstery steam cleaner may not work well for hard floors.
Let us make this choice easier by telling you about the factors that you need to keep in mind. Read on carefully to know all about them.
Purpose
There are some upholstery cleaners that work well for hard floors, and you can use them on granite, tiles, grout, and other concrete surfaces. However, they may not work well for fabric or rugs. You will find other options, which will work better for rugs and fabrics.
Some products may work better for dirty spots and for reaching narrow areas, while others may work wonders for larger areas. So, make a note of the needs that you have and purchase accordingly.
Tools And Accessories
You will be getting a set of tools and accessories with upholstery vapor steam cleaners, and you should check if the needed tools are provided. If pet mess needs to be cleared from upholstered furniture, then you will need a good quality scrubber and a squeegee.
Also, if you have to reach difficult corners, there are nozzles for that. Check the options well, and you should have a fulfilling experience.
Portability
A portable cleaner is the need of the day, and the one you purchase should be movable. There are handheld steam cleaners that can be easily moved by hand. Other heavier options may come with wheels for easy movement.
If you have stairs in the house, then a lighter one will be a good choice. But if you have a large surface area to clean, like a hall or a big one-floor house, you can use a product with wheels.
Verdict
The best upholstery steam cleaner should last for a long time, and you should not have to spend too much time and money on maintenance. We will always suggest purchasing these instead of artificial and harmful chemicals. There are other choices on the market too that you can look at. You can also use vacuum cleaners for this purpose.
Before we wrap up, let us take you through our favorite steam cleaners once more. The McCulloch MC1275 is a versatile option that can be used on large expanses. On the other hand, the Bissell 3624 is perfect for spot cleaning. And the Dupray DUP020WNA offers a very long hose to reach narrow spaces.
Let us know about your favorite options in the comment section below. And do not hesitate to call up customer care if you have any queries regarding any of the products.
It's already Christmas time, and you have probably filled your home with jolly and festive decorations. Starting the tone for the holidays in your home is really important if you want you and your family and friends to feel great. Christmas decorations have a huge impact on the way we feel, so don't miss decorating your home this year. Even small details make a big difference, so make sure you add something festive in every room in the house. I bet that most of you have skipped the bathroom and didn't decorate it in the jolly mood. Honestly, the bathroom can look pretty amazing for this lovely holiday, so check out the Unexpected Christmas Bathroom Decoration That Will Catch Your Eye. You will get hooked on them and will definitely want to decorate even this room with some Christmas decorations. There are plenty of ways to do it, so find your favorite one!
This soap dispenser with a Christmas tree inside of it is totally adorable and it's not going to leave you indifferent for sure. You will want to have it in the bathroom, and the good news is that you can make it on your own and you have the full tutorial on the link below.
Adding some garland, some Christmas ornaments, and some candles here and there will set the tone immediately. Your guests will be amazed at your awesome and careful decorations.
The Christmas berries are also a great addition to your bathroom, so if you have some think about adding them in some unexpected places which will bring joy to the room.
How do you see these rather simple but insanely effective Christmas Bathroom Decorations? We would love your thoughts and decor ideas in the comment section below!
We are all excited when it comes to choosing decorative pieces for our homes because they tend to make our living spaces more stylish, cozy and contemporary. Every empty wall gets a completely different dimension when filled with some majestic art. We seem to add those artworks in every single room except the bathroom. The bathroom is the last room in the house that we consider for wall decor, and this is completely wrong. The walls in the most intimate place in the house are waiting for displaying some amazing art, so get inspired from the photos below to add those lovely frame in the bathroom. Check out the Unexpected Bathroom Artwork That Will Take You Aback and see how people have incorporate it in the most controversial room in the home. Although there are lots of question about keeping those artistic pieces undamaged from the moisture and the steam there are some tips that you should follow to keep them in their original shape.
The biggest problem that we are facing in the bathroom is humidity and it can be a serious danger to your artwork. Keep the expensive pieces out of this room and go for the inexpensive ones. Also, make sure you keep windows and doors open whenever possible in order to let the room breathe.
If you are about to choose the frames for the artwork that you are going to hang in the bathroom we suggest you to go for wood because it's the material that can breathe and it's the most suitable one for this room in the house.
Are you in the mood for creating a gallery wall in the bathroom? Fill one wall with artistic pieces of different shapes and sizes to get a playful and vibrant look. You can also add empty frames too and they will complement the gallery wall in a wonderful fashion.
Black and white artwork will give your bathroom a feel of elegance and drama, so when you are in doubt what kind of art you should display here, this is one safe alternative that always works.
With the onset of winter, we welcome the misty mornings and chilly evenings, but it comes with its own set of woes. And, hot water is the bare necessity during this time of the year.
What is the breakthrough invention for home appliances? Without a blink, it’s none other than the most hardworking device in every home - a water heater. It was before the invention of this heating system that we used the open fire or the stove for making hot water. This was indeed a time-consuming affair back then, but water heaters are simple, safe, and convenient to use today.
At present, you'll find a wide variety of water heating systems in the market, with apparent distinctive features. This is how far, innovation has come to help make our daily lives simpler.
However, you’ll face quite a few challenges as you look for the right water-heating appliance for your home. We’ve compiled the best types of water heaters in the following guide to help you make a fully-informed decision!
Types of Water Heaters
Tankless Water Heater
The “tankless” water heater comes with a modern technology feature that gives your home an endless amount of hot water.
How does the tankless water heater function?
As the name suggests, the “Tankless” water heater comes without any tank. It has coils that get super-heated when filled with water. This helps to heat the water in an instant, no wonder it’s called the on-demand water heater. If you have a large family, then this product will be perfect for water heating purposes. It can heat a large amount of water quite efficiently.
Illustration by Doug Adams
The “Tankless” water heater is available in different sizes. So, you should be careful about selecting the appropriate size as per the needs of your family. For instance, if you choose a small water heater and the demand for it is huge, then you can expect to get cold or lukewarm water.
With the smaller water heater, you have the option to use natural gas to power the heater. But, if you’re opting for the larger size, you’ll need a gas line with a large quantity of gas to help the water heater function right.
However, for the larger models which run on electricity, you’ll need to increase the electrical capacity of your home. This can get expensive, mainly if the water heater is used frequently.
What type of maintenance is required?
Even your “Tankless” water heater will require some basic maintenance. You should get it cleaned at least once a year to avoid corrosion by removing the mineral scale deposits. You might find the parts of this heater to be pretty small which makes it more challenging to clean. If you can maintain this heater correctly, it will last you anywhere between 8 to 10 years.
What are the positive aspects of this water heater when compared to the other models?
If you’re looking to reduce your energy consumption, we advise you to get the “Tankless” water heater. The main reason people usually opt for this “tankless” model, is due to its on-demand feature, which gives you warm water in a flash when you need it.
And, if you get one of the large “Tankless” models for your home, you have the privilege of getting hot water throughout the day.
What are the negative aspects of the Tankless Water Heater?
The down payment for this model is much higher than the other conventional-style water heaters. Few of these models also require larger electricity capacity and gas lines that will be an additional cost for the entire renovation.
Traditional Storage Tank Water Heater
In most homes, you’ll find this conventional-style water heater, that makes you quite familiar with the model we’re about to describe. However, let’s look at the details of this product!
How does the conventional storage-tank water heater function?
In this style of water heater, you’ll get the storage tank feature, for storing water that needs to be heated. This indicates that the size of the water tank helps to determine the quantity of hot water available for you at once. The tanks come with proper insulation for keeping the water warm after you have turned on the heater.
The heater comes with a two-valve feature; one is for controlling the temperature while the other is for pressure control. The pressure control valve opens only when it needs to release heat and for moderating the temperature level after the water records 120 degrees Fahrenheit. And, the valve for pressure control opens for reducing the pressure after it reaches around 150 Psi.
This is the most popular type of water heater that is available in almost every household. But, it does have limitations for the amount of water that it can hold. You might face some challenges if you’re purchasing a small tank for a household that generally requires a large quantity of water. For instance, you’ll have to wait for another new tank to be heated each time you run out of hot water.
What kind of maintenance is required for the traditional storage-tank water heater?
This water heater tends to work continuously for storing water, which makes it essential for you to clean the tank quite often. It will not just prevent corrosion but also enhance the lifespan of the water heater. You need to ensure that the tank is cleaned at least twice a year to remove the mineral scale deposits and other sediments.
If you don’t focus on the maintenance aspects, then the water heater will not last for an extended period. However, the Traditional Storage Water Tank Heater usually comes with a lifespan of around 10 to 12 years.
What are the advantages of this type of water heater?
This traditional Storage Tank Water Heater is one of the most affordable styles that you can find along with a simple installation process.
What are the drawbacks to purchasing a Traditional Storage Tank Water Heater?
This model of water heater, it has a fixed amount of water that it can store. For instance, a tank with a 50-gallon water capacity will offer you the same quantity of constant water flow until the tank is empty. After you run out of hot water, it may take around an hour or more to refill the tank and to heat another 40 gallons of water.
Condensing Water Heater
This water heater has a smart solution, which makes it energy efficient. It utilizes the extra gas fumes in your home by capturing it for heating the water.
How does the Condensing Water Heater function?
This is also known as the condensing boiler. If you're using natural gas as a primary source of energy at home, then the Condensing Water Heater is one of the best options available. This water heater is energy efficient as it can extract energy out of the flue gas and then stores this heat for pre-heating the water which enters the boiler.
It has a tank just like other traditional storage-tank water heaters. But, it captures the hot exhaust gas that is generally expelled from the house through the flue. These gases are then blown from the coil which is placed at the base of the heater. It is located at the bottom, to heat the incoming cold water. This design of the water heater is suitable for a household that requires around 55 gallons of hot water or more.
This Condensing Water Heater requires quite a less amount of energy when compared to other styles of water heaters. But, you should purchase the appropriate size with a large capacity according to the needs of your family.
What are the types of maintenance required for this style of water heater?
This model also comes with a tank, just like the other water heaters. So, you should ensure that you get the tank cleaned at least once a year. And, the same goes for the gas import valves that should be maintained well.
What are the advantages of using this kind of water heater?
For households that use natural gas, this style of water heater is indeed the most energy-efficient option. You’ll get plenty of hot water as this model comes with a big tank, so there is no fear of the water running out anytime soon.
What are the disadvantages of this style of water heater?
You’ll not find a small-size tank for this model, but it works perfectly fine for families that require a quantity of 55 gallons of water or more. However, this style of water heater is not a great alternative when compared to the Conventional Style Storage Tank Water Heater. Especially for homes that don’t require natural gas for other purposes.
Heat Pump Water Heaters
Heat Pump Water Heaters are also known as Hybrid Electric Water Heaters. You’ll not be spending much money on your electricity bills since it doesn’t generate heat directly leading to lower consumption of power.
How does the Heat Pump Water Heater function?
This style of water heater comes with a unique mechanism. It captures heat from either the ground or air, and then gradually transfers the heat to the water. This shows that the electricity is in use only when the heat moves from the air or ground to the water tank. It's unlike the other models, where the machine depends entirely on electricity to operate.
It consumes around 60% less energy when compared to the conventional style of a water heater. However, the heat pump is placed on top of the water heater so you'll need around 8 feet of open space from the floor to your ceiling.
What kind of maintenance is involved in this water heater?
Just like the traditional storage tank water heaters, this model also comes with a tank, which means that it should be cleaned regularly. And, when you get the general inspection and cleaning done at least twice a year, it helps the water heater to function efficiently.
What are the positive aspects behind the usage of hybrid/pump water heaters?
This model of water heater is extremely energy efficient, which means you can expect a return on investment with lower utility bills.
What are the pitfalls of this type of water heater?
TheHybrid Electric Water Heater doesn’t function efficiently in places with extremely low temperatures. This is because it depends mainly on drawing heat from the air or ground that is around it. We don’t advise you to place this heater in your basement or in places where it’s freezing throughout the year. Finally, this model of water heater is one of the most expensive pieces available.
Solar Powered Water Heater
A water heater that is solar-powered draws its energy from the sun. If you’re considering adding solar panels, or you already have them installed at home then this style will be the absolute best option for you.
How does the Solar Powered Water Heater function?
If you’re looking for a highly energy-efficient model of water heater, the Solar Powered Water Heater will be suitable for you amongst all the other styles. It relies on solar panels for energy sources which are usually mounted on the roof.
The solar energy trapped in the cells of the solar panels is slowly transferred to the closed-loop system, which contains the heat-conductive material (antifreeze-like fluid). This antifreeze-like fluid then runs to heat the water in your tank.
The Solar Powered Water Heater works great for people who are living in warm, sunny climates, as it can save a ton of money on electricity bills. Overall, you’ll also require to have an alternative energy source, such as electricity or natural gas, to operate the water heater during the cold and rainy season.
What kind of maintenance is required?
This system also comes with a tank, that should be cleaned at least twice a year to remove the mineral deposits and for preventing corrosion. You also need to maintain the solar panels, which might require an annual professional inspection.
What are the benefits of using a Solar Powered Water Heater?
It is an environmentally friendly water heater as you’ll be reducing the hot water carbon footprint. This is an incredibly energy-efficient style of water heater that turns around 80% of the radiation into heat energy. And, by installing the solar-powered heater, you can save money on electricity bills every month. You can get an unlimited amount of hot water during the sunny days.
In some countries, the government also gives financial incentives if you start using solar-powered water heater which includes- federal and state tax credits, along with utility rebates.
What are the drawbacks to this style of water heater?
The entire set that comes along with this water heater can get pretty expensive in some regions. It might take around 20 to 30 years or more to yield a good return on your investment.
It is not suitable for all weather conditions as you need to depend on the sun to heat the water. However, when you have to get an alternative energy source, it just adds to the overall budget. Also, the annual maintenance of the various parts of the solar water heater can be a hassle.
Combined Space and Water Heating System
The Combined Space and Water Heating are appropriate for homes with lower heating requirements. This is due to lowered air leakage, more insulation, and efficient use of the space. With these systems, you need a single heating unit for your domestic water heating and space; this helps to save a significant amount of energy.
What is a Combined Space and Water Heating System?
It is also known as the “combi” system, which can easily replace the existing water heater and the forced-air furnace. This system consists of an optimized hydronic air handler and a high-efficiency boiler or water heater. The air handlers have been designed with large coils that help with heat transfer for an efficient method of space heating.
The fan coil is generally installed with ductwork, while the small pump helps to circulate water from your water heater along with the fan coil. If you want floor or radiant heating, you can distribute the hot water through the in-floor piping.
When you’re purchasing the water heater, you should be careful about the size to ensure that it can serve combined heating purposes. The functions of this system are different when it’s used for heating water in addition to space heating. Similarly, the performance rating of the space heater should not be used to measure its performance as a water heater.
How to maintain this heating system?
With preventive maintenance of the entire heating system, there are several benefits such as- longer equipment life, fewer repairs, lower energy bills, few chances of catastrophic breakdown, and safer equipment operation. You should hire a professional at least twice a year for general inspection and cleaning purposes.
What are the benefits of using a Combined Space and Water Heating System?
The “combi” system has the same gas consumption level when compared with separate high-efficiency water heaters and natural gas furnaces. It saves a good amount of energy and money by not having to purchase separate space and water heating devices. Moreover, this system eliminates spillage issues from the natural draft appliance with the use of a direct or powered combustion vent.
What are the negative aspects of this space-water heating system?
The initial investment for this product can get relatively expensive. And the installation process is quite challenging, as many installers are not familiar with this system. Therefore, we cannot compare this heating system with the standard installation methods for power vents or condensing furnace water heaters.
Combined Space and Water Heating System with a Hydronic Boiler
This combination space-water heating device has a hydronic boiler instead of a water heater. It’s a compact, energy-efficient option for a household that is aiming to save energy and reduce the number of necessary appliances. These systems come in different models for some, you can heat your space and water simultaneously, while for others heating space and water can be done one at a time.
What is a Combined Space-Water Heating System with a Hydronic Boiler?
This type of water heating device is also known as the segregated heating system or combi-boiler. It uses a hydronic boiler, from which the heat is generally transferred to the water through a heat exchanger. In some countries, there are rules which state the use of double-wall heat exchangers for such heating applications. It helps to avoid the contamination of potable water from your boiler heating loops.
You can find new combination boiler designs which have full-energy saving power along with a tankless feature. This helps to ensure that there isn’t any unnecessary water heating when you’re not around.
Moreover, it also comes with a flow control valve which ensures a constant temperature level irrespective of your incoming water temperature. You can, therefore, enjoy a good quantity of hot water flow with accurate water stability.
What maintenance is required for this heating system?
Again, you have to get annual cleaning and general inspection done for the boiler to work efficiently. The auxiliary pump connections and flow control valve should be maintained correctly to prevent it from mineral deposits and corrosion.
What are the benefits?
The life span for this heating system is around 10 to 15 years, depending on the maintenance and usage. It has a compact design with built-in parts for outdoor reset control, auxiliary pump connections, and recirculation capability. Therefore, it minimizes the number of products that you need to purchase separately for each function.
When you have this heating, the compact size also helps to free up the loft or roof space that is otherwise used for cold water storage in traditional heaters. This is because the combi-boilers get their water supply directly from the mains without the use of any tank. It’s a highly efficient heating system, and you’ll have around 90% savings from your monthly electricity bills.
Are there any negative aspects to this style?
It has a complicated installation procedure as it requires various electronic devices for its functions. You should ensure that a professional does the setup correctly because the repairing cost of a boiler is quite expensive.
This heating system might not be suitable for larger households with a high demand for hot water. As these boilers directly get their water supply from the mains, and it doesn’t have any backup of a water tank. Therefore, it requires more time to heat the water, and big families should instead opt for the traditional boiler that comes along with a water tank.
Features to Consider When Purchasing a Water Heater
Warranty
The general coverage for water heaters varies as per the cost and duration. But, the life span usually ranges from three to twelve years. You might have to pay a bit more if you want a longer-warranty period. However, we advise you to pay that extra amount to get a load off your shoulder without having to surprise yourself with more repair costs in the future.
You might also get a few models of water heaters that come with 13-15 years of warranty. And, they tend to have larger burners or other elements which can speed up the heating process. Also, it might have good insulation that prevents heat loss and saves up on energy.
Glass-Lined Tanks
Some water heaters are designed with a glass lining ( porcelain enamel ) inside them. Most of our water heaters are made up of steel, but with a coating of porcelain enamel, it helps to protect the interiors from corrosion. These days, ceramic enamel coating is also becoming widely popular. However, a glass lining is not a necessity in a water heater, but it helps to reduce the corrosion level that extends the life of the water heater in return.
Anti-Scale Devices
The buildup of mineral scale can damage the water heater to a great extent. Few brands have water heaters with anti-scale devices which swirl the water present at the bottom of the tank. This constant movement of water inside the tank helps to prevent mineral deposits. Even though this feature can enhance the lifespan of your water heater, you should focus on getting a model with a more extended warranty period.
Plastic vs. Brass Drain Valves
The drain valve is situated near the bottom of the water heater. It is used to drain the water before shifting the equipment or for other maintenance work.
These drain valves are usually made of plastic or brass. Unlike plastic material, brass is more durable and malleable, while it's also known for being less reactive to water temperature changes. It’s a small feature to consider but has a significant impact on the durability of the water heater.
Capacity
To determine the size of the water tank, you should first understand the amount of water that you’ll require for your household. For instance, a 40-50 gallon water tank for two to five people, while 55 gallons or more for six to seven members. And you’ll require two water heaters for a house with more than eight members.
Digital Displays
The water heaters that come with digital displays are more convenient for our personal needs as you can easily alter the settings. These modern digital displays can be used to adjust the water temperature and water output, and it also comes with a scheduling feature. You can input the duration/hours in which the house is occupied for added efficiency as it can turn off when you’re away.
Possible Reasons to Replace Your Water Heater
When you consider replacing the water heater, you should be sure about a few things, that have gone wrong with the older model. This will help you understand the features that you want to have in your new water heater. We’ve curated some of the common grounds that you should look into, while you opt for an upgrade!
Leakage problems with the water heater
If you notice any leakage in the water heater, you’ll need to call the plumber for helping you fix the problem. This can be a time-consuming chore as well as expensive, but a professional inspection will help you understand the gravity of the issue. And, whether a simple repair will be enough, or you need to replace the entire system.
The warranty period is over
If your warranty runs out by a few years, after the given 10-12 years life span, then this is the best time to get a new water heater. Especially if you’re spending a ton of money on constant repairs as the system keeps breaking down quite often. An older design also indicates that a higher amount of energy is being used to operate the water heater, as it loses its efficiency over time.
Getting a new heater can be expensive initially, but you can save energy and money from the electricity bills every month.
Your building codes have changed
The other reason to purchase a new water heater is when your older model doesn’t match the building codes of your community. It’s essential to keep updating yourself about the new building codes since your devices need to change accordingly. However, if you’re moving from one state to another, then you should get a new model that fits with the building codes of that area.
You keep running out of hot water
Have you been running out of water each time you start doing the dishes or are you taking lukewarm showers frequently? Well! This means that you need a storage tank with a larger water capacity, as your household has a higher demand for hot water.
Final words
As you have read through the variety of water heaters in the market, you should now carefully weigh out their pros and cons. This epic guide was created to help you find a suitable model as per your needs, so make the best use of it!
You must have come across the term sheet metals in various instances. But do you know about their different types and uses?
Widely used in commercial, industrial, residential, and commercial applications, these flat and compressed forms of metals offer diversity in terms of functions and use. That being said, each sheet is prepared carefully using different types of metals and manufacturing processes to stand out from the others.
Remember the chapters on metals and alloys? Well, it’s time to go back to the basics of chemistry, folks!
With various metal alloys and manufacturing processes like galvanizing and electroplating determining the types of metal sheets, each can be differentiated accordingly. On that note, it’s time to get into the depth of the 9 types of sheet metals and their diverse uses.
So, without further ado, let’s dive in.
Basics of Sheet Metals
Before going into the details of its types and uses, we would like to take a few minutes of your time, in order to provide you with the basics of this topic.
So, what is sheet metal? Well, to define the term in a simple way, it is basically a kind of metal, which undergoes a manufacturing process for compression into flat sheets. By way of operations involving riveting, cutting, shearing, punching, and folding, they are processed through cold metals.
Mostly, each sheet comes with exceptional quality and a thickness below 6 mm, offering versatility in a wide range of applications. Hence, it serves as an essential tool or equipment for every metal worker.
By now, we hope you are pretty clear about the whole concept. That being said, you can now take a run-through of our list and recommendations.
Stainless steel is the most common metal used in the making of metal sheets, especially because of its high resistance to atmospheric moisture. In other words, it ensures durability, even after being exposed to acid, rain, salt, and other similar elements, bringing it to the number one position on our list!
In fact, it doesn’t end there! With a composition of less than 13% chromium and additional components, including Nickel and Molybdenum, you can expect these sheets to offer high strength and quality.
That being said, based on metallic combinations, stainless steel sheets are also classified into three different types. Have a look at the list below:
Ferritic steel sheets
Austenitic steel sheets
Martensitic steel sheets
Uses of stainless steel sheets
Being extremely durable and strong, stainless steel sheets help in shielding, manufacturing, and other purposes. Let us now go through the ways in which these sheets can be used:
In offering protection against corrosion and natural decays
Used in machines that process chemicals and liquids
Ideal for machines undergoing rigorous pounding
Ensures durability and stiffness
Take a look at this recommended stainless steel sheet available on Amazon:
Being highly electrically conductive with no composition of additional metals, copper sheets are popular and mostly used as conductors. Apart from this, it can be easily fabricated while its high resistance against fatigue and corrosion makes it strong and durable.
That being said, you can expect these sheets to be useful for commercial and industrial purposes. Not only this, but it also finds its use in making ornaments and jewelry that are significantly popular in modern fashion.
Uses of Copper Sheet Metals
The use of copper sheets is not only restricted to electrical wiring and other electronic parts. It’s now time to go through some of the uses of this conductive and pure type of sheet. Have a look at the points given below:
Can be used in making modern fashion jewelry and ornaments
Being highly conductive, it can be used in electronics and electrical parts
Widely used in architecture and structural engineering
Helps in interior designing and decorative art
Take a look at this recommended copper sheet metal available on Amazon:
Before knowing about brass sheets, it is important to know the basic composition of brass. So, for most of you who don’t know, brass is an alloy manufactured primarily using copper and zinc.
Like the previous two types of metals, brass is also highly corrosion-resistant with high durability and tensile strength. For this reason, you will notice that it is highly used for industrial purposes. In fact, despite being strong, you will be surprised to know that it is lightweight compared to other alloys. A pretty rare combination, right?
Furthermore, depending on the amount of copper and zinc used during the manufacturing process, five types of industrial-grade brass sheets can be obtained. So, let us take a quick run-through:
Red brass sheet
Naval brass sheet
330 brass sheet
Cartridge brass sheet
Free machining brass sheet
Uses of Brass Sheets
Thanks to its corrosion resistance and high tensile strength, brass sheets are highly used for commercial, industrial, and residential purposes. Here are some of the vital ways in which you can utilize brass sheets:
In case you need a lightweight, yet durable sheet for operation
For decorative purposes, including both indoor and outdoor decoration
Can be used in machines, which require sheets to be cut in different shapes and sizes
Take a look at a recommended brass sheet available on Amazon:
Coming to another type of sheet, this one is also made using a popular metal, namely aluminum. That being said, aluminum sheets are quite delicate and soft compared to the other types mentioned on the list.
For this reason, it is not classified as recognized industrial-grade sheet metal. In fact, manufacturers often have to add metals like iron, copper, and silicon to its composition in order to enhance strength.
Uses of Aluminum Sheets
Let’s talk about the uses of an aluminum sheet. We already mentioned that it is not recognized much for industrial applications. So, how is it used? Well, take a look:
Mostly used in the manufacture of fan blades, electronics, and household appliances
Help in making jewelry and ornaments
Used in household coverings and roofing
In parts used to service corrosive liquids like salt water
Take a look at this recommended aluminum sheet available on Amazon:
Being highly durable and robust with high tensile strength, corrugated metal sheets are widely used for residential and commercial purposes. From roofing to siding jobs, this sheet should ideally be your number one choice.
Coming to their manufacturing process, corrugated sheets are prepared through the cold-form process. What happens during this process? Well, firstly, the sheets are pressed flat and then taken for roll forming to achieve the required shape and pattern. After this, the sheets are cut into the appropriate length.
When you see a corrugated sheet, you may notice a wavy pattern. In fact, this is a characteristic feature of the sheet, which helps in its easy identification. That being said, there are also a few other patterns that you may come across.
Uses of Corrugated Sheets
Let’s now talk about the uses of corrugated metal sheets. Take a look at the points below:
Used for residential purposes where minimum maintenance is required
For resistance and protection against dents, buckles, and warp
Roofing for general protection against wind, rain, hail, etc.
Take a look at this recommended corrugated metal sheet available on Amazon:
Ideally, made using steel, galvanized steel sheets are equally important compared to other types mentioned on the list. That being said, depending on the process used for galvanization, there are two kinds of sheets, namely hot-dipped metallic coated and electro-galvanized sheets.
Need more details on both these types? Read on.
Hot Dipped Metallic Coated Sheet
Pre-treated through a hot-dipped process, these sheets are also referred to as cold-rolled hard steel plates. Furthermore, they are coated well with good-quality zinc for strength and durability. In fact, anti-fingerprint coatings are applied as well.
Electro-Galvanized Sheets
The base metal used in the preparation of this kind of sheet is cold-rolled annealed steel. But how is it made? As the name suggests, the base steel metal is electroplated with a pure and thick layer of zinc. However, instead of being dipped, the metal absorbs the zinc coating.
Coming to the cost, electro-galvanized sheets are more expensive compared to hot-dipped metallic coated sheets. Furthermore, they are mostly used in mechanical applications.
Uses of Galvanized Sheets
Another popular type of metal sheet with diverse applications. Given below are some of the uses of galvanized sheets, take a look:
Provides heat resistance and durability to metallic pipes
Helps in the manufacture of nuts, bolts, and nails
Used in constructing canopies, handrails, fences, ladders, furniture, and more
Used for insulation purposes
In making pipes for plumbing work
Take a look at this recommended galvanized sheet from Amazon:
Another type of steel sheet, is manufactured by deforming steel into sheets. So, how is it done? In this process, a metal alloy, in this case, steel, is placed between two rollers to produce a fibrous sheet.
After this is done, it is washed off using acidic materials before compiling it into the final roll. Last but not least, to ensure strength and better finishing, the sheet is treated with heat.
Uses of Cold Rolled Steel Sheets
Despite being a non-recognized industrial-grade metal sheet, its improved strength and finishing make it widely used for projects requiring precision. Let us now take a look at some of its uses:
Ideally used in the manufacture of metal furniture and home appliances
Construction of garages, industrial buildings, steel sheds
Commonly used in making school lockers and metal filing cabinets
Take a look at this recommended cold rolled steel sheet available on Amazon:
Other than the difference in temperature, the process involved in the manufacture of hot-rolled steel sheets is quite similar to its cold-rolled counterpart. That being said, in this case, steel is pressed down into a flat sheet between two rolls at a temperature of more than 1400 degrees Fahrenheit.
The high temperature helps in increasing the thickness of the sheets. For this reason, hot-rolled steel sheets have a thickness ranging between 1/6 to 5/6 inches, making it useful in tackling delicate functions.
Furthermore, unlike cold-rolled steel sheets, which offer a great finishing, hot-rolled sheets come with a lackluster finishing. Yes, the term is used to describe dull and boring, but truth be told, these sheets serve as one of the most interesting types, in terms of appearance.
Uses of Hot Rolled Steel Sheets
We now come to the use of hot roll steel sheets. Please take a look at the points mentioned below:
Its unique finishing makes it widely used in the creation of art sculptures
Formability and strength of the sheet help in the manufacture of agricultural equipment
Used in truck and automobile frames
Take a look at a recommended hot rolled steel sheet available on Amazon:
By now, you must have realized that steel plays a major role in the manufacturing of metal sheets. And yes! You guessed it right, yet again, we bring you another variation of steel sheets.
Mild steel sheet is the last type of metal sheet on our list, which can also be considered as a sub-type of cold-rolled steel sheets. The only point of difference between the two is that the steel alloy used in the preparation of mild steel sheets contains comparatively less carbon. That being said, it is neither too ductile nor brittle, and it is also easy to manufacture.
Uses of Mild Steel Sheet
Last but not least, we now come to the ways in which mild steel sheets can be used. Being highly versatile and cost-effective, these steel sheets fulfill its purpose in various applications. Let’s now look into the uses of this type of steel sheet:
In manufacturing automobile and machinery parts
Helps in welding work
Used in pipes for transporting water and natural gas
Construction of building steel frames
In making cookware, cutlery, etc.
Take a look at a recommended mild steel sheet available on Amazon:
The most common types of sheet metals include steel, aluminum, stainless steel, copper, and brass. Each type has its own unique properties and is suitable for different applications.
What are the advantages of using sheet metal?
Some advantages of using sheet metal include its high strength-to-weight ratio, durability, formability, and recyclability. It can be easily cut, bent, and shaped into various forms to meet specific design requirements.
What are the different thicknesses available for sheet metal?
Sheet metal thickness is measured in gauge, with a lower gauge indicating a thicker sheet. Common sheet metal thicknesses range from 30 gauge (0.012 inches) to 7 gauge (0.1875 inches) or even thicker, depending on the specific material and application.
How is sheet metal measured and cut?
Sheet metal can be measured using a gauge tool or a caliper to determine its thickness. It can be cut using various methods, including shearing, laser cutting, plasma cutting, or waterjet cutting, depending on the desired precision and material.
What are the common applications of sheet metal?
Sheet metal is widely used in various applications such as roofing, construction, automotive, HVAC (heating, ventilation, and air conditioning), aerospace, electronics, and manufacturing of appliances, furniture, and enclosures.
How can I protect sheet metal from rusting?
To protect sheet metal from rusting, it can be coated with a layer of protective finish such as paint, powder coating, or galvanizing. Stainless steel is naturally resistant to rust, while aluminum forms a thin oxide layer that protects it from corrosion.
Can sheet metal be recycled?
Yes, sheet metal is highly recyclable. It can be melted down and reused to produce new sheet metal or other metal products. Recycling sheet metal helps conserve resources and reduce waste.
How do I determine the right thickness and type of sheet metal for my project?
The thickness and type of sheet metal required for a project depend on factors such as the application, structural requirements, desired aesthetics, and budget. It is recommended to consult with a professional or refer to engineering guidelines to determine the appropriate sheet metal specifications for your specific project.
Conclusion
As you already know, sheet metals find their use in a variety of industrial, commercial, and residential applications, including construction and manufacturing. However, their functions depend on the composition and processing technology. In other words, it is critical to gain sufficient insight regarding the different kinds of sheets.
In fact, to help create a better understanding, we have also mentioned a recommended option for each type. You will notice that the most commonly used metal in the preparation of these sheets is steel because of its strength and durability. On the other hand, aluminum sheets are softer and more delicate compared to the rest.
On that note, we now come to the end of our informative guide on the 9 different types of sheet metals and their uses. And we hope this article was able to boost your knowledge on this topic.
A saw is a simple enough instrument, right? After all, you just have to move it hard enough, and it cuts through the material quickly.
If you’re one of the many people who think along the above lines, then think again. A saw is a very specialized piece of equipment any handyman (or woman) can have in their toolbox. Simple yet effective, saws are perfect cutting instruments that get the job done.
However, if you try to think about the total number of saws in the market, the results can be mind-boggling. Not only are there dozens of saw types, but each has a different name and use. What’s more, they can also be segregated based on the kind of power they use and the material they cut.
In today’s comprehensive guide, we’re going to list some of the different saw types, along with pictures. So, stick around with us till the end.
Different Types of Saws
Hand Saws
A hand saw, as the name suggests, is meant for use by the hand. Powered by pure muscle, hand saws come in various avatars such as Hacksaw, Bow saw, and Veneer saw. In this section, we’re going to explore some of the useful types of hand saws.
Backsaw
We begin our list with the Backsaw, which is characterized by its small size as compared to other saws, and narrower blade. A Backsaw is called so because it sports a reinforced back, which provides it with added strength while making cuts.
Backsaws are most frequently used with miter boxes and can provide consistent straight cuts. They are also useful when you need to cut corners at 45 or 90 degrees. Based on the region of use, a Backsaw is also called a Tenon saw, or a Miter saw.
Bow Saw
A Bow saw is also known as Swede saw, Finn saw, or Bucksaw. Called so because of its peculiar bow shape, a Bowsaw is perfect for making straight as well as curved cuts. The saw has a long blade, and the teeth are crosscut to remove materials from the path of cutting.
When it comes to usage, Bow saws are better used outdoors than indoors. Outside of your home, a Bow saw can come in handy for a lot of things such as trimming and cutting trees, shaping logs, and making otherwise rough cuts.
Coping Saw
One can easily recognize a Coping saw from its characteristic D-shaped frame and the thin yet durable blade. A simple enough arrangement, the device is extremely useful for cutting metal as well as wood.
One of the most exciting features of a Coping saw is the removable blade fixture. This can be used to change the type of blade as and when required. If you’re looking for a saw to use in work such as scrolling or molding, or any job that requires precise and fine cuts, then a Coping saw might be just right for you.
Crosscut Saw
Perfect for indoor as well as outdoor use, a Crosscut saw can be easily recognized by its thicker blade and large, crosscut cutting teeth. Available in both large as well as small sizes, a Crosscut saw is just right for making rough woodcuts.
Whether you’re using a two-handle Crosscut saw for felling trees or want a device that’s fit for splitting wood, this is the best type of saw that you can get. Remember, however, that this is a device for making rough cuts, so don’t expect a pearly finish.
Fret Saw
Similar to a Coping saw in design, a Fret saw is distinguished by a larger frame that’s attached to a thinner, more delicate blade. The Fret saw can be used for making tighter cuts and more delicate curves than the Coping saw.
Although this saw can be used to make intricate cuts in wood, it must be remembered that the Fret saw blade cannot be rotated. This means you’ll have to adopt awkward cutting positions during the operation. Also, the blade of this saw type is pretty fragile, and incorrect handling can easily break it from the middle. So it’s best to take care.
Hacksaw
Hacksaws are versatile saws and can be used to cut metal, wood, and plastic with equal ease. They are lightweight and hence can be easily carried around in any toolbox.
The hacksaw sports a C-shaped frame together with a fine blade that’s held by the framework. Hacksaw blades usually have up to 32 teeth per inch and are particularly suited for fine and straight cuts. However, as the Fret saw, the Hacksaw blade can also break unless operated carefully, so extra precaution is needed to maintain the right cutting angle.
Japanese Saw
Japanese saws are used for traditional Japanese woodwork and are available in three types: kataba, dozuki, and ryoba. These types of saws usually have a strong blade together with a single handle.
Japanese saws have a significant advantage over Western saws in that due to their thin and precise construction, they can easily reach positions that aren’t possible for other saws. Plus, they leave lean, accurate cuts that get the job done correctly.
Japanese saws have a combination of crosscut and rip-type teeth that allow users to cut through softwood easily. However, this type of saw can’t be used to cut hardwood, which limits its usability to no small degree.
Keyhole Saw
A Keyhole saw is a simple arrangement that consists of a roundish handle attached to a single, pointed blade. This type of saw is also known by other names such as Jab saw and Alligator saw.
The purpose of a Keyhole saw is to cut circular patterns and make curved cuts. This type of saw is very lightweight and can be easily carried in any toolbox. These saws come in the following types: retractable blade and fixed blade and can be used for making delicate cuts in walls.
A Pruning saw is used precisely for what it sounds like pruning and making cuts in both directions. This saw typically has blades that are anywhere between 13 to 15 inches long, and are attached to a curved handle that resembles a “pistol grip.”
The blade of a pruning saw is curved, and the coarse teeth are designed to cut when moved in either direction. This allows the saw to cut through the target material faster. Perfect for home jobs, Pruning saws can also be used for topiary and landscaping services.
Rip-cut Saw
Also known as a hand saw, this is the most common type of saw used for cutting wood. Carpenters mainly use these saws for all kinds of framing and wood removal tasks.
Usually, Rip-cut saws have a lesser number of teeth per inch as compared to other saws. These are filed to sharp points for removing wood easily. They seem very similar to the Crosscut saws, but there’s a significant difference between the two, as experts know.
For example, Crosscut saws cut perpendicular to the wood grain, while Rip-cut saws cut parallel to the grain. Also, in a Rip-cut saw the teeth are angled at eight degrees, while for Crosscut saws, the angular inclination is about fifteen degrees. Plus, Rip-cut saws give you a more delicate cut as compared to the Crosscut variant.
Veneer Saw
Specially crafted with a short, double-edged blade, the Veneer saw is a must-have for veneering tasks. Each blade edge has about 13 teeth per inch, and the saw has a roundish handle that makes operating it a cinch.
When working with veneered surfaces, it’s essential to use a Veneer saw to achieve the desired results. Ordinary saws can’t cut through wooden veneers easily, which is where the utility of the Veneer saw comes in.
Wallboard Saw
Often power tools need a starting hole in a wooden panel, and for this purpose, the Wallboard saw is a perfect choice. It’s constructed similarly to the Keyhole saw but has a blade that’s shorter and wider.
Another defining characteristic of Wallboard saws is that they have fewer teeth per inch when compared to the Keyhole saw. This saw is double-edged by design but maybe single-edged as well.
This is a rather ingenious contraption that’s used for cutting and pruning tall trees. The saw has a pruning blade that’s six to eight inches long and is attached to a telescopic pole extending to about sixteen feet.
Pole saws are primarily used for cutting tree branches and pruning excess growth at extended heights. Although traditionally hand-powered, modern versions of these saws do have motorized attachments that make the operation easier.
Wire Saw
Wire saws are continuous cutting instruments that make use of metallic cables for cutting through hard materials. Although some Wire saws used in factory settings are motorized, they are usually operated by hand for cutting in and around construction sites and quarries.
A wire saw consists of a pair of rings (metallic typically) attached to a hard wire that has serrations that enable the cutting of materials. This type of saw is usually used by a pair of operators working together to make a cut.
Camping Saw
The final entrant in the Hand saw category is the Camping saw, also known as a Backpacking saw. As the name suggests, this type of saw is best suited for camping trips and can be easily packed with your luggage.
Similar to a curved knife, the saw has sharp cutting teeth that can be used to prune away branches or chop firewood with equal ease. What’s more, many models of the saw are foldable, which makes them extra portable.
With that, we come to the end of our list of hand-held saws. But don’t think we’re done yet; in the next section, we’re going to introduce you to some more saw types that you’ll find irresistible.
Power Saws
As opposed to a hand-held saw, a power saw is an electrically operated motorized device that makes the task of cutting easy. Power saws aren’t exactly hand-saws attached to a motor, but rather have separate characteristics of their own. The following are some of them explained.
Stationary Bandsaw
A stationary bandsaw consists of a large standing table, which has a pulley mechanism attached to it. This arrangement is used to move a motorized band that has cutting teeth embedded in it.
It’s this toothed band that performs the cutting operation in a bandsaw. These types of saws can easily cut metal, wood as well as plastic, but they’re limited by the depth to which they can cut. Also, cutting with bandsaws is an intricate operation that requires careful handling.
Portable Bandsaw
If you’re a moving workman who wants to achieve all the capabilities of a stationary bandsaw, then we suggest you go with a portable one. Yes! Portable bandsaws have all the benefits of their stationary counterparts.
The only difference between the two lies its portability and limited cutting depth. A portable bandsaw has the edge over a stationary one in terms of ease of use and flexibility. Hence most professionals prefer to have one in their toolbox.
Chainsaw
Perhaps the most famous saw of the lot, a Chainsaw is a powerful instrument driven by a strong engine. It has a toothed chain that rotates along with a linked frame and is rotated by the motor.
Chainsaws are mostly used for felling large trees or cutting through hardwood. They are very loud devices and have immense power based on the make and model. However, special expertise is needed to handle a chainsaw. In the hands of a novice, this device can easily become a hazardous contraption.
Chop Saw
This is the portable version of the circular saw that’s a staple in most workshops. A rather large device, the Chop saw is compact enough to be carried from job site to job site. This type of saw can cut metal as well as stone.
The Chop saw blade is of the toothless variety and has special abrasives that work to cut materials. One aspect of Chop saws that must be remembered is that these devices can get very hot and dusty. That’s why many arrangements use a special water cooling system to reduce this problem.
Circular Saw
After the Chop saw, we bring you the circular saw, which is yet another versatile device. Circular saws usually have detachable circular blades that are toothed. These saws are capable of cutting anything from metals to plastics to stones.
Circular saws can go up to 9 inches in diameter and have multiple blade types that are each suitable for unique purposes. This type of saw can be subdivided into two types: the Sidewinder and the Worm drive.
A Circular saw is perfect for making cross as well as rip cuts. The blade height is adjustable and by altering this, you can get different depths of cut. Overall, it can be said that a circular saw will seldom let you down.
Compound Miter Saw
A Compound Miter saw can assist you in making straight, Miter, as well as compound cuts. This saw is characterized by a circular blade mounted on an adjustable arm that enables complicated cuts.
While a Compound Miter saw can assist you in multiple jobs, it’s best suited for adding crown moldings or for window trimming purposes. It can also be used for simplifying complicated scrollwork.
Flooring Saw
Floor cutting is a serious business, and as its name suggests, a Flooring saw is meant to assist you in resawing floors. No matter what kind of flooring you’re using, a Flooring saw is well-suited for the job.
Experts are of the opinion that with the flooring saw, you can essentially perform all the activities of a table or Miter saw. It’s a complete tool that’s guaranteed to fulfill all your floor-cutting needs. The most significant factor in favor of the device is its portability, which means you can take it where the work takes you.
Jigsaw
No matter what the name suggests, a Jigsaw is undoubtedly not a toy. In fact, it’s one of the most powerful power saws on the list. A Jigsaw can be easily identified by its characteristic design and curved housing that holds the blade.
The Jigsaw blade is of the reciprocating type and can be used for cutting metal as well as wood. It’s best used with sheet metal, though, and can be used to attain custom shapes in the sheets.
The Jigsaw blade is distinguished by its finely toothed edge, which helps to achieve curves and non-linear cuts easily. Jigsaw blades can move at variable speeds, and shouldn’t be used with much force, as this can cause the blade to break.
Miter Saw
The specialty of a Miter saw lies in the fact that it provides you with accurately measured cuts. The Miter Saw has been expressly designed to fulfill the functions of a hand saw and can be used for trimming and angular cuts.
Perfect for Miter cuts and woodworking perpendicular to the grain direction, a Miter saw is also suited for frame cutting. However, everything depends on the choice of blade, which needs to be selected based on the type of work to be done.
Radial Arm Saw
A Radial Arm saw comes attached to an extended arm protruding from a table, which acts as a base for the work material. The cutting table can be used to hold the workpiece in place while the saw performs the cutting operation.
Using a Radial Arm saw, you can easily make Miter cuts; compound cuts are also possible to achieve with this saw. Radial Arm saws also have interchangeable blades and can operate at extremely high speeds. Some of them can also be used with circular saws.
Reciprocating Saw
If you’re looking for a saw that’s perfect for demolition work, then the Reciprocating saw can be your best companion. Somewhat similar in operation to a Jigsaw, a Reciprocating saw blade performs faster back-and-forth motions that allow easy cutting.
When going for a device that cuts wood and metal equally well, look to the Reciprocating saw. What’s more, this saw can also be used to shape and cut plastics, which makes it a complete cutting tool.
Rotary Saw
As its name suggests, Rotary saws are cut using a rotational motion. The blade is fixed with the handle, and the device can be cordless or with a power cord.
Rotary saws operate at variable speeds, which makes them great for cutting through walls and wooden panels. Versatile in design as well as operation, this is indeed a very oft-used tool by professionals and amateurs alike.
Scroll Saw
A Scroll saw is a power saw that’s used for making precise and curved cuts. Similar to a sewing machine in design, Scroll saws can have reciprocating or continuous blades. What’s more, it can even operate with a saw band.
One of the most significant advantages of a Scroll saw is that it comes attached to a table. This allows the workpiece to be laid quickly and enables the cutter to achieve precise detailing. Scroll saws are particularly adept at precision cuts that incorporate curvatures.
Table Saw
Needless to say, a Table saw comes with a table, and this makes the laying of the workpiece a much easier task. The saw motor is located beneath the table, and the blade embedded in the table bed can be adjusted for the depth of the cut required.
Table saws have removable blades, but these need to be compatible with the saw motor. Using a Table saw requires extreme concentration as accidents can easily happen otherwise. However, modern Table saws have advanced safety features that prevent this from happening.
Masonry Saw
This saw type is primarily used for construction purposes and is designed to operate with pushing strokes. The saw comes with a pistol grip handle and a circular, removable blade that has large serrations.
In this type of saw, the gap between the teeth is slightly larger than regular hand saws. This makes a Masonry saw perfect for cutting concrete and stone blocks. However, these saws usually generate a lot of dust and debris; hence they are typically fitted with gullets that can carry this waste.
Oscillating Saw
An Oscillating saw is ideal for a large variety of purposes. Whether you’re looking for cutting, sanding, or grinding, this saw can get the job done. Clean and fast in operation, Oscillating saws make for clean cuts and don’t produce much dust.
The oscillating saw has an elongated housing that serves both the handle and the motor seat. The saw blade is short and helps cut in constrained spaces. What’s more, since the blade of this type of saw vibrates in variable arcs and speeds, they can be used to make better, more angular cuts.
Track Saw
If effortless sawing is what you’re looking for, then the Track saw is the best bet for you. A combination of circular and table saws, this is a device that makes cutting and sawing a smooth task.
The saw comes attached to a guide rail, which sticks to the surface of the workpiece/material to be cut. This ensures that the saw doesn’t glide or move away from the expected cut line. Now, all that’s needed to be done is to fix the saw on the rails and cut away. The only drawback of this saw is that it can cut only along straight lines.
Tile Saw
The final item on our list is the tile saw, which is used to cut through tiles of different shapes and sizes. The design of a Tile saw is similar to the Miter saw, and it can be used to cut glass as well as ceramics with equal ease.
A Tile saw blade is usually coated with diamond, which makes it one of the hardest and most durable saw blades available. However, this saw generates a large amount of heat and dust, which is why it uses a water reservoir to cool the system and reduce dust formation.
Different Types Of Saws Verdict
Now, this has been a long list, and we hope you’ve enjoyed every bit of it. For any professional or DIY enthusiast, the above list can act as a comprehensive resource on all things saw.
After going through the above list, you can easily decide on the kind of saw that you need to complete any project. Whether you’re looking to complete a professional contract, or merely searching for a device for small household tasks, this list has something for you all.
And yes, if you feel we’ve left out any saw type that should’ve been included in the list, do let us know. We’ll be glad to include it in the next iteration of the list.
An epitome of grace, elegance, and beauty - that's the true definition of a flower!
That being said, did you know that there are over 400,000 flowering plant species in the world? Each varies in terms of color, shape, petal arrangement, and more. So, you can well imagine the diverse range of pink and fuchsia flowers.
Now, as a gardening enthusiast, you might be familiar with a few, but definitely not all of them. That's why we've come forth with this guide, providing brief introductions to the 30 types of pink and fuchsia flowers that you may grow in your garden.
For clarity, we've divided the article into two sections, each focused on the different flower variants under their individual categories.
So, without further ado, let's get going!
Types Of Pink Flowers
In this section, we'll be diving into the ultimate list of the most popular types of pink flowers. And with pink falling under a vast color spectrum, we'll be covering flowers in various shades, including light pink, hot pink, and every shade in between.
Pink Rose
You obviously don't need to be a gardener or anthophile to come across a pink rose. It's probably the most common and popular flower on this list that’s seen in most gardens and backyards from mid-spring to fall.
In general, roses are a symbol of love and beauty, making them a top pick in anniversaries and other such occasions. But to be more precise, a pink rose is a representation of admiration and appreciation.
Tulip
Next up, we have another popular pink flower that represents nurturing and true love. Tulips can be perennial or annual, depending on the climate. Consequently, they bloom from late-march to mid-May in well-drained soil and full sunlight, just in time for celebrations like Easter and Mother's Day.
Petunia
Originating from South America, Petunias come in a wide range of colors, pink being the most common. Along with this, it comes with pretty patterns caused by contrasting white veins, which in turn, make the flower as beautiful and elegant as ever.
Petunia grows well in planters with fast-draining soil under full sunlight. As such, they bloom from summer to mid-fall in hardiness zone 9-11.
Carnations
Carnations are perennials that grow well in late spring through summer in fertilized and well-drained soil with a 6.7 pH level. Now, these flowers are naturally pink or pinkish-purple in color.
However, with genetic engineering and selective breeding, Carnations can also occur in different colors such as white, red, orange, and blue. Furthermore, these playful flowers are easy to maintain as they require watering only once or twice weekly.
Dahlia
An interesting fact about Dahlia is that it originates from Mexico, and comes in 42 different species, each known for its gorgeous petal arrangement. Having said that, it is an annual flower that blooms from late spring to early fall in well-drained and rich soil. All it requires is moderate watering and sunlight to illuminate grace and kindness.
Calla Lily
For those who don't know, Calla Lily isn't a lily, despite having its name. In fact, it is a perennial flower that blooms in late spring through summer in loose and well-drained soil with a pH level of 6.0 to 6.5.
You can easily grow it in a pot in your shaded patio since it is well suited for both sunlight and partial shade. However, unlike Dahlias and Carnations, Calla Lily needs to be watered regularly once it's planted because its water needs are significantly high.
Begonia
Begonias usually come in 1,800 unique species under three primary categories - perennial, tuberous, and semperflorens. And depending on the variety, these flowers grow well in full sunlight or even partial shade.
However, it blooms in moist soil with a pH level of 5.5 to 6.2. For this reason, you'll need to water it regularly, especially when potted indoors.
Hydrangea
Hydrangeas are easy to recognize as they resemble mini bouquets that bloom from green and leafy bushes. That said, you'll be amazed to know there are over 70 types of hydrangeas that typically require moderate to high watering in order to grow.
You can plant the shrubs in soil containing sand or peat moss under full sunlight or partial shade. In other words, it is the perfect household plant that blooms in mid-spring through summer.
Butterfly Bush
Well, you guessed it right! This flower bloom gets its name from its ability to attract butterflies like a magnet.
It is a perennial or shrub-type flower plant that quickly grows into medium to large bushes covered with small and pretty pink flowers. In fact, the Butterfly Bush is relatively easy to maintain since you'll only have to water it once a week. Now, it's undoubtedly stunning in pink, but most commonly it comes in shades of lavender and purple.
Azalea
Azalea is a shrub-type flower that usually blooms under the shade of trees during spring and summer. However, you may, at times, also see it growing as early as February. Furthermore, the shrub need not be watered frequently, but make sure it's watered well when required.
Hyacinth
With its origin based in the Mediterranean regions, Hyacinths are perennials that bloom in well-drained soil and sunlight during spring. They usually require moderate watering. However, you'll need to plant the Hyacinth bulbs way in advance (in the fall) in order to achieve a full spring bloom.
Stargazer - Oriental Lily
Stargazer Lilies are not only elegant and beautiful, but they also emit a sweet scent from their long stamen. Apart from this, they come with vibrant pink petals, featuring visible markings and spots. As such, Stargazers are often found in bouquets and flower arrangements.
That being said, it is crucial to remember that these flowers can be poisonous to cats and infants. So, you need to be cautious, especially if you have your kid or pet running around the house.
Zinnia
Zinnias are clustered, pink flowers most commonly found in dry, humid, and hot regions. This is because they usually bloom during summer in sandy soil and full sunlight. Plus, these annual flowers need to be watered rarely.
What's more? There are different variants of Zinnia, depending on its petal arrangement. As such, it can have single, double, or semi-double rows of petals.
Ranunculus
Ranunculus is a large genus of around 500 species of flowering plants that bloom into hot pink flowers. And all the members of the genus are referred to as buttercups, water crowfoots, and spearworts.
Oriental Poppy
This perennial flower plant gathers energy throughout the year to bloom in mid-summer. Along with its hairy and finely dissected leaves during spring, the light-pink flower is identified by its crepe paper-like petals.
Types Of Fuchsia Flowers
In this section, we'll introduce you to the different types of fuchsia flowers, including both the trailing and upright variants. Furthermore, the list includes a diverse group of fuchsias in shades of red, pink, white, and purple. So, without wasting any more time, let's dive in.
Hardy Fuchsia
This is a mid-sized shrub that blooms in summer until the first winter frost. It produces small yet elegant petals that sparkle in the sunlight, almost resembling gold. Perfect for coastal and cottage gardens, Hardy Fuchsias thrive in the hardiness zones (7-10).
As such, they can grow anywhere between 2-3 feet, even in soil, containing sand or a good deal of clay. What's more? Well, you'll definitely love its foliage as much as the flower.
Dollar Princess
As a gardener, you'll love the exotic "Dollar Princess" Fuchsia since it grows well in both sun and shade. That's not all. The shrub teamed with wooden branches, darker leaves, short, purple tubes, and red petals can survive through the winter when potted indoors. Thus, with a hardiness zone of 2-11, it blooms throughout the year, irrespective of the climate.
Army Nurse
Another garden classic similar to the "Dollar Princess," the "Army Nurse," fuchsia can also grow well in any soil in sunlight or partial shade. The only point of difference between the two species is that the latter is a bit bigger and bluer with glossier leaves. That being said, the flower is well-suited to growing in containers and mixed herbaceous borders.
Alice Hoffman
The "Alice Hoffman" Fuchsia is a small, upright shrub, featuring bronze-tinged foliage and semi-double flowers. It blooms from summer into autumn with pink sepals and white-pink petals. However, the color of the overall flower may differ from season to season, where it remains white in summer and pink in autumn.
On that note, you can grow this Fuschia flower in a mixed herbaceous border or pot it in a shaded or partly-shaded patio.
Lady Boothby
Deciduous or evergreen shrubs, which are rarely perennials, the "Lady Boothby" Fuchsia features a tubular calyx with four erect petals and four spreading sepals. In fact, it is a bicolored flower that comes in a combination of carmine-pink and aubergine.
Moving on to its origin, the strikingly stunning fuchsia was bred from a Brazilian species in 1939. Another interesting fact? It was named after the founder of the British Fuchsia Society.
Phyllis
Phylis is a type of hardy and upright fuchsia, bearing single and semi-double flowers. That being said, the stunning contrast between the beautiful rose-red sepals and deeper red petals is a treat to the eyes.
Gardeners usually plant it in a sheltered spot during winter away from the cold, harsh winds. And during autumn, it requires a thick layer of mulch, which in turn, retains soil moisture and enhances fertility.
Paniculata
Paniculata is a moderately rare fuchsia that grows well in hard zones 9-11 and produces an edible fruit after blooming. Pretty impressive, right? Well, there's more!
The attractive, tubular pink and white flower grows well in any area, be it in sandy soils or the heavy clay soils of the coastal areas. And after its flowering season, it grows back again after a year, thanks to pollination brought about by insects.
Rapunzel
The "Rapunzel" Fuchsia is as fascinating as its name! Being a trailing and non-hardy fuchsia flower, it trails up to 60cm with white or pale-pink sepals and purple petals. As such, it looks as beautiful as a fairytale when grown in pots, hanging baskets, and window boxes.
Fulgens
Gardeners and anthophiles may know this flower-type as the "brilliant fuchsia." Why the name? Well, this is because of its exquisite hanging red or pink blooms. Other than this, it grows beautifully about 4-5 feet tall in hardiness zones 10-11 for most of the year. What else? Like the Paniculata, it produces edible fruits by the end of its flowering season.
President Barrie Nash
The upright, bushy fuchsia comes with dark green leaves and gorgeous single flowers. Having said that, you'll love its elegant and attractive color combination of pale-pink and lavender. In fact, the perfect blend of colorful, tubular, narrow, and long sepals and darker petals make "President Barrie Nash" a popular choice among garden enthusiasts.
Fuchsia Genii
Coming to yet another hard fuchsia, the Fuchsia Genii grows well in hard zones 7-10, and in various soil-types, including chalk, loam, sand, and clay. The erect, deciduous compact shrub blooms single flowers with narrow pink sepals and purple-red petals during summer and autumn.
Along with this, it comes with yellow-green foliage that resembles gold in the sunlight. So, you can well imagine how its magnificent beauty makes it stand out in the garden.
Champagne Celebration
An upright and bushy shrub bears the hardy "Champagne Celebration" Fuchsia flower. It blooms single flowers with flared carmine-pink or purple petals. On the other hand, the sepals come in shades of pink with salmon edges. That being said, you'll love how the pale-pink at the base blends with a deeper pink at the pointed tip - a stand-out feature of this fuchsia-type.
Blands New Stripe
A unique name for a rare and unusual flower - the Fuchsia "Blands New Stripe" is a mid-sized deciduous fuchsia shrub with a bushy and weeping habit.
Bearing single flowers in the summer with striped pink and violet petals and red sepals, the stunning ornamental flower is undoubtedly one-of-a-kind. That's not all. Along with its exotic appearance, you'll definitely appreciate its contrasting darker green foliage.
Aurea
Aurea will grow exceptionally well in all soil conditions, be it clay or sand, as long as the soil remains moist. On that note, it does well in hard zones 6-10, irrespective of the climate. To our delight, this fuchsia flower can be potted or planted in a flower bed under full sunlight or in a patio under partial sunlight or even full shade.
Furthermore, the golden foliage of the Aurea is just as beautiful as its red bloom that hangs gently. And when paired with contrasting flowers such as snapdragons, it looks even better.
Seventh Heaven Fuchsia
This fuchsia shrub produces double-blossomed flowers, which resemble a pair of angel wings. Thus, the name "Seventh Heaven." Coming to its color, these fuchsia flowers are typically white with a pink under-blossom, proving to be an epitome of elegance. As such, it also attracts butterflies and hummingbirds with its beautiful appearance.
Final Words
Pink flowers most commonly represent love, care, and endearment. On the other hand, fuchsias are ornamental flowers with an exotic appearance. However, both these flower types find their way to bouquets and other arrangements.
That being said, it's crucial to maintain them, keeping their water and soil requirements in mind. On that note, we now come to the end of our comprehensive guide.
With this, we'll take your leave. Until next time, happy gardening!
Is it too often that you find any food item suggested by fitness trainers being included in a party menu? Surely not!
Well, nuts are one of those healthy few, rendering a crunch and flavor that’s key to some of our favorite chicken, pasta, and cookie recipes.
Most of the nuts have the perfect blend of nutrients, allowing you to gain the extra calories needed without having to add flab to the body. There is a multitude of health benefits, depending on the nut that you include in your diet.
In this article, we talk about the 20 different types of nuts, their nutritional benefits as well their use in different food items. You will surely be amazed at how healthy a food choice they can be!
So, read on to know more.
20 Types of Nuts + Benefits & Nutritional Information
Pistachios
This nut is widely grown in western states of the USA and has its origins in parts of Western Asia and the Middle East. Pistachios require desert-like sand to grow and thrive.
Although you can have these in the raw form just after rinsing, many prefer roasting Pistachios for consumption as the taste is enhanced. The nut has higher fiber compared to other varieties and helps improve cholesterol levels. It is significantly helpful in increasing levels of the “good” HDL cholesterol.
Other factors determining the risk of heart diseases such as blood pressure, oxidative status, and weight can also be improved by consuming pistachios. Oxidative status indicates the blood levels of oxidized chemicals that can contribute to heart diseases.
California pistachios are the dominant variety in the domestic market, but it’s great if you can get hold of the Turkish and Persian varieties. The latter has a darker shell and skin and is much more flavorful. Pistachios can be used in famous delicacies such as kulfi, spumoni, pistachio ice cream, and baklava.
Walnuts
A favorite ingredient of all the bakers out there, this is one of the few nuts available through all seasons. Walnuts are grown in many countries across the world, including Iran, the USA, Turkey, China, and Mexico.
The stone fruits growing on large trees can be shelled and eaten in raw, roasted, as well as seasoned forms. Before consumption, you just need to make sure they are thoroughly washed and dried.
Walnuts contain high amounts of antioxidants and alpha-linolenic acid (ALA), an omega-3 fatty acid. The high ALA content helps to reduce the risk of heart ailments and also reduces LDL or bad cholesterol levels. They also maintain proper blood flow through the circulatory system.
Interestingly, a study conducted on college students has found that walnuts have beneficial effects on the brain by improving the power of perception.
Besides being a popular garnish for sweet dishes, walnuts are also used to make desserts such as brownies and khoresht, a traditional Iranian delicacy.
Almonds
While a majority of these nuts are grown in California, they are also found in Spain and Italy. Almonds can be consumed fresh from the tree, but drying them out for at least two weeks ensures they have the maximum flavor. Unlike some other nuts, they are sold in whole, slivered as well as sliced forms.
As for the nutritional value of almonds, they are rich in monounsaturated fats, vitamins, proteins, and minerals. Maintaining an almond-rich diet has been found to reduce levels of harmful cholesterol in the body, which is integral to heart health.
Added to this, almonds also aid weight loss and lower the blood pressure of those suffering from obesity. They have also been found to reduce inflammation in type-2 diabetes patients.
The mildly sweet flavor of almonds is loved by many, which is why they are used in several dishes such as almond-crusted chicken, salads, and cereal meals. This flavor is magnified to prepare several by-products such as almond extracts, marzipan, and almond paste.
Cashews
Having an almost neutral flavor, the popular South American nuts add shape, crunch, and texture to any recipe. They made their way to Indian and Thai cuisines several centuries ago through Portuguese explorers.
At present, Cashews are grown in a number of wet and dry tropical regions, including Vietnam, Africa, and Southeast Asia. To be made fit for consumption, the outermost shell of cashews must be removed. The shell contains a caustic liquid which may cause severe skin burns.
Cashews have a lot of uses due to their immense value as an antioxidant. Hence, when added to any diet, they increase its antioxidant potential. They are also highly rich in magnesium, which helps in improving joint flexibility. For people suffering from metabolic syndrome, cashews improve blood pressure.
Besides, cashews constitute an extremely important ingredient in savored delicacies from around the world. They are used in dishes such as cashew chicken and stir-fry, chicken salad, and chocolatey desserts. Cashew milk is also a quite popular nutritious alternative to dairy.
Hazelnuts
The round-shaped nut is a primary ingredient of the commercially available Nutella, a universal favorite. Their pairing with chocolates in this world-famous spread gives a taste that is no less than heavenly!
Hazelnuts are commonly grown in several regions of North America, Europe, and Asia. They need to be dried out within 24 hours after picking and should be shelled before consumption.
The nuts can be eaten in raw form, but roasting helps to enhance their flavor and also increases their crunchiness. This way, they can also lend a great texture when used in salads and soups. Besides this, hazelnuts are also commonly used for flavoring coffee.
Although nuts have a lesser protein content, other essential nutrients make them extremely beneficial for health. Some of these include vitamins, monounsaturated oil, and minerals. Similar to other types of nuts, they also help in alleviating risk factors of heart diseases.
Brazil Nuts
As the name suggests, this giant nut is native to Brazil and can be spotted throughout the rainforests of the Amazon. The nut can either be eaten in raw or blanched form. But it has an extremely hard shell that must be cracked before consumption.
Importantly, these nuts are storehouses of vitamins, including calcium, iron, niacin, and the antioxidants vitamin E and selenium. Small quantities of these antioxidants are essential in an ideal diet. You can fulfill this requirement easily by consuming around 28 grams of these nuts daily.
Besides these benefits, brazil nuts also help to reduce the level of cholesterol in the body and improve the functioning of blood vessels. The nuts even assist in reducing inflammation in both healthy people and those who are undergoing hemodialysis.
You can add this nut to a variety of dishes such as macaroons, cookies, and salads. Brazilians add this nut to lend a different flavor to their milk and cheese.
Pecans
Native to the continent of North America, pecans have a characteristic sweet flavor that makes them an ideal ingredient for cakes. They are a tree-fruit and are frequently found in orchards and groves throughout the USA.
The nuts must be dried for a minimum of two weeks within their shells to get the right taste and flavor. Although many people also prefer to consume the nuts after shelling and roasting. Even for adding them as an ingredient other than while baking, it is best to use the roasted form.
Containing as many as 43 different nutrients, pecans are a quite healthy option to include in your diet. Studies have shown they can lower the “bad” LDL cholesterol in people who have normal cholesterol levels. Moreover, regular consumption of pecans also improves the antioxidant profiles in the blood.
A hugely popular dish made using pecans is a pecan pie. The nuts are also used in other delicacies like candied pecans, chicken salad, and chocolate turtle candies.
Macadamia Nuts
Mainly grown in Australia and Hawaii, these large nuts are quite a palpable option to include in the diet. Currently, they can also be found in several regions of the continents of Latin America, Asia, and Africa.
The nearly buttery flavor gives a unique taste to macadamia nuts. They grow in large and bushy trees that might take as long as 5 years to start bearing fruits. Ideally, they should be shelled within 24 hours after picking.
Macadamia nuts have a wide variety of nutrients in them. Primarily, they are an excellent source of monounsaturated fat, vitamin A, iron and protein. A diet rich in these nuts has been shown to produce effects similar to a heart-healthy diet advised by the American Heart Association.
Macadamia nut cookies are a favorite among people with a sweet tooth. The nuts are also used to prepare other palpable desserts such as muffins, granola, and fudge. Moreover, when chopped up, these nuts go really well with fish as well as chicken.
Peanuts
Technically, peanuts are legumes like beans and peas, but they are considered to be nuts due to their culinary usage. They are quite affordable and have a year-round availability, making them popular among people worldwide.
Many of you may not know that peanut grows under the soil, though the plant flowers are above the ground. They should be shelled during harvesting and are fit for consumption after thorough rinsing and drying in the sun. Although, some people also prefer roasting peanuts to maximize the earthy flavor that they possess.
Interestingly, peanuts are a rich source of plant-based protein, making them an ideal component of a weight loss diet. The protein content also alleviates the risk of heart disease. Moreover, the consumption of peanuts by mothers during pregnancy has been found to lower rates of asthma and allergic diseases in children.
The “nuts” are most popularly used to make peanut butter, a favorite of people from across the world. Apart from this, they are used in their whole form in baked products, granola, and trail mix.
Pine Nuts
Produced in several regions of Europe, North America and Korea, the small beige-colored nuts grow in multiple species of pine trees. The taste and shape of the nuts might vary a little depending upon the species of pine. For example, the Italian pine nuts are more slender than their Chinese counterpart.
For consumption, pine nuts are normally dried out and then roasted. Although, many of you may also like them as a snack in the raw form for the characteristic buttery taste.
Pine nuts are rich in the trace mineral manganese, which helps in carbohydrate metabolism and maintains the proper blood sugar level. Studies have shown that fatty acids present in the nuts also help to boost satiety hormones.
The nuts can be added as an accent to several fish and meat recipes, salads, and baked bread varieties. The mild flavor of pines along with a soft chewy texture is loved by many when incorporated into any dish.
Chestnuts
Growing on trees or shrubs, chestnuts are found mainly in China, South Korea, Greece, the United States, and South America.
These nuts can be eaten raw just after peeling them, but are rather bland in this form. It is best to consume them after storage in the refrigerator for a few days, as the starch changes to sugar.
Importantly, chestnuts are rich in carbohydrates, as opposed to other types that contain oils. They also contain amides and a number of vitamins such as folic acid and Vitamin B that help in fighting anemia.
The nuts have also been found to help in digestion. Apart from this, minerals such as magnesium and potassium help in reducing risk of cardiovascular diseases as well.
Chestnuts also attain an appealing taste when they are candied, steamed, deep-fried, or grilled. They are used in desserts such as pies and cakes, but can even act as a thickener for any soup or sauce.
Cedar Nuts
Obtained from the cedar pine trees of Siberia and East Russia, these crunchy nuts are a variety of pine nuts. Cedar nuts can be eaten in the raw as well as roasted form. Being a rare variety, many people are aware that the tasty seeds of the cedar cone have great health benefits.
These nuts are known for their ability to facilitate weight management. Studies have shown that cedar nuts are effective in suppressing a person’s appetite. Pinolenic acid present in these nuts stimulates a hormone that sends signals to the brain that the stomach is full.
Apart from this, cedar nuts are rich in beta-carotene, which helps to maintain eye health. Lutein present in the nuts also prevents the eyesight from deteriorating with age. Antioxidants in them destroy free radicals that encourage the development of terminal diseases such as cancer.
These nuts are generally eaten in plain form but can be added to savory beef recipes and salads to enhance the taste and flavor.
Coconut
This might be hard to believe, but coconut is indeed classified as a nut as well as a fruit! The tropical nuts with a fat hard shells are produced by palm trees. These trees grow in several tropical regions around the world, including South and Central America, the Caribbean, and India.
These nuts can be eaten in their raw form after shelling or can also be added as an ingredient to several dishes. The bare white portion inside each coconut, called the kernel, has the perfect balance of sweetness and texture.
This incredible taste along with a number of health benefits makes coconuts a universal favorite. The minerals present in coconuts help in maintaining bone health and nutrient metabolism. Also, the high fiber content and low carbs in coconut help to stabilize blood sugar.
Apart from the delicious taste and health benefits of the kernel, consumption of the oil extracted from the nut also helps in reducing belly fat. The dried kernel is generally chopped or grated to add that special coconut flavor while cooking.
Marcona Almonds
Having origins in Spain, Marcona almonds are much flatter, rounder, and sweeter than the classic buttery variety. The delicate aroma and taste of this variety are akin to the almond essence used in bakery products.
These almonds are generally sold in a pre-cooked form- by frying or roasting and then salting them. They make for a great snack in this version.
Their appealing mouthfeel and unique taste can turn an ordinary dish to a special one. This is why they have also won the hearts of chefs and gourmands from across the world. The variety can be sauteed in oil and sprinkled over a salad or can be chopped and added to baked goods.
Coming to the health benefits, this variety of almonds contains higher amounts of monounsaturated fats, which is a key to proper weight management. It also contains vitamins and minerals in high amounts, which help to maintain cardiovascular health.
Flaxseeds
Commonly found in Canada, Europe, and Russia, flaxseeds have several health benefits and are obtained from a flowering plant around 2 feet tall.
But before they can be fit for consumption, flaxseeds must be rinsed thoroughly and dried. You can surely eat them raw and whole, but they are easily digestible when ground up.
Flax seeds are emerging as a superfood, as scientific studies have pointed to their wide range of health benefits. Just a tablespoon of flax seeds can provide you with a substantial amount of protein, amoeba-3 fatty acids, and fiber. Moreover, they are rich sources of important vitamins and minerals.
Flaxseeds can act as an exciting dressing on salads of all kinds and can also be added into cooking, muffins and bread. They can even be sprinkled on cereal meals for breakfast. All in all, having flax seeds in your meal makes it tasty and healthy at the same time.
Kola Nuts
Coming from the Kola tree native to the rainforest climate in Africa, the nuts are enclosed in white shells inside the tree’s star-shaped fruits. The nuts taste bitter in the mouth initially but become sweeter with chewing.
Interestingly, these large nuts are an important cultural symbol for ethnic groups in African countries. They are given to guests during weddings, naming ceremonies, and funerals. Members of such ethnic groups also use nuts as a medicine due to their beneficial properties.
Kola nuts are rich in caffeine, which boosts metabolism and improves blood circulation. Caffeine is also well-known for boosting energy levels. Studies have shown that the extract of this nut has antibacterial properties.
Due to their caffeine content, Kola nuts are widely used as flavoring agents in beverages. Due to its flavor, the raw nut is also frequently chewed in West African cultures.
Acorns
The edible nut comes from oak trees in the USA, Europe, Asia, and Northern Africa. For making acorns fit for eating, they must be treated for tannic acid, which can have toxic effects on humans. A repeated drying and boiling procedure is used in this treatment.
These nuts also have an interesting background, as studies have shown them to be historically significant as a staple in North American and Indian diets. These nuts can also be roasted for consumption and contain a whole lot of essential nutrients.
Acorns are high in potassium, vitamins A and E, iron, and various other important minerals. Added to this, they are low in calories, making them a great fit for weight loss diets. Having these nuts included in the diet also boosts energy levels.
After Acorns have been treated to remove the tannins, they can be used in several recipes as a taste enhancer. Some common meals where acorns can be used are porridge, acorn flatbread, and acorn flour honey cake.
Sunflower Seeds
Technically, they are fruits of the sunflower plant from North America and are harvested from the plant’s large flower heads. Due to their firm but tender texture and mildly nutty flavor, sunflower seeds have similar culinary uses as nuts. Currently, they are also grown in Ukraine and Russia.
A single sunflower might contain as many as 2000 seeds. The sunflower crop has two varieties- while one is grown for edible seeds, the other is used to extract the oil. The seed which is consumed is enclosed in black-and-white striped shells known as hulls.
Sunflower seeds are highly beneficial in reducing chronic inflammation that is linked to an increase in the risk of heart disease. Apart from this, they help to lower blood pressure and blood sugar due to the presence of Vitamin E, magnesium, protein, and fatty acids.
Similar to nuts, roasting sunflower seeds enhances their flavor. The seeds are popular as a stand-alone snack and can also be used as toppings for salad and yogurt.
Pumpkin Seeds
These seeds are obtained from the pumpkin plant found growing in countries such as the United States, India, Egypt, and China. To prepare pumpkin seeds for consumption, they need to be gathered from the meat of the fruit and washed off.
The seeds can be eaten in their raw form or maybe roasted for a greater flavor. They are a popular snack item across different regions of the world.
Pumpkin seeds are quite small in size, but don’t go by that! They are little powerhouses of nutrients, with a number of health benefits. With a high protein and unsaturated fat content, the seeds can be a perfect companion throughout your weight-loss journey.
Pumpkin seeds are also helpful in preventing complications in diabetic patients by keeping cholesterol and blood sugar levels under control. Being higher in fat content in comparison with many nuts, they are also commonly used in oils and butter.
Cacao
Popularly referred to as cocoa beans, these seeds grow in the lowland rain forests of the Amazon and tropical areas of Asia, among other regions.
The bean pods of cocoa are harvested after they ripen, and the seeds are extracted after a ten days drying period. This is not the end of the processing, as they are fermented and dried again to make them ready for eating.
Cacao seeds are highly rich in flavonoids that help to lower blood pressure and improve the flow of blood to the brain and heart. The fiber present in them facilitates proper digestion and antioxidants reduce inflammation as well.
The seeds are not consumed as a snack on their own but are an important ingredient in some very popular sweet dishes. A few tablespoons of cacao powder are integral to that magical taste of a chocolate smoothie. Similarly, the gluten-free raw brownies that vegans love are prepared using cocoa beans.
Types Of Nuts Conclusion
Isn’t it marvelous how different types of nuts come with such a varied range of health benefits? Add to this the various tastes and flavors, and they could very well be considered the superheroes of the food world!
Certain fats common in nuts, such as mono and polyunsaturated fats, can aid in weight loss and reduce the risk of cardiovascular diseases. This is contrary to the popular belief that nuts are high in calories and fat.
You can add any one of these nuts as your evening snack or include it in the breakfast diet. After all, their beneficial effects can be maximized with minimal processing, so you don’t have to put in a lot of effort to consume them.
So, go ahead and select the one that you would prefer!
Waking up with a sore back is never fun!
Replacing an old mattress with a new one might seem simple, but there are so many factors to consider in this decision. For instance, the type of mattress you buy will depend on how long you plan on using it or how many people will sleep on it.
Plus, we can't ignore the fact that individuals have different needs — some need a firmer option for back support, while others prefer softer surfaces. If you get the wrong type of mattress, it might interrupt your sleepand even cause back issues. This is why a lot of thought needs to go into the mattress-buying process.
If you are just starting out on a research journey for a new mattress, we suggest beginning with understanding the types of mattresses. So, here's a detailed list of all the types of mattresses that you can choose from–
Types Of Mattresses
Honestly, there are many things to consider before buying a new mattress because there's a selection of options waiting to be discovered. Over the years, companies have created new mattress styles with unique materials that you might not have heard of before.
Thus, we recommend taking a look at all the possibilities before locking down a final selection. In this section, we'll list the mattress types and the pros and cons of each selection. Let's check it out-
1. Memory Foam Mattress
Memory foam mattresses are made of a special type of polyurethane foam and are one of the more popular options for bedsthese days. Memory foam is the upgraded version of polyfoam, which is soft yet lacks the slow-moving feeling that memory foam mattresses provide.
In fact, the material is designed to contour to the shape of the sleeper, which generates a feeling of sleeping in a cozy nook. Memory foam beds are usually formed of all layers of foam, with the same few layers finding their way into other hybrid beds too.
Different types of mattresses can provide comfort and a good amount of pressure relief, but memory foam mattresses sink in, almost cradling the sleeper. Try it out for yourself the next time you're in the store — press your hand on the mattress and watch it move slowly back in place.
Essentially, this holding of body weight makes it the perfect mattress for those who like the extra cushiony feeling while settling into a deep slumber.
Who Should Use Memory Foam Mattresses?
Sleepers who are already struggling with pressure issues, aches, and pains while resting can find a good use for a memory foam mattress. Whether you sleep on your back or on the side, the memory foam material hugs all the curves of the body.
Also, even if weight is applied to the foam mattress for a long time, it goes back into place; thus, there is no need to flip it over. It's a great option if you need a low-maintenance mattress that also offers maximum isolation in movement.
Thus, this makes for an ideal choice for couples that want mattress motion restricted so that there is minimum disturbance to either party.
Pros
Motion isolation
Relieves pressure
Hypoallergenic material
Low maintenance
Cons
May overheat
2. Innerspring Mattresses
Back in the day, innerspring mattresses were all the rage. Nowadays, not so much because the trend has evolved into accommodating other options like foam, air, and organic mattresses. If we compare the popular option of today to the innerspring mattresses, the main difference is the use of coils or springs within the mattress.
Unlike memory foam mattresses that are constructed entirely out of foam materials, innerspring mattresses provide support via different types of steel coils. The coils within the innerspring mattress support the body weight and bounce back into place when the weight is shifted.
As a rule, we consider that a higher quality innerspring mattress has a higher number of coils. The reason for its popularity in yesteryears and even these days is for its reasonable price. Yet, these types of mattresses may not be ideal in the long run because the coils get damaged fast and may need replacement after a while.
Basically, there are three common coil types used in innerspring mattresses-
a) Bonnell Coils
Bonnell coils are the ones that look like hourglasses and coil around like a helix when put together. Innerspring mattresses made from these coils are moderately priced since they are not the most comfortable of the lot.
b) Continuous Coils
This system involves using a long but single wire that is spread out to form the entirety of the innerspring mattress. Since the full length of the mattresses is made up of a wriggling S-shaped coil instead of individual coils at intervals, it tends to last longer than regular innerspring mattresses.
c) Encased Coils
Unlike other spring mattress types, the encased models have coils that are individually wrapped or pocketed. These types of coils are not connected to each other, which is why they provide much better motion isolation. You will find these coils shaped like thin barrels in hybrid mattresses.
Who Should Use Innerspring Mattresses?
This depends on personal preference but remember - these beds will be more bouncier than memory foam mattresses. So, if you are a light sleeper or combination sleeper that likes to change sleeping positions often, it might be better to use an innerspring mattress.
Again, a memory foam mattress will give you the feeling of sinking, while an innerspring option will feel like you're sleeping "on" the bed. Some people who already have mobility issues might prefer the feeling of traditional innerspring beds.
Additionally, sleepers that want better ventilation along with firm body support will appreciate this mattress type.
Pros
Better ventilation
Available in many types
Suitable for sleepers with mobility problems
Affordable
Cons
Motion transfer
3. Hybrid Mattress
Ask anyone out there, and most sleepers might tell you they have switched an older bed for a new hybrid mattress. What's special about this option is that it combines the positive aspects of innerspring mattresses and memory foam mattresses to form a comfy bed.
If you look closely at the mattress materials, they are likely to be formed with a layer of coiled springs and a few layers of foam. Usually, there's one layer of coil bedding and two or three layers of different foams, which include memory foams or latex.
Pretty much all hybrid mattresses are customizable, so you can select the amount of bounce or sinking-in feeling you need. Add a few more layers of foam for a softer bed, and remove a few to get a firmer variety.
Here's an example — if you want better support for pressure points in the spine yet don't want to sleep hot, go for a hybrid option. One thing we particularly like is the option to select special hybrid mattresses that provide zoned support. This means that the layers are adjusted to suit specific parts of the body, like the spine.
Who Should Use Hybrid Mattresses?
Typically, people prefer this option for a few reasons, with the most prominent being its ability to provide comfort in different sleeping positions. So, we can safely say that this option is quite versatile, and almost anyone can use it for a good night's sleep.
In a few cases, we have seen back sleepers and stomach sleepers prefer hybrid mattress types because they support the body well in these positions. Also, if you want a temperature-controlling mattress but don't want the bouncy effects of innerspring beds, go for something in between like a hybrid.
Anyway, there are plenty of brands and options to choose from, which give you a wide range of collections at your disposal.
Pros
Better body support
Variety of options
Suits most sleeping types
Does not trap body heat
Cons
Costly
4. Gel Beds
As we've mentioned earlier, people who sleep on memory foam beds love the cushiony softness but aren't big fans of waking up in pools of sweat. Unless you are living in a cooler region, an equal alternative to a memory foam mattress might be required. This is where gel-infused foam mattresses come into the picture.
Gel-infused memory foam provides the same body support and pressure relief as memory foam without an increase in mattress temperature. Foam mattresses need to be dense, but they also have limited airflow that leaves no place for the body heat to escape. With gel memory foam, this problem is eliminated because the gel keeps the mattress cool throughout the night.
Essentially, manufacturers infuse the gel into the foam mattress because it takes a long time to trap body heat. This type of mattress is perfect if you don't want to let go of foam mattresses yet still want the temperature of the foam beds regulated.
Who Should Use Gel Mattresses?
We recommend this type of bed for those people who tend to sweat often yet wish to take advantage of cozy foam beds.
The good thing about gel-infused beds is that they are almost entirely made of foam, so sleeping on them doesn't feel as different. The same pressure relief benefits with motion isolation are found in gel beds too. Although it might not be the most affordable mattress on the market, a gel-infused foam mattress offers plenty of benefits for its cost.
Pros
Keeps body cool
Adapts to sleeping position
Soft and comforting
Practical and low maintenance
Cons
Made of synthetic materials
5. Latex Mattresses
If you are not convinced about foam mattresses and are looking for alternative mattress types, the next best option is a latex mattress. Natural latex is obtained from the byproducts of sap from rubber trees which makes it an environmentally-friendly mattress option.
Latex mattresses have pretty much the same qualities as memory foam mattresses, with the only difference being in their material origin. It allows for body contouring and supports pressure relief for some essential spots, just like foam mattresses. In our experience and according to those who have used both, latex beds are slightly more bouncy.
Ultimately, it comes down to preference, and maybe you should try both out because the sleeping experiences are similar. Do keep in mind while selecting that latex options are much more airy and have a slight bounce to them.
Also, a latex bed can be constructed using natural or synthetic latex, which means that not all options are eco-friendly. Try to check beforehand if the mattress is verified by the Global Organic Latex Standard, which certifies the safety standards for latex mattresses. Also, latex mattresses are manufactured in two ways — Talalay style and Dunlop.
a) Talalay
The Talalay process involves filling the mold with latex and then allowing a vacuum to suck out the air within. The resulting latex mattress is still unstable after this procedure which is why it is frozen afterward. Once that is done, the final mattress has an even texture throughout, unlike the Dunlop latex mattress.
b) Dunlop
In the Dunlop process of making a latex mattress, the latex is poured into the mold all at once. With this technique, the final product is denser towards the bottom and softer at the top.
Who Should Use Latex Mattresses?
As far as who can use this mattress, it is quite suitable for people with allergies. You see, natural latex is resistant to dust mites and hypoallergenic due to its superior ventilation mechanism.
Another benefit of increased airflow through the mattress is that it hardly ever gets hot while sleeping on it. Hot sleepers or people who get uncomfortable by hotbeds can switch to latex options for better breathability and cooling.
Also, this mattress type is ideal for combination or side sleepers because this bed will support constant movement easily. Its slightly bouncy nature will allow switching sides with ease.
Pros
Buoyant material
Better breathability
Uses natural materials
Suitable for hot sleepers
Cons
Heavy
6. Organic Mattresses
Living a lifestyle that limits the damage to the environment can have many forms, and one way involves switching the mattresses we use. Nowadays, you can purchase organic mattresses made of natural materials, limiting your exposure to chemicals.
Usually, organic mattresses are made of materials like natural latex, organic cotton, recycled coils, and organic wool. The companies that manufacture these mattresses try to keep the process free of toxins and harmful chemicals.
In addition, the products are always marketed as eco-responsible with certifications so that it's easier for customers to spot them among other mattresses. Check for Global Organic Textile Standard certified mattresses to get good quality material in your organic mattress.
Also, some mattresses come with a GREENGUARD GOLD certification which indicates that the materials used are natural and non-toxic. Similar to these, there are many other environmental certifications that you can check if you are eco-conscious. The sleep quality in these mattresses is pretty high; however, they tend to cost more.
Who Should Use Organic Mattresses?
An organic option is a perfect mattress for those who wish to reduce their carbon footprint and those who wish to use natural materials. Apart from providing all the comforts a good mattress should provide, a well-made organic mattress can also relieve pressure in the body.
Also, this option will work well for those people who live in climates that change often. This is because natural materials like cotton and wool are great at retaining heat in winter and dissipating heat in summer. Thus, you can truly use these mattresses comfortably in all seasons, especially in summer when some beds tend to get hot.
Pros
Regulates temperature
Eco-friendly mattress
Free of toxins and chemicals
Relieves pressure
Cons
Higher price range
Few brand options
7. Water Beds
Water beds might seem like a modern invention that is marketed for their relaxation benefits. But the truth is that water beds have been around for quite some time and were used to assist patients with bedsores.
Essentially, the mattress is filled with water which gives a sensation of floatinggently in water while sleeping. This might not be the first mattress option people go for, but it is popular as an alternative way to relaxfor a few hours.
With the option to customize the water level in the bed, you can get the desired fullness depending on your body weight. If you fill the waterbed with very little water, then there would be too much movement, and filling it too much will be uncomfortable too.
Typically, water beds have different chambers, and each of them can have different levels of water. There is also the option to have free-flowing water in these chambers or have a restricted water flow. These adjustable settings are ideal if there are two people sleeping on the bed since each side can have a different water setting.
Who Should Use Water Mattresses?
Although it may not be mainstream, a few sleepers may enjoy the sensation of sleeping on a waterbed. This type of bed adapts well to the shape of the body and prevents pressure from building up on the hips, shoulders, and knees.
Also, people prone to allergies to regular mattresses will benefit from sleeping on waterbeds. Besides, it's easy to maintain these mattresses because the outer vinyl cover is resistant to dust and stains.
Pros
Comfortable to sleep on
Heating options
Firmness is adjustable
Suitable for people allergic to natural and chemical materials
Cons
Susceptible to leaks
8. Adjustable Beds
If you've always wished for a bed that could be used for multiple purposes in the house, an adjustable bed is your best bet. They look like any other bed, but they can recline and adjust in two or more directions when watching TV or when you wish to stretch your legs.
This bed is ideal for those who wish to read or work in a sitting position but do not wish to invest in a new chair for the same. Typically, the price of these beds is higher because they come with moving electrical parts like motors.
Some of these adjustable beds also have pain-relieving abilities because changing the bed angle allows for targeting different pressure points.
Who Should Use Adjustable Mattresses?
Adjustable beds are good for people with chronic pain and conditions which may require frequent adjusting of bed positions.
Pros
Improved sleep quality
Pain relief
Comfort
Versatile
Cons
Slightly pricey
9. Pillow Top Mattresses
Now, the pillow top mattresses have an extra layer of padding on the top which can be several inches thick. There are various reasons for adding this type of mattress to the bed, with the most common one being extra comfort. In some cases, the topper provides better durability, cooling, and bounce.
Generally, a pillow top layer can be made out of natural materials like wool, cotton, latex, and sometimes even foam. Since the whole point of these mattresses is to add an extra layer of comfort, they are softer to touch than other mattresses.
However, it is true that these mattresses come at a higher price, but it might be worth it for the extra comfort. Still, there are a few budget-friendly options available from select brands.
The cushioning of pillow top mattresses is ideal for people who require pressure relief in some parts of the body.
In addition, it also isolates motion so that there is minimal movement of the bed while sleeping. Note that it may require some maintenance because it needs frequent rotation due to sagging. Also, the options made of foam will retain heat and might feel hot to sleep in during the summer.
Who Should Use Pillow Top Mattresses?
If you are one of those people who require extra cushioned support while sleeping, the pillow top mattress is for you. In fact, many types of sleepers can use this type of bed with ease.
Pros
Added comfort
Motion isolation
Soft to touch
Ideal for pressure relief
Cons
Retains heat
High maintenance
10. Air Mattresses
Don't look down upon air beds or air mattresses just because they sound like something a vacationer would use. Yes, we know how air mattresses are associated with college students who roll them out on the floor in replacement for "real" beds!
But, times are different now, and air mattresses available today are made of high-quality materials that are quite durable. One reason to replace the bed with an air mattress instead of foam or hybrid mattresses is for its light weight.
That's right; many sleepers are tired of moving around bulky mattresses and flipping them to different sides for better adjustability. With air mattresses, the problem of lifting and storing them is solved because they can also deflate and shrink into a box.
Besides, these are the most affordable mattresses you'll find, and some of them even come with thin foam layers for extra comfort. Sleeping on these beds long-term might not be the best choice for everyone, but they are perfect if you need a mattress for a short time.
Who Should Use Air Mattresses?
First of all, the firmness of these beds is easy to adjust on your own because it all depends on the amount of air you pump. Thus, if the bed seems too firm, allow some air out.
Those of you who move around often might find air mattresses pretty useful because they are super portable and light. Of course, they won't be as comfortable to sleep on as foam mattresses, and neither will help with back issues or relieve pressure.
However, an air mattress is ideal for talking along with you on a camping trip as a temporary bed or for guests visiting over. In any case, it makes for an affordable replacement mattress if you only need a bed to sleep on for a few days.
Pros
Firm-feeling mattress
Portable option
Low in cost
Easily adjustable firmness
Cons
Tendency to tear
Not suitable for long-term sleeping
Types Of Mattresses Frequently Asked Questions ?
Are mattresses harder when new?
In the beginning, mattresses will be much firmer than they turn out to be later. If the mattress feels a bit firm when you first use it, remember that it will become softer with time. It is recommended to use a mattress for at least a month to judge if it fits your needs.
Just as a new pair of shoes need to be worn a few times to feel comfortable, mattresses need to be used for a while. If you wish to hasten the process of loosening the mattress, try stepping on it a few times to soften it up.
Can I wash mattresses?
It's not possible to wash a mattress with water, but there are ways to keep it clean and fresh. Keeping the mattress covered will anyway keep it protected from unwanted spills and stains.
Additionally, you could clean some spots using a mixture of baking soda, hydrogen peroxide, and dish soap. Apart from that, steam cleaning the mattress periodically will also help in keeping the mattress fresh and deodorized.
How long do mattresses last?
Typically, a good mattress will last for 7-10 years if maintained in good condition. If extra care is taken, it could last for much longer. However, remember that the longevity also depends on the materials used to construct it.
Types Of Mattresses Final Words
As we've already discussed, selecting a mattress is a personal decision, and everyone will have their preferences. We suggest buying from a mattress store that offers at least a month of trial policy. During this time frame, you'll be able to decide whether the mattress is the right choice for you.
In any case, we hope you find the perfect mattress soon enough. See you next time!
Have you ever just wanted to kick back and relax on a comfy massage chair when you get home? How many times have you walked into a furniture store as a kid and just settled down on one of the best massage chairs on display there just because of how cool and comfortable it looks? It is, indeed among the most relaxing feelings you will ever get when you have a massage chair to kick back in after a long, tiring day.
Well, if you were to decide that you need one of these at home because you want some relaxation, which would you choose? There are so many different types of massage chairs out there that it can get confusing if you were to decide that you want to buy one for yourself. You’re spoilt for choice, to say the least.
Thankfully, you’re in the right place, reading just the right article for that. This article is the penultimate guide to massage chairs and you’ll know all about them once you’re done reading it. You’ll also know exactly which one suits your purposes the most and you probably won’t ever need a masseuse again once you buy the perfect massage chair for yourself!
[FULL BODY MASSAGE CHAIR]: After inviting hundreds of...
[8 & 2 FIXED ROLLERS]: This massage chair full body has 8...
The most common types of massage chairs are called Full Body massage chairs. These chairs do exactly what they’re known as. A full body massage. If you’re looking for something that will massage every part of your body for you as soon as you sit on it, look no further.
There are plenty of options in Full Body Massage Chairs out there. What kind of features they have and how they perform the massage depends on the brand and model you’re going for. Most full body massage chairs massage your neck, body, shoulders, calves and feet. The newer models even do the hands and arms.
B01M24RKQY
You will have to decide exactly what kind of chair you want and it also depends on your budget. If you can afford them, some of the more expensive models even allow for adjustments to be made and for you to specify exactly which parts of your body you want massaged.
Massages whole body
More expensive than most other Massage chairs
Have a lot of options available in market
Viable for people who need a full fledged massage when they use it
Are commonly found in barbershops and can be paid for one time use
MASSAGE + HEAT: Loosen up from top to bottom with heat in...
CHARMING FURNITURE: This comfy addition to your living space...
On the opposite end of the spectrum from full body massage chairs, we come to Ottoman massage chairs. Ottoman massage chairs are considered budget massage chairs and have been around for a long, long time. They’re the type of massage chair that almost anyone and everyone who is on a tight budget would be looking for.
Ottoman Massage Chairs are only slightly more expensive than normal chairs but offer the benefit of a comfy, relaxing massage chair while also being practical and occupying less space than most other massage chairs which take up quite some space in your house.
However, Ottoman chairs are more about comfort than about the actual massage itself but you are definitely going to be getting your money’s worth out of these because they’re quite inexpensive and come with plenty of options for someone who does not want to spend too much.
Another major benefit with Ottoman Chairs is that it allows taller people to sit comfortably on them. Most tall people have issues with massage chairs because their legs are too long or their heads too high for the headrest. Ottoman chairs tend to extend further than most normal chairs and make it more relaxing for taller people.
Massage and Heating: The Rocker Recliner is a good choice...
Heat therapy is a thing and heated chairs are a thing too. Now you can’t really expect the Massage Chair market to not have a Heated Seating option, can you? It’s considered a luxury feature found in most high-end cars and in 5-star hotel rooms.
If you’re in the market for a chair that is tailor-made for comfort and relaxation, say, a massage chair then heated massage chairs are obviously going to catch your attention. Heat therapy is one of the best known forms of treatment for muscle tension and soreness. Heated Massage chairs will definitely help you with the same.
Basically, how they work is the rollers on the massage chair heat up and go on to give you a nice, warm heat-therapy session. It is one of the most relaxing experiences in the world and will take the all the strain out of a long day full of work and travel.
You’ll find heated massage chairs in both low and high-end variants so you need not worry about the budget aspect of it. There’s an option for everyone and you’ll definitely find one suited to your needs if you dig deep enough and put some thought into it.
FULL BODY MASSAGE - The portable massage chair combines...
SHIATSU NECK & FULL BACK MASSAGER-Comfier Seat Massager has...
Air massage chairs function a bit differently compared to other massage chairs. They’re just as comfortable if not more and have quite a different experience to offer. Unlike regular massage chairs which use electronic massaging equipment, Air Massage chairs use a bunch of airbags which massage parts of your body that normal massage chairs wouldn’t otherwise be able to treat.
While most common massage chairs massage your neck, shoulders, calves and aim to relax your muscles, Air massage chairs massage your hands, arms, legs and feet. The result is a much softer massage experience as compared to massages offered by regular massage chairs with rollers. The airbags do a good job of performing a full body massage and helps you feel relaxed after intense activities like exercise and workout sessions.
You can also add airbags as an addon to your regular massage chair which will probably be a cheaper option if you’re looking for massage features offered by most roller massage chairs as well as the softness of airbags. There are plenty of options in the market although bear in mind that Air Massage chairs won’t fulfill all your needs but only specific ones.
[FULL BODY MASSAGE CHAIR]: After inviting hundreds of...
[8 & 2 FIXED ROLLERS]: This massage chair full body has 8...
Another type of massage chairs is Zero Gravity. Zero Gravity massage chairs offer a similar experience to that experienced by pilots in space under zero gravity circumstances. Initially, this started out as a feature offered in certain massage chairs. However, it later turned into a type of massage chair of its own when Massage Chairs specialized for Zero Gravity were designed and produced.
The incline on the recliner of Zero Gravity massage chairs is such that you experience a similar body posture to the way astronauts do when they float around in space. This is something that enables inversion therapy on your spine. It creates an extremely favorable circumstance for improving your general posture and also soothes your back.
Zero gravity massage chairs are great for relieving joint and bone pain and are definitely worth investing in if you’re someone that undergoes a lot of back aches and spinal cord problems during your day. They’re not exactly cheap but if you do need something to deal with these kinds of pesky problems then buy yourself a zero gravity massage chair and you won’t regret it.
6. Alternative Options
If you can’t really afford one of the options above there are always some alternative options you can choose from. For example, you could buy a low-end massage chair or even a very comfortable recliner that is cheaper than most massage chairs and just buy some massage chair equipment as add-ons.
If you’re going for this then it would be preferable for you to do some research on it and read up on the brands offering the best quality add-ons because in most cases, add-ons have been hit or miss scenarios. It is difficult to find something that is suited to your needs but also much friendlier on your wallet.
Alternatively, you could also go for a massage chair treatment at your local salon. This is definitely worth considering if you know you won’t be using the massage chair on a regular basis. This is the much more economical option than outright buying a massage chair that will also eventually consume more electricity and add on to that bill.
It’s also the more practical option to visit the local salon if you live in a house that is running short of space. Massage chairs occupy a lot of room and you’re also going to have to find a location in your house where you can just plug in the chair and sit on it because you’re going to have to move it around otherwise which can be quite a painful task.
Conclusion
That’s all we have for you. Now that you’ve read all you need to know about the different kinds of massage chairs out there in the market, you can go out there and start shopping.
Visit a furniture store you know you can trust and remember that the internet is your best friend. If you need to research brands and specific models, don’t shy away from bringing out that smartphone of yours and look up the product you’re buying for more detailed information and customer reviews!
We all love properly illuminated spaces, but are you confused about the kind of light fixture needed for your area? We are here to help!
A crucial part of lighting is the switch, and you will have to know about the different types of switches to be able to make a decision. There are various models, and you can choose from among pressing a button, toggling, touching a panel, or merely clapping in the room.
Yes, that is how varied the range is, and with the advent of technology, there are motion sensors and proximity detectors which work on their own. So, if you are planning to renovate the house, you will probably need to understand the various light switches and fixtures before moving forward.
To make the job easier, we have decided to curate a list of the popular switches and fixtures. All you need to do is sit back and glance through to get a complete understanding of it.
So, without further ado, let’s dive in.
Types Of Light Switches
We have dedicated this section to the detailed description of switches and where they can be placed. Previously these involved a simple toggling between two options, and that would open and close the electrical circuits. But today, you have multiple controls and preset settings. There is specific lighting for each room, and then some houses have central lighting controls.
You will also find different ranges of switches that work with halogen and fluorescent lights. It is essential to know the location where these can be used for enhanced convenience. Read on to know all about it.
Toggle switches are the most common variant of light switches available in the market. Chances are you must have already seen these and played with them since childhood. They are very easy to operate, and you just have to flip it up and down to use it.
If you need a new light in the bedroom, your local electrician is going to get these switches by default and what’s more! This model is cheap and easily available, two things that most consumers look for.
Now with the advancement of technology, there are switches available that can be controlled with your smartphones. These are synced, and timers can be set up. The lights can be scheduled to switch on at a particular time, and the toggle switch would operate automatically. This is very convenient, and people are choosing this more and more every day.
But if you like the classic version more, opt for the traditional switch, and you can keep toggling it when needed. They are reliable and will last for a very long time.
With single-pole switches, you simply have a switch that can be flipped to turn it on or off. With a simple two-way operation, anybody can figure out how to work with these.
The best part about these is that on and off is written on two sides of the switch. Even a child will understand how to operate it, and hence this is so commonly used.
Coming to its working process, there are two screw terminals that are connected to the black and white wires present in the circuit. One terminal holds the incoming wire while the other holds an outgoing one. You will find most of these switches to be connected to the ground wire for proper and safe use.
Up next are selector light switches, which are usually used to toggle between two or more lighting modes. These will allow you to shift between different modes by pressing different buttons or rotating a dial. They are generally used for fans to change the speed but have become popular today with lights that can be dimmed.
Some people have lights where you can shift between multiple colors. Now while there are smart light options available where you can choose specific colors from a smartphone itself, these switches will allow you to do so physically.
The most common type is a rotary switch, which is like a dial that needs to be moved to shift between the modes. You will also find position selector switches which have a rotary dial. But this one is limited to four light options.
Push buttons are another commonly used version which you will find in most houses. They are generally present in washrooms and are connected to the lights and exhaust fans. These are simple to use and are known to be very durable. People use these for years without any signs of wear and tear.
Moving on, there are 2 common types of this button. One version consists of buttons that will stay recessed after being pressed. When you need to switch it off, press it again, and that should bring the button to its normal position.
The other type involves a button which returns to its normal position after being pressed. Since this kind of switch always remains in one position, you might forget to switch it off at times. So, be careful while handling it.
There is another variant of switch which has a LED light attached towards the inside of it. Whenever you have switched it on, the light will be visible, and hence you will remember that it is turned on.
Are you very energy conscious? If environment concerns bother you a lot, this could be the perfect switch for you. It is made to be energy efficient and will reduce your energy bills to some extent.
Proximity light switches turn on if someone enters the room and will turn off by itself if there is no one in the space. They work automatically with proximity detectors installed in them. If you have people and especially kids in the house who leave lights switched on, this could be very helpful.
However, it is best not to use this light for bedrooms since you might not want a very bright light every time you enter this space. Also, it might not work out for people who prefer dim lighting. It is because this one will be lighting up even in the middle of the night if you get out of bed.
According to us, these switches would work very well in community spaces or in living rooms where you will need bright lighting whenever people are present.
If you are a fan of mood lighting, dimmers are exactly what you need. These will help you create the right mood for a relaxing evening or a romantic date indoors. You can control the level of brightness to ensure that you have just the right amount of light that is needed.
Also, bright lights can cause a lot of strain on your eyes. So, this option is very convenient and can be chosen by all those who have an eye problem.
Coming to the varieties, there are different options that you can choose from when it comes to dimming the lights. One is the dial, which can be turned to adjust the intensity and the brightness level.
Another is a touch panel, which will let you play with the brightness by just swiping. You have to swipe across the screen and stop when you have achieved the required brightness. Then there are other options that come with remote control. This will allow you to change the light from wherever you are sitting and offers the most amount of convenience.
These are usually used for backyards and front lawns, and as the name suggests, the lights will turn on if it senses any kind of motion. This is great for security purposes and can keep intruders and burglars away. These kinds of lights are pretty bright and will immediately alert people around if there is an intruder in the middle of the night.
Most motion-sensitive models will come with a specific switch suited for them. These are easier to operate and saves a lot of time in searching for a switch that fits well.
One of the key advantages of this type is that it does not require you to touch any button. Hence it works very well with elderly and disabled people who might not be able to reach out for the light switch.
Also, it will shut off seconds after there is no movement. This saves energy, and you do not have to keep a porch light on throughout the night. If there is an emergency, it will light up itself. At other times, it stays off and you will be saving money.
If you have been looking for a good porch light, this is a brilliant option to select. Photoelectric lights do not need to be turned on and off physically. They operate automatically and will detect if the light is low in the room or outdoors.
The sensor works superbly well in detecting levels of light, and will switch on immediately. They will light up themselves when the sun goes down, and hence you can attach these to your front porch or patio. These lights could also be used at gates or in the backyard.
Moving on, you might have wondered who switches on all the street lights every day after dusk! Well, here is the answer to it. These can operate on their own and will light up by themselves.
We would suggest not to use it indoors as you might end up wasting electricity after the sun goes down. These lights stay on throughout the night, even when there is no one in the house.
We all love the convenience, and what better way to switch on lights without having to get up and walk to the switchboard. While motion sensor lights help here, they are more suited for outdoor or community spaces and not the bedrooms.
This, on the other hand, can become a part of your personal space. Sound activated lights are programmed to switch on automatically when they detect some form of sound. Remember those movies where the person could switch on lights by snapping his finger or clapping? Yes, this has been around for quite a while now, and customers really enjoy them.
You can keep it in the bedroom as it will only light up when you make a certain sound. This is unlike motion detectors that will switch on whenever someone enters the space.
If you want to light up a room using multiple sources of light, this is the kind that you need. Track lighting is popular inside houses with corridors as well for commercial spaces and offices. These involve long tracks of light on the ceiling with multiple lights on the track.
The best part about this is that you can use it to highlight portraits and artwork on the wall. The light can be tilted wherever necessary to highlight certain items and make sure that they stand out for your guests. So, you will see these lights at boutiques and stores.
Coming to the installation process, it is pretty easy to work with. Just make sure that the tracks are aligned properly, and you should be done. We would suggest taking professional help if you are not very confident about it.
The best part about this is that you can cover any kind of area with track lights. It could be a long corridor or a small room, and you will just have to purchase the tracks and lights accordingly.
Up next is one of the most popular types of light fixtures that is available today. Ceiling lights are almost present in every home and will be there in the future too. If you want a normal reading light or you want to light up a large space with 1 or 2 light bulbs, this is the one to go for.
They have been around since the 1900s and have been a part of households since then. You will find antique ceiling lights which are made of brass and which may add a very traditional touch to your house. Check out the umpteen number of options before deciding on one kind.
Besides, these are perfect for your hall or living room, which needs to be lighted up brightly. That being said, you can pair it up with recessed lighting to provide complete coverage as well as highlight artwork or specific pieces on the wall.
As the name suggests, these lights look great in recessed areas, and you will need to create holes in the wall to attach them. These are used by interior designers or people with good knowledge of light angles. If placed in the right places, they have an ability to change the complete look of your house.
Most people opt for placing these lights on the ceiling at intervals for a proper spread. They could also be attached below cabinets and near corners of rooms. Also, if you were looking for an accent lighting option, this one would serve the purpose well. It has a narrower spread and will properly highlight whatever you wish to focus on.
Recessed lighting is a good option if you are planning on having dynamic lighting in the house. These can be spread across throughout, creating the perfect mood. They are also called mood lighting, as they can determine the ambiance of the space.
Do you want to operate two lights at the same time or run a very heavy powered machine? This is when you need to shift to a double pole switch. They are generally larger than single-pole ones and can usually power devices that need 240V of power.
Because they can handle a large amount of power, these are popularly used in industrial settings and for commercial purposes. They are rated at 30 amps and can be used even with heavy machinery or giant ovens that demand a lot of power.
Besides, these may look similar to single toggle versions, or they might look bigger and broader. These have the same on/off markings on their body, letting anyone who is using these switches for the first time know about it.
With us being very concerned with interior design and decoration, decorative switches have found a place in many homes. While toggle visions have been available for a long time, they do not do much to add to the aesthetics of the room.
Decorative ones, on the other hand, make sure that the switches look modern and appealing. These work in the same way as the toggle ones but have a flat surface with curved corners. They blend in well with the room and are easier to use. You lightly tap on one end, and the switch flips and turns on.
While the previous one was perfect for residential spaces, the rocker switch is made to handle rugged conditions and industrial setups. You cannot use delicate switches here as you will be dealing with a lot of dust and rough particles along with water.
In order to ensure that they are well protected and kept safe from the environment in which they are placed, rocker switches come with a cover. The mechanism is put inside a durable coating and is then encased in rubber. They are fully covered to prevent any form of damage and will not be affected by water, dust, or flying shards.
These always exist in pairs and are usually found on staircases, hallways, and entryways. If you want to control the light from 2 places, this is the one that you want. However, these do not have on/off mentioned on the body because it can vary depending on which switch is used.
Besides, when compared to single or double pole switches, these are thicker and have 3 screw terminals along with a grounding screw. One screw, which is slightly darker than the rest, is a common connection and delivers electric current to one of the switches which are being operated.
One thing we should tell you about before you make a purchase is that these are difficult to replace, fix, or install. It is best to get an electrician to do it for you because you can easily connect the wrong wires to the wrong screw terminals.
Do you want to control a light from more than 3 locations? The 4-way switches will help you do just that as it will allow you to combine 3-way switch systems to create one network. You will not find these very easily and are generally used in industries where such controls are needed. It could also be used for large spaces with 2 or 3 different entry points.
Further, this model looks a lot like double-pole variants, but they do not have on/off markings on the body. It boasts of 4 terminals along with a ground one. Because it is complicated, make sure that you ask a professional to help you out while installing it.
Light Switch Buyer’s Guide
Switches can vary a lot, as you have already found out. There are combination ones that work with multiple electrical outlets, and then there are special ones created to be placed outdoors. Some operate with your touch; others can sense your presence themselves.
To help you decide upon one, we have listed a few considerations that you should keep in mind before purchasing. Go through them carefully and make an informed decision.
Single Pole v/s Double Pole Switches
While single pole switches will allow you to work with one pair of hot wires, double pole switches will allow you to work with 2 pairs of it. This doubles the electricity supply and also has a grounding terminal to keep it safe. Yes, double pole versions are more expensive, but if you have to power heavy motor gadgets or appliances, it is safer to choose these over single pole switches.
Location
There are switches made for different locations, and it is essential that you keep that in mind. There are some which work very well outdoors and are covered up with rubber. They are made to be water and dust resistant and can withstand all temperatures.
On the other hand, there are motion detectors that are again made for backyards or front porch and will light up if it detects any kind of movement. These will not work indoors and may become a big hindrance.
Then there are dimmers and lights which are activated by sound. These will work very well for your bedrooms. Keep the considerations in mind before you make a purchase.
Process Of Installation
It is important that you install the product properly; otherwise, there could be short circuits, and you might end up destroying the switch. If you are going to do it by yourself, cut the power before proceeding. It is best to turn off the entire power by switching off the main control switch in your house.
Use the grounding wire to ground the switch to prevent any cases of electrocution. Also, double-check if you have connected the right wires with the correct terminals. After you are done,close the switch circuit before you turn back the power.
Make sure you do not work with wet hands and use an electrical tester to make sure that the power is disconnected before the process. These should keep you safe and protected.
Convenience
There are people with disabilities or older individuals who cannot walk up to a switchboard. For them, it is best to put up a proximity sensor or a remote control switch, which will allow them to control the lights and fans from wherever they are sitting.
If you have kids who are unable to reach the switchboard, again, automatic lighting is the way forward.
Final Words
Finally, we have come to the end of this guide, and we are sure that you know enough about switches. Remember to place them correctly and contact an electrician if you have any doubts. Once you are able to identify every switch, you will be able to replace old switches easily.
Also, ensure that you use the right kind of lights that suit the space. You would not want the bedroom light to turn on brightly every time you move about in the room. With this, we will take our leave. Let us know about your experience in the comment section below.
Construction equipment, also called heavy construction equipment, is heavy-duty vehicles designed to perform various tasks. Drilling, paving, excavating, lifting, transporting, etc are tasks that are made easier with the help of these machines.
Most, if not all, construction sites have some sort of heavy equipment to help with the construction process.
Since these machines add to the overall efficiency and quality of the work done, choosing the right equipment for your project is essential. But before you do, learning about the common types of heavy construction equipment can help you make the right choice.
To make things easier, I have compiled an extensive list of the same.
30 Types Of Heavy Construction Equipment
1. Articulated Trucks
Articulated trucks are a type of heavy-duty dump truck, adaptable to various conditions while proving versatile. These trucks comprise two components; a narrow trailer, also known as a dump box, and a cab. To connect these two components, a pivoting hinge is used.
These dump trucks are best used in worksites for more complicated or challenging tasks and sites without paved roads. Additionally, areas with highly steep terrain, sandy or slippery areas and low ceilings are where an articulated dump truck functions best.
Ideally, these trucks can be used for:
Recycling
Scrapping
Utility construction
Material Hauling
Aggregate hauling
Mining
Make sure to opt for an articulated truck that can accommodate the load you require it to haul.
2. Asphalt Pavers
Asphalt pavers are used along with a dump truck carrying asphalt, before transferring it to the paver. When the paver is filled with asphalt, it uses dispersion augers to lay asphalt on a flat surface. After scattering it, the asphalt paver rolls over the dispersed material and flattens it using a hydraulic cylinder, creating a stable and smooth surface.
An Asphalt paver is used in areas like:
Roads, both public and private
Bridge decks
Parking spaces
Industrial areas and sites
Driveways
Recreation courts
Building construction
These pavers usually come in various sizes, widths, and speed levels.
3. Backhoe Loaders
Backhoe loaders are a type of heavy equipment, similar to a compact track loader, that are pretty versatile as they can act as a tractor, loader, or backhoe. Typically, the backhoe is situated at the back of the truck, whereas the front part comprises the loading mechanism.
The middle or central areas of the backhoe loader consist of the tractor. Since these machines are designed to handle numerous tasks, they can be used for the following:
Excavation
Digging
Hauling
Construction
Farming
4. Cold Planners
Cold planners are heavy construction equipment mainly used for rotating carbide cutters, drums, asphalt, and mill pavements. They can be used for either in-depth removal or just a minimal removal process. Since asphalt and pavement milling/rotating results in a lot of dust, workers usually use a water system to maintain a safe workspace.
Cold planners can be used for various reasons, including:
Creating rumble strips
Smoothing land before paving
Minimizing or preventing possible potholes
Recycling asphalt for various projects
Similar to most heavy construction equipment, cold planners come in various sizes.
5. Compactors
Plate compactors make a surface into a compact, leveled, and flat area. They use vertically vibrating, heavy plates to break down the debris on the surface with repetitive or quick movements. Apart from industrial substances, these compactors can also level or flatten soil, gravel, and sand.
There are three types of plate compactors - single, reversible, and heavy-duty. They can be used based on your project requirements, such as -
Single plate: used for small-scale asphalt projects
Reversible plate: used for more versatile projects
Heavy-duty plate: used for larger industrial projects for construction or roadway.
6. Bulldozers
Bulldozers, generally known as dozers, are a heavy-duty tractor used for moving larger objects like demolition debris, rocks, and other materials in a construction area.
These machines have a large metal plate, also known as the dozer blade, attached to its front. This metal plate, usually made of sheet metal, helps move the materials, while a ripper is attached to the back of the construction machine to loosen materials that are compressed tightly.
Bulldozers are a tractor with a four-wheel drive. However, the wheels can be mounted on a loop of metal threads to move easily even in rough terrain.
7. Motor Graders
A Motor grader is the most popular and commonly used heavy construction equipment and these machines lay out a leveled, flat surface for asphalt scattering. There are two types of motor graders based on their frame arrangements - rigid frame grader and articulated frame grader.
The former comprises an individual axle and cannot turn left or right about a point. On the other hand, an articulated motor grader has a hinge in the middle of the front and rear axle, enabling it to move in smaller spaces without any problem.
8. Draglines
Draglines are wheel excavators used for large-scale projects which enable you to reach impressive depths. They are typically used in mining areas, ground excavation sites, etc., and function with a boom arm consisting of a wire-based drag and ropes for hoisting.
These hoist ropes have a digging bucket attached to them and move in unison to push the bucket down from the starting point. A dragline operator then controls the ropes and the bucket to collect debris and other objects.
Since they are heavy and tall, they are usually assembled in the respective workspace instead of being transported from one place to another. However, if you need to use these excavators for a small-scale project, there are smaller models available.
9. Drills
Rotary or Blasthole drills are heavy construction equipment used for drilling in mining areas. A common question people have is if it is any similar to a rotary tool. Well, not really because rotary tools focus on sanding, polishing, etc. whereas rotary drills focus on drilling.
These devices are gaining popularity among many heavy equipment handlers and construction workers due to their user-friendly built-in features. These features allow you to finish your construction project safely and quickly.
Some of the features of these machines are:
Built-in cameras
Depth tracking
Automatic drilling
Retracting and leveling
HVAC systems that limit exposure to dust
Most non-automated drilling devices offer similar results, but the above-mentioned features make automated drills a safer and more productive option on a construction site.
10. Dump Truck
Dump trucks, also called damper or tipper trucks, are heavy construction machines used to collect and mix dumps from one place to another. Gravel, sand, or any demolition waste/debris can be transported easily with the help of a dump truck.
A dump truck comprises an open-box bed, located at the rear of the machine, that uses hydraulic rams to raise and lower the bed.
11. Road Rollers
A road roller, also called a roller-compactor, is a machine typically used to compact soil, concrete, asphalt, or gravel when constructing foundations or roads.
They can consist of rubber tire smooth rollers or a double-drum asphalt roller. Some rollers have a combination of both, and the most suitable type of rough or smooth rollers can be determined based on the mixture used for the project.
12. Excavators
An excavator is a common sight in any construction site or workplace. Since they are adaptable and robust, they are used often in most small and large-scale projects. The excavator's cabin is a rotating platform that can rotate at 360 degrees and is connected to a bucket with a long arm. These machines are typically used for demolishing, excavating, brush removal, hauling, and forestry operations with their respective attachments.
There are three different sizing options for excavators. These include:
Mini excavator: used to navigate hard-to-reach places in construction areas for small-scale projects.
Medium excavator: used to handle larger projects, but not as big as a large excavator
Large excavator: used for more large-scale and high volume construction work
13. Forklifts
Forklifts are commonly found on a construction site, as they are generally used to move objects from one place to another safely. However, they only travel short distances and are used for moving items from worksites to warehouses.
These machines come in several types, with the primary four being:
Counterweight: consists of a built-in counterweight system which keeps it stable
Side loaders: used in smaller warehouses to transport items from storage to rack
Pallet jack: designed to transport pallets within a warehouse and is easy to use
Warehouse: ideally used in warehouses to move supplied shipments and products
Before you opt for a forklift, ensure that you choose the one that aligns with your needs, like the size, volume, and weight of the items.
14. Electric Rope Shovels
Electric rope shovels are generally used only in mining sites since they can withstand harsh working conditions. Because they use electricity for running, there is much less risk of wear and tear developing over time. So, this machine's maintenance and replacement costs aren’t as high with proper care. Most modern machines have energy-efficient features that make them long-lasting and easy to use.
15. Off-highway Trucks
Off-highway trucks are similar to dump trucks that offer hauling lowers for heavy-duty work. Due to this, they are often used in mining sites, quarries, and other similar industrial projects that need proper transportation of bulk construction materials.
These trucks can transport twice the number of loose materials, like stone, soil, etc. compared to a conventional truck. Based on your project, you can invest in an off-highway truck with more than one dump bucket for increased efficiency.
16. Scissor Lifts
An aerial scissor lift is an elevated, mobile construction platform that can be used as a safer and more robust alternative to a conventional ladder. Since they comprise steel, struts, and several cross beams, they are sturdier and can support the weight of more than one worker. They can also be used to carry professional and DIY tools, paint cans, materials, etc.
They are ideally used for:
Warehouse storage
Material handling
Stockroom storage
Commercial building maintenance
Construction projects
Investing in a scissor lift will be beneficial if your workspace consists of any hard-to-reach places.
17. Truck Crane
A truck crane is a truck with a self-propelled crane attached to it for lifting and moving debris, sand, and other loose materials from one place to another. They comprise two parts - the lower component, which consists of the chassis or the undercarriage, and the upper component, consisting of the crane.
These components are attached to a turntable that allows the crane to move 180 degrees or 360 degrees.
18. Pile Driving Machine
A pile driving machine, also called a pile driver, is generally used in the construction industry to install a pile into the ground and is similar to a pile boring machine. Pile drivers can install precast piles into the ground without excavating the area first.
It lifts the pile, places it in the correct position, and forces it into the ground up to the desired depth. Additional weights can also be placed on top of the piles to help go deeper into the ground.
When these weights are raised to the highest point with the help of diesel or hydraulics, they are released quickly. This results in the weight hitting the pile and pushing it deeper into the ground.
19. Skid Steer Loaders
Skid steer loaders are versatile machines that can be used for various small-scale and large-scale jobs. They are commonly found in most construction sites as they are compatible with various attachments. Additionally, a skid steer loader helps complete the construction or demolition work safely and quickly.
Some of the uses of a skid steer loader include -
Land clearing
Forestry
Site cleaning
Demolition
Road work
Landscaping
Farming
Excavation
Like most heavy construction equipment, these machines are available in three sizes; small, medium, and large.
20. Wheel Tractor Scraper
A wheel tractor scraper is used mainly for construction, mining, or as earth-moving equipment. The back of the machine consists of a vertical moving hopper along with a sharp horizontal front edge. This hopper can be raised or lowered using a hydraulic lift system.
When you lower the hopper, its sharp edge digs into the ground and fills it with soil. Once filled, the hopper is lifted and closed with a vertical blade, also known as an apron.
Wheel tractor scrapers help move the contents to the delivery or constitution site. To unload the contents, the apron is lifted, and the rear panel of the hopper is moved forward, thus dropping the soil.
21. Feller Bunchers
Though rarely talked about when it comes to heavy equipment, the feller bunchers make harvesting and gathering load materials effortless. Additionally, they make transporting logs from one place to another much more manageable.
These machines are equipped with blades that can cut through multiple trees quickly and arrange them in an orderly fashion for easy pickup. The logs are then transported to a construction site for further processing.
22. Concrete Mixer
As the name suggests, a concrete mixer is a specially designed truck that allows for mixing and transporting concrete to the construction site. Initially, these trucks are filled with several dry materials and water, after which the mixing begins and continues until the delivery is complete.
Apart from mixing on the way, these trucks can be loaded with concrete that has already been mixed at a plant. Since concrete can dry up and harden, maintaining its watery consistency is essential. This is where concrete mixers come into play, keeping the concrete runny until it’s delivered.
23. Utility Vehicles
Utility vehicles, also known as UTVs, are small, motorized vehicles that can transport and haul materials. In terms of function, they are similar to standard trucks and look like sports vehicles. However, despite their smaller sizes, these machines are a staple in most, if not all, construction sites.
They are helpful for various purposes, including:
Hauling materials from one place to another
Farming projects
Landscaping projects
Safe and enclosed transportation
Easy hauling through narrow work areas
Since these machines are an essential component of several construction projects, it is necessary to ensure your machine is both durable and comfortable. Modern-day UTVs have several advantages, such as ergonomic seats, quiet operation, more space, adjustable steering columns, etc.
24. Trenchers
Trenchers, also known as trenching machines, are used to excavate ground trenches for laying cables, pipelines, drainage systems, etc.
These machines come in two different types; chain trenchers and wheeled trenchers. The former consists of a long arm fixed to the machine, where you can find a digging chain. Wheeled trenchers, on the other hand, consist of a metal wheel and digging teeth around it, and the metal wheel can be polished with the help of an angle grinder.
Both options are available in tracked as well as wheeled forms but a wheeled trencher is more practical for excavating hard soil ground.
25. Tower Cranes
Tower cranes are a pretty common sight in construction projects and demolitions. They are fixed cranes used to hoist materials and people, especially when constructing tall buildings.
Heavy objects such as steel trusses, pre-stressed concrete blocks, frames, etc., can be lifted easily to impressive heights with a tower crane. Tower cranes have four components; mast, jib, counter job, and operator cabin. The mast is the vertical supporting tower that can lift heavy materials, and the jib is the operating arm.
A counter jib is an opposite arm that carries counterweights on the back of the crane, while the operator cabin is for controlling the crane.
26. Boom Lifts
A boom lift, also known as a cherry picker or a basket crane, is a heavy machinery used mainly as an aerial lift. Boom lifts are commonly used to enable workers to access areas that are otherwise unreachable and higher up.
Though they are often used in construction sites and industrial settings, they are not limited to these areas. Due to its versatility, a boom lift can be used in several fields including:
Construction
Painting
Forestry
Fire fighting
Farming
Harvesting
Window cleaning
Boom lifts come in various types, the two main options being articulating and telescoping. Depending on the size of the machine and the platform, these lifts can accommodate more than one worker at a time.
27. Towable Light Towers
These are the perfect solution for construction workers who have had to race with the sun to finish an outdoor project. Light towers comprise a group of powerful lights connected to the top of a vertical beam.
Solar panels or power generators often power these lights. Additionally, they are pretty portable, so you can move them from one site to another without having to worry about working without lights.
Most importantly, they keep workers at the site safe and increase the work hours in a day for an important project.
28. Wheel Loaders
Wheel loaders generally comprise a front-loading bucket that can be used to transport dirt and debris from the construction site. Compared to a compact track loader, these machines have much more durable wheels, making navigating and driving across the workplace effortless.
Several wheel loader attachments can make the machine more adaptable to your needs. These include:
Snowblowers
Cold planers
Asphalt cutters
Trenchers
Stump grinders
29. Carry Deck Crane
Carry deck cranes are a smaller and mobile version of a crane with a platform that can rotate 360 degrees. The deck, or operating platform, lies on top of four wheels, with a control panel and steering wheel to control and move the crane.
Since a carry deck crane cannot travel significant distances, it is commonly used for lifting or transporting heavy materials within proximity of a worksite.
30. Telescopic Cranes
Telescopic cranes are heavy construction equipment that work like regular cranes but are more compact. They have a boom in which multiple hydraulic cylinders are attached, all placed inside each other. This allows the boom to expand and contract the crane's length, similar to a telescope.
Most of these cranes are attached to tracks that allow them to move from one place to another, which makes them ideal for short-term jobs.
Types Of Heavy Construction Equipment Final Words
All types of heavy construction equipment make the job a lot easier for engineers and construction workers. However, it is not necessary that one project will require all thirty of these machines.
The best thing to do is to identify the demands of your project and use heavy equipment that aligns with your needs. Keep in mind that your focus should be on heavy-duty finding machines that make the work easier, are durable, and safe to use in the workplace.
While modern electric machinery is slowly taking over, hand planes are still doing well, and you can easily find them in woodworking shops.
These were initially a part of Japanese carpentry and would be maintained and passed on for generations. The simple tool would be kept clean as a symbol of a good craftsman. In fact, the Kanna is even found today in certain places, and it is the traditional form of hand planes.
But today, multiple varieties are sold in different shapes and sizes. You can choose one, depending on the work process and the size of the wood pieces you are working with.
Moving on, we will take you through the top 19 types of hand planes and will explain how to use each of them. Just make sure you check the length of the products and their blades to understand the difference in how they function.
So, without further ado, let us dive in!
Types Of Hand Planes & How to Use Them
Before we begin with the 19 different types, the essential parts will be discussed. This is to ensure that you get complete knowledge about every part and can understand the differences among the various options.
Parts That You Need To Know About
Although most hand planes flaunt a simple design, they can be complicated when it comes to functioning. Hence, it becomes difficult to replace them with modern machines. In this section, we will discuss the standard components that serve various essential functions.
Body
As you can already guess, this is the central part of a hand plane that makes the core framework. Usually, it consists of a wooden or metallic frame with other components attached and sealed to it. The body is always made of sturdy materials to prevent any forms of damage and to keep the other parts safe.
Blade
Next is the blade, capable of all kinds of shaving, slicing, and cutting activities. The blade or the cutting mechanism is usually shaped like a rectangle and has a beveled tip.
This will either be facing upwards or downwards, determining the use. At times, it also sticks out to provide better cuts, while some are designed to stay inside and slice better.
Chip Breaker
The chip breaker sits on top of the blade and plays a crucial role in cutting wood chips into smaller pieces. It works well with wood chips produced by the blade and the breaker breaks them up to prevent any form of clogging.
Knob
The knob is generally not found in smaller hand planes, but they are a part of medium to big-sized options. This will allow one to use both hands while working, and that is required for bigger wood pieces. You will find the part located near the front of the blade.
Frog
The frog refers to a seat that blades sit on, and it is designed to hold the blade in place. It can come with levers and knobs, allowing one to adjust the angle and orientation of the blade.
Lever Cap
This fits on top of the blade and will protect it from outside forces. A lever cap is a part dedicated to safety, which allows you to store your plane easily without damaging the toolbox or drawer.
Mouth
The mouth is the slot-like opening, present in every sole and it is a very crucial part of a plane. It will help the blade protrude out, but this is not applicable for chisel planes.
Tote
The tote will help you hold a hand plane and is generally placed on the rear side. But this is absent in finger planes as they are small enough for you to hold the sole itself.
Sole
The sole is present on the bottom of a plane and will keep it straight against any surface that you may be working with. There is also a slot in the sole to help keep the blade assembly in place.
If you are a DIY enthusiast looking for a compact and efficient device, then the block plane will serve you well. It is known to work wonderfully and can be easily controlled by beginners.
What’s more, it offers a hoard of benefits, and you can use it to shape, cut, grain, and chamfer wood. The versatility offered is impressive, and we were able to use it with one hand too.
The one-handed operation makes it an incredible finish tool that is also cost-effective. Being affordable for all, you will find local woodworkers using it.
That’s not all; as there are 2 types of block planes, which include the standard angle and the low-angle version. The standard one features a blade with a bevel facing upwards at 20 degrees. On the other hand is a pocket-sized miniature version of this, making it easy to carry around.
Bench planes can be very versatile and can range from 5 to 30 inches in length. They are very popular among those who work with wood a lot and are known to be a crucial part of the work process.
Moreover, it has a sharp blade that sits on a pitch and is placed at 45 degrees. The bevel side faces downwards and cones with a cap iron with which it is reinforced. This prevents clogging of any kind and will help in its continuous and smooth functioning.
Moving on to the types, there are many different types, and each has a different size. But the most popular ones are smoothing, jointer, and fore planes.
Next, if you are looking for a product for detailed work, then the bullnose will be a great choice. It is small and measures 3- 4.5 inches, making it perfect for use with rabbets that are smaller than the piece.
There is a small metal nose in the front of the blade, and that acts as a natural stop. Hence it is required to use rabbets that are smaller in size.
Moreover, the blades are wider than the body, ensuring smooth functioning. It can be used to cut along the grain and the end grain.
One major problem that beginners face is that they cannot afford to buy the entire set of special tools for crafting. This leaves many processes incomplete, and you can often not work with many objects of various shapes and sizes because of this.
However, that is exactly where combination planes step in. These are not used a lot, but they will let you replace the cutter making it perfect for a wide number of jobs. You will get the benefits of a rabbet and a molding plane both from this product.
This is a very simple option that will allow workers to work with perfection. They do not have any form of guard on the front side of the blade. This makes it easier to cut and clean until the edges which blades with guards cannot reach. So, if you are looking for creating intricate designs, this might help you out.
Finger plane
If you have to work on thin boards, then finger planes are perfect. These have narrow widths and are made for highly specialized jobs. This includes making a violin where these can be used to clean the joints after having glued them well.
Now the downside here is that you cannot adjust them in any way. It proves to be a problem, especially in an artisan’s workshop where there can be soles of several kinds.
Hence, use this for straightforward jobs, and you should have no problems with it. We will suggest measuring the thickness of boards that need to be worked on before proceeding.
While finger planes cannot be used for curved soles, the compass plane is specially designed to take care of that. This is a very unusual type and is also known as a circular plane. It works on curved surfaces and will allow you to smoothen them well.
If you are looking for the jack of all trades, the jack plane is what you would want. True to its name, this offers a lot of versatility and will help you remove twists and warps in no time at all. They can also be used for truing boards of all sizes.
Now generally, a jack plane is 12 to 17 inches long, and you can purchase a specific size depending on the use. They are often used by artisans as a replacement tool or when there are a limited number of tools.
This is one of the longest bench planes on this list, and it is 14 to 20 inches in length. The length makes it indispensable to professionals working with wood. This is usually used on rough boards, and it can remove excess material fast. The length will let you straighten a workpiece, and that adds to its benefits.
Next up is a tool that is very popular among the Japanese and is almost religiously taken care of. It is cleaned and sharpened by every Japanese artisan each day before work begins and is kept with care. Plus, the Japanese are known to pass it down to the next generation of artisans, and these stay as sharp and strong as ever.
Moving on to the build, this one is a great example of fine art when it comes to Japanese woodcraft. They are simple to look at and have everything that is needed to call it a hand plane.
There is a polished and beautiful oak body, a chip breaker pin, and a blade that is held in place by the pin. A mallet tap is also present and that can be used to make adjustments to the blade.
What’s more, the Japanese plane is supposed to provide one with superior control and complete accuracy. This makes it a great match for Western tools, although it is a lot simpler and minimalistic.
If you are looking for something for straightening jobs, then the jointer plane might be a perfect choice. It is known to be the longest one among the lot and has a length of 22 to 30 inches. You can use it for large pieces which are otherwise difficult to deal with.
Molding planes work excellently well when it comes to making furniture and other forms of craft. They are designed to work on edge trims and molding and will help you take care of the corners.
And that’s not all; this is known to be very durable and can last for years. Some are even used after having crossed 100 years, and that surely makes it cost-effective.
As the name suggests, this works the best in flattening rough surfaces and for straightening edges. It is long and is pretty wide, and it makes absolute straight cuts. Also, because of the length and width, it can cover a lot of area in less amount of time. This makes it perfect for a large amount of work, and professionals often choose this.
Rabbet Plane
If you are looking to cut rabbet joints, then the rabbet plane will be very useful. Not only has it been around for centuries, but it can also make perfect square cuts, making it indispensable at times. This belongs to the specialized tools category and is used by professionals generally.
Now, if you are wondering how it makes absolute square cuts, look at the blades which protrude from the sides a little. This prevents binding up, and you will be getting clear cuts.
Also known as a grooving plane, this includes a depth gauge and a fence that will allow you to cut rabbets and grooves. This works well because of the angle of the blade, and that is fixed at a 35-degree angle.
Coming to its usage, this works well in cutting tongue, window sashes, and floorboards. If you are into making houses, then this could prove to be very beneficial.
While all the other options are similar in a way, this one stands miles apart and is a category of its own. This was actually designed to help in ripping, and you can use it to rip and trim materials quickly. Many use this on large boards to trim it down and bring it to the required size.
This is a rare tool to see these days and has been vastly replaced by modern equipment. However, it used to work very well and would replace the need to have a chisel. It is uniquely designed, and many consider the shape to be pretty uncommon.
The strange shape ensures that one can flatten the underside of depressions in furniture and helps in further detailing with this. You can also flatten the corners and give it a proper finished look.
The shoulder plane is very similar to the bullnose plane and can be used for detailed jobs. It is around 8 inches in length and comes with a long nose. Since the nose is long, it helps in keeping it flat. This makes it perfect for use with tenon joints and shoulders of rabbets where you need to cut and trim parts.
Moving on, these were used a lot in the early 1800s, and today, you might find this in local woodworking stores and with local artisans. However, bigger bodies have already shifted to modern machines as it is easier and less time-consuming to do shoulder work with them.
Now, although bullnoses and shoulder planes are seen to be very similar, bullnose ones do not work well with the shoulders, and there lies the difference.
We have come to the final type, and this one is used for smoothing surfaces. Just like the name suggests, these smoothing planes work very well and will get the surface ready for finishing. These range from 5 to 10 inches and can take care of small to moderate sizes of wood. You can also use it for high spots that need to be leveled.
How To Use Hand Planes?
Hand planes are used to smoothen a surface and make it ready for finishing. To use this, you will have to slide it across the surface while you apply pressure. Because of the pressure, the blade will slice through wood like a chisel. The shavings will then be passed out through the slit or its mouth.
Next, the chip breaker will then cut these slices into smaller pieces so that the mouth is not clogged. Remember, the finishing will depend on the size of a plane. Bigger options will provide the roughest cuts, while smaller ones will provide a smoother surface.
Hand Plane Buying Guide
While every kind of hand plane has its own advantages and disadvantages, you will have to select one based on your requirements. This section contains factors that you need to remember before purchasing to ensure that you are on the right track. Read on to know all about them.
Type Of Body
The two materials that are generally used for this purpose are metal and wood. Metal bodies are heavier but are very resistant to wear and tear. These are not easily damaged and last for long. You can easily work with abrasive wood, and the body will not see scratches.
On the other hand, the wooden ones are lighter and easier to work with, especially for those who are going to use them for long hours. These work best with professional woodworkers who work with intricate detailing. The wooden sole will also not leave any marks on the surface while working, which metal ones might do.
Blade Thickness
If the blade is very thin, then there is a chance that it might flex during the work process leading to uneven ridges. You might have to do the work over again with another piece because of this. These work better with small surfaces, which need little work.
On the other hand, thicker blades are very resistant to flexing and will not move out of the way. These offer clean ridges and cuts and will provide you with a smoother finish.
Blade Angle
The angle of a blade can determine the effect that it will have on a wooden piece. In the case of lower angles to the workpiece, you will be able to cut end grains perfectly. This is because it will be slicing wood instead of shaving it.
And if blades are placed at very high angles, then they are best suited for burrs and exotic timber, which usually has a very complicated grain pattern.
On the other hand, most planes have their blades at a 45-degree angle which will allow working with most softwoods and hardwoods. If this is your first time working with this, it is best to choose this last option.
Final Words
When it comes to price, hand planes are available at different price points. If the cost is high, an excess amount is generally charged for high-quality metal and the precision parts that it contains.
This varies with different options and the brands that make them. Handcrafted objects are much costlier as you will be paying for the intricate handwork.
Moving on, we hope that you have a clear understanding of the different types of planes in the market. Understand your requirements before you proceed to purchase one. And we will suggest reading the manual or watching YouTube videos before you begin.
We will end this guide here, and you can tell us about your favorite kind of hand planes in the comment section below.
Most of us are all too familiar with glue, especially the ones we used for school projects. But not many people know about the different types of glue out there.
Glue is one of the oldest-known substances available to man. In fact, there are several instances of natural glue-like substances in the world - from tree sap to manmade glue created by mixing the bone extracts of animals with other substances.
In our modern world, we use a highly processed version of glue that is mostly made in factories. It is still required for everyday jobs like carpentry, plumbing, shoe-making, and many others.
In this guide, we will dive into the different types of glue you can find today. We will also talk about the uses and popularity of these glue variants.
So, without further ado, let's begin!
Different Types Of Glue
We don't usually think about glue on a daily basis - that is, until we need to use it. This seemingly mundane substance is extremely useful; it (literally) keeps things from falling apart. While most of us are familiar with white glue (used for arts and crafts) and hot glue (used for more powerful adhesion jobs), there are over a dozen more varieties in the world.
White Craft Glue
When you think of the word “glue,” this is probably one of the first images you see in your mind. The white, lightweight, water-based glue is most commonly found in every artist and crafter's kit. It helps join porous materials together like paper, cardboard, sheets, and even some types of cloth.
This kind of glue has almost zero toxicity, making it ideal for children to use. It is the most common type of glue found in schools and arts and crafts stores. Moreover, it is easy to clean up after an accidental spill. It does not stick to your clothes or even your skin in a way that is impossible to remove, thereby making it a safe option for kids.
An important characteristic of this glue is that since it is water-based, it requires at least 24 hours to set completely. During this time, the objects being glued must be kept tightly together. Once a period of time has passed, the strength of this glue can be appreciated.
That being said, most projects involving white craft glue take just a couple of minutes (or an hour at max) to dry. It goes without saying that white craft glue is not useful in applications that require water resistance.
Wood Glue
Wood glue, as the name suggests, is designed to act as an adhesive between wooden pieces or wooden surfaces. It is typically yellow and is made of the same vinyl acetate polymers as white craft glue. However, wood glue is also available in white or transparent shades if a specific kind of work requires it.
Wood glue is far more rigid than white craft glue - its inherent rigidity makes it easier to sand. It is more waterproof than craft glue, yet, it cannot be used in applications that require complete water resistance.
Polyurethane glue, epoxy, and hide glue are different types of wood glue. The various types can be used for different purposes, so it is essential to read the labels before purchasing wood glue for specific jobs. The different types of wood glues work best with specific types of wood, so be sure to research this thoroughly before purchasing.
Some of the primary characteristics of wood glue are its rigidity, superior strength, moisture resistance, and inherent gap-filling abilities. Wood glue is used to make beds, furniture, decorative wooden items, tables, chairs, etc.
Wood glue requires a couple of hours to set completely but is exceptionally reliable once set. It is a must-have for any type of carpentry work.
Fabric Glue
Although white craft glue is sometimes used to hold fabrics together, this job is better suited for fabric glue. Polyvinyl acetate (PVA) is a popular type of white fabric glue often used for mending upholstery or making clothes.
Fabric glue stays flexible even after it dries completely, making it ideal for clothes and other fabrics. Moreover, it is waterproof, enabling you to wash and launder the fabric without worrying about the glue (or pieces of fabric) coming off.
Depending on what kind of fabric you want to stick (and some other factors), there are various types of fabric glues to choose from. While most fabric glues resemble white craft glue, others come in a webbing form. These have to be melted before use. They are excellent for DIY projects and are very popular amongst people who enjoy making their own clothes or giving them a new spin.
Super Glue
Super glue is also known as Cyanoacrylate adhesive. This is yet another common type of glue that most of us have used for various adhesive projects. The glue is known to dry within seconds, or sometimes minutes, depending on the objects being glued together. However, once it is dry, it becomes transparent and is extremely rigid and waterproof.
This glue is called 'super glue' because it works within seconds and is almost impossible to 'unstick' once it is dry. Joining materials like wood, leather, ceramics, plastic, glass, and even metal is made possible with the help of super glue.
The chemical compound Cyanoacrylate is known for its quick-drying and' super bonding' abilities. When applied on two dry surfaces and held together tightly, the objects can be stuck together within seconds - and will not come off, even with extreme force or pressure.
Super glue is very versatile and is often used by individuals to glue together all kinds of objects - toys, broken handles, furniture, plastic, etc. However, it dries very quickly and can end up sticking your fingers together, so be very cautious when using it!
Hot Glue
Hot glue is most commonly found in 'guns' or 'hot glue guns' and has become a huge rage, especially on social media. Hot glue guns contain heating elements that efficiently melt a solid form of glue before ejecting it from a 'gun.' They are typically used for DIY projects and 'hacks,' hence, their rising popularity.
The 'glue' comes in the form of long, solid sticks that look like glow sticks. These sticks are inserted into the gun. On pressing the 'trigger,' the glue stick is melted and squeezed out - this can be used for various projects like arts and crafts, handiwork, wood and carpentry work, etc.
Once the glue dries up, it returns to its solid state. This is what effectively holds the materials together. Hot glue is very tough and rigid and has a variety of uses. Its ease of use, quick-drying abilities, and high strength are what make it such a popular tool. In fact, hot glue can be used to stick almost everything except metal.
One of the most unique and fascinating applications of hot glue is the ability to form patterns and textures with it. Using the 'gun' as a tool, squeeze the hot glue in patterns of your choice, adding glitter, colors, beads, and stickers to create a fun DIY item. That being said, it is not safe for children and is best used under adult supervision.
Pressure Sensitive Adhesive (PSA)
Pressure Sensitive Adhesives are found in two primary forms - glue dots and sheets. They can be used for a multitude of projects such as simple sticking or adhesive jobs (sticking notes to fridges instead of using magnets, sticking photographs on walls).
PSA is used for various lightweight objects like paper, glass, plastic, and even metal.
Epoxy
More often than not, epoxy glues are two-part systems sold as a single unit. The first part of the glue contains resin, while the second part contains a hardener. There are different types of epoxy glues available for various purposes - multi-purpose epoxy or epoxy for marble, wood, plastic, etc.
The composition of epoxy varies depending on its uses. A certain kind of epoxy works best for typical household adhesion jobs, while a different type would be better suited for more extreme or harsh outdoor environments.
This kind of glue has superior cohesive strength, and durability and has excellent gap-filling abilities. It has the ability to penetrate microscopic holes and join surfaces together with superior strength and hold. The mixture generally needs to be prepared according to the kind of surface you wish to bond. Depending on the application, the proportion of the mixture varies.
Epoxy has the inherent ability to cure fast and also exhibits a range of flexibility, making it ideal for all kinds of bonding.
Spray Glue
Spray glue is a contact, multi-purpose adhesive that is intended to be applied on large surface areas. As the name suggests, this type of glue comes in a spray bottle, making it convenient to spread on large surfaces without hassle. One of the most important things to keep in mind when applying this glue is to use it in a well-ventilated room.
Depending on the material it is sprayed on, the glue can exhibit varying degrees of bond and durability. It can be used for various household fixes, craft projects, and even office applications. The glue works efficiently with paper, fabrics, foam boards, plastic, felt, and more.
Spray glue is often used to adhere photos to foam boards; however, it can be used for various other adhesions.
Polyurethane
Polyurethane is a multi-purpose adhesive that comes in both one-part and two-part systems. The substance is used in various types of glues and adhesives but is also sold under its generic name.
This glue is marine grade, so it is completely waterproof and withstands exceptionally high tensile strength. It can be used to bond a multitude of materials from wood to rubber, ceramics, glass, plastic, concrete, and steel.
That being said, polyurethane takes a few hours to cure and build strength. Typically, it takes about six to eight hours to completely bond two surfaces. However, once it is cured, the strength and durability of the object are near impossible to break. Dried polyurethane glue can be sanded with ease.
Although this glue is extremely strong, it can be removed using various solvents like acetone and mineral spirits.
Glue Pen
Glue pens are commonly used in households as well as for children's art and craft projects. They are available in small tubes and come in a 'pen' form that is convenient to use and mess-free. Upon drying, they form a clear, transparent adhesive.
Glue pens generally come with a variety of tip sizes that allow users to fill in small or large cracks and gaps. The glue is quick-drying and leaves a clean finish once it is done. These glue pens can be super convenient for everyday adhesion jobs, but care must be taken to choose the right tip for the right job.
Glue Dots
As the name tells you, glue dots are solidified adhesives that come in different forms. You can buy them in rolls, sheets, or even dispenser forms. They are incredibly convenient to apply and are removable, making them ideal for use around the house.
These glue dots are often used for minor sticking projects - sticking photos, sheets of paper, lightweight plastics, etc. As they do not contain excessive rigidity or strength, they are not appropriate for more heavy-duty sticking jobs like sticking metal, heavy plastics, ceramics, steel, wood, etc.
That being said, you may apply glue dots on any of the surfaces mentioned above to stick lightweight objects on them (such as paper). Keep in mind that these dots are easy to remove and can only create long-lasting bonds for lightweight objects.
Many people often use these glue dots to create patterns or texture, adding dimension to an otherwise plain, mundane surface.
Glue Sticks
Glue sticks are among the most common types of glue found in most homes, schools, and art centers. They are used for minor sticking projects such as joining sheets of paper, foam, and sometimes even fabric. However, in many cases, the quality of the glue is not very high. Thus, you may find earlier glued objects coming loose after some time.
Glue sticks come in a standard, cylindrical roll and are found in most arts and crafts kits. They can be used by children safely and will not stick to the skin. It is also easy to loosen the glue by warming it or washing the surface with warm water and soap.
Rubber Cement
Rubber cement is made of elastic polymers such as latex and is typically mixed in solvents (acetone, toluene, hexane, or heptane). There are different types of rubber cement available in the market, depending on your specific requirements.
Like many other types of glue, certain rubber cement may be multi-purpose, while others may be designed for specific materials only. This glue is a type of drying adhesive, which inherently gives it the quick-drying property, fast-evaporating and solidifying on drying. Once it dries, it can form a rigid and tough bond that is flexible.
Glitter Glue
Glitter glue is immensely popular amongst children, thanks to its colorful and glittery appeal. It is most commonly used in arts and crafts projects by kids but can also be used by adults to tap into their creative sides. This glue typically comes in liquid form in tubes, which can be squeezed and applied on any surface.
Glitter glue is quite similar to glue pens in the way that they are used. On drying, it leaves a semi-translucent, glittery, and slightly colored appearance. However, these glues may come in a metallic finish as well, making them very versatile and ideal for DIY projects.
The slender, cylindrical packaging makes this glue very easy to handle, especially for children. It dries quickly and is generally nontoxic. The best part about this glue is how easily it can be removed using any common solvent. In some cases, the glue can even be peeled off.
Although glitter glue is very cheap, it is easy to make at home using ordinary craft glue. Mixing colors and glitter in a container will create glitter glue effortlessly. It can be a fun project to make the glue at home with kids, and using the glue is even more fun because of its vivid colors.
The Right Way To Apply Glue On Any Surface
Although there are more than a dozen types of glue, their applications are relatively similar. Depending on your project requirements as well as your budget, you can purchase different brands and types of glue. Here are a few things you need to know about correctly applying glue.
Clean The Surface
No matter what the surface is - paper, wood, plastic, etc., it is imperative to clean it before you begin. Any dirt, dust, or moisture on the surface can inhibit the glue from bonding properly and sticking to the two surfaces. Moreover, if there is dirt or stains on the surface, and you use transparent glue, the dirt will show up underneath, ruining the aesthetics of your project.
Keep A Cloth Or Cardboard At Hand
No matter how careful you try to be, accidents can happen. Glue can be very messy, especially the kind that is quick-drying. Ensure that you keep a disposable cloth or a piece of cardboard at hand when you are working with any kind of glue. This will help you clean up any mess you make.
You can also keep a solvent close to you to use in case of accidental spills on your skin or clothes. Fortunately, most glues will come off relatively quickly with the help of a suitable solvent.
Work In A Well-Ventilated Room
While many types of glue (such as craft glue) are safe to use in a closed room and are nontoxic, others may not be so. It is best to work in a well-ventilated space when working with glue so that you don't breathe toxic fumes.
In case a child is playing with glue for DIY projects, it is crucial always to keep them under adult supervision. Children are prone to putting glue in their mouths or getting it on their hair and skin. Although it is not hazardous, it can be challenging to remove the glue from their skin and hair. Ingested glue can be dangerous, so be sure to stay safe.
Read The Directions
Not many people think of reading instructions when using glue. However, this can result in mistakes if the glue is misapplied. Different types of glue (and different manufacturers) have different instructions on how to use their glue.
It is best to read the manufacturer's instructions when using any new type of glue, especially those that need to be mixed (like epoxy).
Close The Bottle After Use
Although children are more prone to making this error, many adults do it too. Often people leave their containers or tubes of glue open while using them. However, this can effectively weaken the adhesive and cause it to spoil. Ensure that you always close the lid or cap while using glue and store it in a cool, dry place when you are not using it.
Conclusion
With so many different types of glue available in the market, how do you know which one you should buy?
Well, the choice is simple. Depending on your requirements, you will have to choose between the different types of glue, while keeping their applications in mind. Ensure that you research and determine which glue is best used for specific projects to make better and long-term decisions.
We hope our guide helped you learn something new and interesting about the different types of glues. Always stay safe when using any type of adhesive and use the right kind for specific jobs.
Designing your space by making it more valuable and desirable gives you a home that feels like a vacation spot, every day. And with the right fireplace, you can put your feet up, relax and get cozy with your favorite book.
The glow and warmth from a fire create a relaxing effect, which not only provides physical warmth but also emotional comfort. A fireplace is not just a beacon of warmth and goodness during winter nights, as it can help to alter the entire ambiance, interior design, and the value of your home.
You can find a variety of options for indoor fireplaces ranging from gas burning, wood burning, ethanol, and even electric ones.
Types of Fireplaces
Are you confused? Well! Without an epic guide for understanding the different features of a fireplace, anyone can be in that situation. We’ve put together this piece to help you scout the way to the right fireplace for your humble abode!
Exact percentages of the table above are as follows: Corner: 5.22%, Hanging: 1.20%, Ribbon: 6.95%, Standard: 77.87%, Two-Sided: 5.74%, Wood-Stove: 3.01%
What are the mounting options for a fireplace?
After you select the mounting type, it will not get challenging to pick your favorite fuel type. All of the available mounting options do not go well with all fuel types (E.g., hanging a wood-burning fireplace on the wall, is not the best idea, because of its massive size), so you must be careful while selecting a design.
The best mounting options are a free-standing fireplace, built-In fireplace, hanging, wall-mounted, traditional, two-sided, and hanging fireplace.
Free-Standing Fireplace
A free-standing fireplace has a modern look, while they are designed to emulate the look of your traditional built-in fireplace. It usually comes with a mantel. Depending on the fuel type, the free-standing fireplace can either be attached to the ceiling (if ventilation is required) or wall or entirely free-standing.
The free-standing electric design doesn’t require ventilation, so you can quickly move this fireplace from one location to another. With free-standing gas fireplaces, you will need a ventilation source or even a gas line so you can’t move it around.
For a free-standing fireplace, there is plenty of design that you can choose from; ranges from rustic to contemporary to modern. You can also get them in numerous different sizes and shapes. Also, you have the option for a free-standing fireplace that comes like a piece of furniture with a built-in fireplace. The other available option for you is the entertainment center.
In the entertainment center, you’ll get a built-in fireplace that is located on the bottom, which is mostly an electric one. And you can place your television on top of the mantel without any fear of damage. If you’re living in a small-sized apartment or home, the built-in furniture fireplaces will be the most suitable option for you.
Built-In Fireplace Insert
The fireplace insert should be placed in a built-in traditional fireplace. If you already have a conventional open-hearth fireplace, you can slide your gel, gas, electric, or ethanol insert into the current opening.
It's an excellent way for you to convert your high-maintenance wood-burning fireplace. It can be replaced with a more energy-efficient and low-maintenance fireplace. Your fireplace insert will occupy the current space, which makes it a great option when you don’t want any reconstruction in your home.
Wall Mounted Fireplace
This is another alternative for people living in small-sized apartments or homes. The design of a wall-mounted fireplace is perfect for outdoor spaces, which is why it’s facing increasing demand. Few wall-mounted fireplaces are self-contained, and you can quickly move it from one room to another.
You’ll be getting two options for the wall-mounted fireplace such as- one that utilizes a chimney and one that doesn’t require ventilation. Whichever type you opt for will depend on the fuel that you’ll be using. You can find tons of sizes, shapes, and styles for a wall-mounted fireplace. The popular design at present is the long type that is known as a ribbon fireplace.
A wall-mounted fireplace is mostly used as a centerpiece in most homes. You can get one either with or without a mantel; it entirely depends on the look you prefer.
Traditional Open-Hearth Fireplace
A traditional open-hearth fireplace is mostly used along with your wood-burning fireplace. It is built into the wall of your home, and the materials generally used for making it are stone or brick. You’ll need to have a chimney or flue for ventilation purposes. This is one of the most expensive high-priced mounting options.
It comes with a lot of construction work. Most people opt for it when their homes have already been constructed for a traditional open-hearth fireplace, without the trouble of having to build one.
Hanging
The design of this fireplace might not be preferred by all, as it comes with a modern, innovative design. It is hung from the ceiling, and it creates an eye-catching focal point in your home. You can also use it for decorative purposes as it works perfectly for a beautiful interior structure.
Tabletop Fireplace
A tabletop fireplace is a portable super-lightweight fireplace, which you can quickly move around the house. It’s a great fireplace that you can use for heating your outdoor spaces.
You can just set your fireplace on a tabletop as you enjoy a winter evening with your friends in the backyard. It sets an enjoyable, warm, and cozy vibe around the entire space.
Two-Sided Fireplace
The two-sided fireplace also comes with a futuristic vibe, while two rooms can be heated at the same time. You can use this playful design to work as a divider between your two large living spaces. You get to enjoy the dancing flames from both sides of your living rooms.
It has a double-sided wood range which creates an unparalleled ambiance for your center space. The gas fuel type is mostly preferred for these double-sided fireplaces.
What is the fuel type of the fireplace?
This should be the first question that comes to your mind when you’re buying a fireplace. Whichever fuel type you select should have an excellent mounting option with an attractive overall design. You need to bear in mind that the design of the fireplace is suitable for the location where you plan to place it.
The popular options for fuel types are given below:
Wood-Burning Fireplace
This is one of the age-old traditional fireplace types. Most of us have been using wood-burning fireplaces to stay warm for decades. As you’re reminded of a fireplace, the first image that pops up in your mind is of a fireplace with real wood.
With the name, you can understand that the fuel used here to create heat is wood. You can face a lot of negative aspects with this fireplace apart from the roaring and crackling fire which are preferred by few.
The demand for this fireplace went downhill due to the cost and maintenance aspects of it. You need to get a regular professional cleaning done to your fireplace area. And there is a high expense for installation and wood when you decide to use this fireplace.
However, many people do enjoy using these wood-burning fireplaces, and they love their smoky fragrance. Having this fireplace in your home will give you a cozy, rustic atmosphere. You can get them in various designs, and in recent times you also have the option for a wood-burning stove. This is a great alternative, especially when you don’t have enough space for an entire fireplace.
You can use the wood-burning stove by placing it anywhere in your home, and it will give you the same output as the fireplace. However, for venting out the smoke, you’ll need a pipe and not a chimney, so installation is easy.
Pros
The appearance and beauty of a real fire, the crackling sound, and the smell of the wood
It uses a renewable source of energy
Firewood is one of the most affordable fuels available
Cons
It requires a fireplace
It requires regular cleaning
It does not have any remote to turn the fire on and off
You need the right amount of space to store the wood
Improper maintenance or poor installation can lead to dirty smoke being released from the chimney
The fireplace requires an annual professional inspection
Gas Fireplace
The best alternative to your traditional wood-burning fireplaces has been the gas ones to date. Just like the electric fireplaces, this is also a reasonable option with a pretty easy installation process. If you get a little reconstruction done to your existing chimney and a built-in fireplace, you can install the new built-in options.
You might find gas fireplaces to be quite affordable up-front, while it’s also highly efficient. If you want to save your money from paying different utility bills for heating purposes, then selecting this option will be a great move.
Also, the free-standing gas fireplace which uses a pipe can be a good option for you. With this model, you can install your fireplace in any room that you prefer, without having any set up ready to receive a fireplace. If you’re not prepared to make any changes to your home structure for installing a fireplace, a pipe will be the best option for you.
If you’re opting for the direct-vented model, you’ll need a chimney for ventilation purposes. For you can either use your pre-existing chimney from the wood fireplace or start to construct a new one.
For a ventless model, you’ll not require a pipe, chimney, or vent. It comes with several features which promote an overall safe environment. Even though they burn clean for the most part, but there can be a slight risk with this model as it can emit few contaminants into your home.
The final choice that you need to make while selecting a gas fireplace is the type of gas being used. It can either operate with liquid propane or natural gas. If you’re going for the propane fireplace, you’ll need a propane tank. But, for the natural gas fireplace, you can use the existing gas line.
However, both these options require you to install a line between the fuel source and the fireplace. Overall, a gas fireplace is far more environmentally friendly and convenient than your wood fireplace.
Pros
The supply of fuel is cheaper than using a log
Good thermal power
It takes little effort to run this fireplace
Flexible installation process
Easy control flame
Cons
Rising fuel costs
It requires the connection of natural gas or propane
Gel Fireplace
A gel fireplace is not as popular as a gas or electric fireplace, but it certainly comes with its own set of benefits. The easy installation process is the best characteristic of this fireplace.
You need a can of gel fuel to use this fireplace. This indicates that you don’t need any lines, venting, electrical wires, or even pipes. A gel fireplace is a versatile product, mainly because it’s self-sufficient. It’s pretty lightweight, which makes it easy for you to mount this fireplace on your wall.
The other characteristic that usually stands out in a gel fireplace is that you get a real flame and not a fake one. For creating an actual burn, you need to light the gel fuel with a lighter.
Also, the fuel type that you’re pairing with this kind of flame helps to ensure that your heat output is quite minimal. Getting the gel fuel cans regularly can get expensive. And, we don’t advise you to rely on a gel fireplace for a primary source of heat. However, the gel fireplace models are great for giving an edge to the design of your home.
Pros
It uses a clean-burning fuel as it doesn’t produce any smoke or fumes
It produces heat with real flames, and not with any electrical heating mechanisms
completely heat and fireproof
It has no location restrictions. You can place it anywhere, and it doesn’t require any particular type of ventilation
It is a cost-efficient option, with very little maintenance
It has an excellent decorative value
Cons
It does not emit the right amount of heat
It requires frequent refueling. If you want to burn a fire for the night or afternoon, you’ll have to refuel for two to three times
No flame regulation, you don’t have any way to regulate or monitor the amount of flame that your gel fuel ignites. With gel fuel, it gets more challenging to extinguish the fire
Electric Fireplaces
Electric fireplaces are gradually coming up to be the most popular fuel type that is available. An efficient infrared fireplace is one of the best options that you can select if you’re dead serious about having a quality electric fireplace.
These fireplaces help to increase the temperature level in your home by heating the interior coils with electricity. You’ll find that most models come with an internal fan which helps to distribute the heat throughout your home evenly.
You’ll not get a real flame from an electric fireplace, but they do employ a ‘fake flame.’ This helps to give the fireplace a realistic look and feel of a flame. You’ll also have a crackling ‘fake’ log with your flickering flame to make it appear like a real fire.
The option to turn off your heating element in the electric fireplace model when your room gets too warm is one of the best features. But, you can opt to keep the flickering flame on while the heating element is turned off. And this helps to maintain a beautiful, cozy ambiance.
It even gets better, as you can control the electric fireplace from your chair. With most of the models, you’ll be getting a remote that helps to turn your fireplace on or off. And you get the option to increase or decrease the temperature in that remote.
The main reason why an electric fireplace is a popular choice for many is because of its cost-effectiveness. It’s not just an affordable option, but it has a cheap installation process too as it doesn’t require any venting.
Moreover, unlike gas and wood fireplaces, the electric fireplace comes with no requirement of regular maintenance. You can be free of tasks like cleaning the chimney, chopping wood, or inspecting your gas line.
Also, the other benefit of an electric fireplace is your overall safety, for a home with pets and small children. You can also get these fireplaces customized, with different fire effects and flame.
Pros
Use of electricity, with no production of smoke or ash
Easy installation
Ideal for houses, apartments, and hotels
Cons
It does not create the perfect ambiance of a real fire burning
It is more decorative and less efficient
Ethanol Fireplace
The way a gel and ethanol fireplace tends to work is quite similar. An ethanol fireplace requires liquid bioethanol fuel instead of gel fuel. For an ethanol fireplace, you’ll be getting a burner alone that you need to fill with bioethanol fuel for repeated use. The standard size of the fuel tank is around 2 liters.
You can also adjust the temperature of your fireplace because of the burner characteristic, unlike the gel fireplace. Turning the fireplace on and off also gets relatively simple. Just like your gel fireplace, this is also quite easy to install, but it is not an efficient product. You can’t rely on an ethanol fireplace to heat the entire home.
The other feature that makes it like your gel fireplace is the versatility of this model. It’s a lightweight fireplace that is suitable for your tabletop fireplace or the wall-mounted fireplace. Finally, the demand for ethanol fireplaces is increasing gradually due to the wide variety of designs that you get to choose from.
Pros
No venting is required
The fuel burns clean with zero leftovers( no dirt, no ashes, no crumbs of anything). It doesn’t even produce an oily residue
It has zero-emission. You don’t need to worry about carbon dioxide emissions or other types of harmful airborne fumes
Cons
It can be dangerous if you spill the fuel and it catches fire. For we advise you to invest in premium-quality ethanol burner, that is designed for preventing any spills
It works great for your supplemental source of heat, and not as a primary source
It consumes oxygen, just like the other flame-burning sources of heat. So you should have adequate airflow in your home while using the burner
Different Fireplace Design Options
After you’ve finalized the mounting option and the fuel type, you need to focus on the design of your fireplace.
You can get fireplaces that are available in numerous shapes and sizes. It has been built with a wide variety of materials that have been selected for its functionality and looks. Then you can look into the other additional design features of the fireplace mantel and your flue/chimney (if it’s required).
The combination of these different design elements helps to create the overall aesthetic appeal for your fireplace. It gives you a contemporary, rustic, or a look that lies somewhere in between these two lines.
Styles of Fireplace
When you select a particular form of a fireplace, it’s mainly due to the dimensions and materials that have been used to make this piece. You will get an endless list of fireplace styles, which are ranging from modern to traditional designs.
You need to bear in mind that your mounting option and the fuel type help to showcase the overall style of the fireplace. The wood-burning fireplaces that come with chimneys are often much bigger and more striking than other types of fireplaces.
Contemporary Style Fireplace
This style of fireplace is defined by a universal appeal, which comes with sharp and well-defined lines. You can use them for any home, but it complements the homes that come with equally stylish, chic decor.
Elegantly, you can utilize traditional materials such as stones or bricks to create a fireplace with a contemporary design.
Modern Style Fireplace
With a modern style of fireplace, you can take your contemporary design to a whole new level. In these fireplaces, the preference is more towards modern materials like glass and marble, and they usually lack traditional brick or stone materials.
Modern fireplaces stand out mostly for their well-edged lines and innovative design. You’ll find some of them looking more like a piece of art than your heating appliances.
Traditional Style Fireplace
When you think of a log cabin, the type of fireplace that comes to your mind fits in perfectly with the picture of a conventional fireplace. It’s generally constructed with regular bricks and stones. This style of fireplace dictates a more natural environment with a rustic, cozy ambiance.
The wood-burning variety is one of the standard traditional fireplaces. Moreover, you can choose to equip a gas or electric fireplace insert in place of your wood-burning fireplace.
Fireplace Materials and Finish
The unique design element that makes a fireplace appealing is the material that covers its exterior of it. And this is what you look at first while picking the design that’s suitable for your home. In most homes, you’ll find fireplaces that are made of stone, followed by tiles, bricks, wood, etc.
Some of the most common materials for a fireplace are:
Marble Fireplace
This is the material that most modern fireplaces are made of; you’ll get a high-end look with marble that gives it a full dramatic effect.
Concrete Fireplace
If you’re looking for a fireplace that will give you a classy, industrial atmosphere, you should check out the concrete fireplace. They complement the contemporary furnishing pretty well like how they blend in with loft apartments that have lofted ceilings, wood floors, and plenty of natural light.
Fieldstone Fireplace
With these natural-looking stones, your home will get a rustic, vintage outlook. A fieldstone fireplace helps to create a warm tradition-style feel, which is excellent for dressing up your living room.
Ledge Stone Fireplace
In a ledge stone fireplace, you’ll find small strips of material that are used for creating a contemporary-style fireplace.
Brick with Wood Fireplace
If you want a timeless, traditional style of fireplace, you will like this exposed brick look. It is combined with a wood mantel and wood millwork for creating an upscale, contemporary design.
Plaster Fireplace
In the American Southwest corner, plaster is a typical fireplace material. This is an excellent option for constructing your fireplace, which makes it appear like it’s coming out of your barren walls.
Fireplace Dimensions
The size and shape of your fireplace usually depend on three essential factors:
Mounting option
Fuel type
Location of where you want to place it
A fireplace can span from under two by two feet up to gigantic creations which take up the space of an entire wall with its chimneys spanning two stories. The gas and electric fireplaces are usually towards the smaller end. However, fireplace inserts and wood-burning fireplaces are on the broadside.
Fireplace Chimney and Flue
It’s only the traditional wood-burning fireplaces that utilize a chimney and flue. A few models of gas fireplaces also need venting, but you can use a pipe for it rather than opt for a chimney. If you purchase a gas fireplace insert that’s when you will require a chimney for it.
The most popular types of chimneys for your wood-burning fireplace include:
Reinforced Concrete Chimney
You’ll find such chimneys in older houses, but this design has become obsolete in the new design era. One of the main drawbacks of these chimneys is their high tendency to start cracking from the corners.
Masonry Chimney
These chimneys are constructed either with stone or brick, which complements the fireplace area. A tile-lined flue is often paired with a masonry chimney.
Metal-Lined Flue
It looks quite similar to your ventilation pipe on the gas fireplace. A metal-lined flue is generally a double-walled metal pipe for venting out smoke. You can also find a model of metal pipe that is triple-walled.
Fireplace Mantel
The decorative framework that you can often find around your fireplace is a mantel or mantelpiece. The built-in, wall-mounted, as well as your stand-alone fireplaces often utilize a mantel. But, you necessarily don’t need a mantel for your fireplace.
Along with the classic fireplace look of a mantel, it also comes with a functional purpose. You can use the mantel as a shelf for your decorations and keep other items.
Consider the following tips when you plan to get a mantel for your fireplace:
You must follow the National Fire Code standards that are given for a wood-burning fireplace with a mantel. You should have a six-inch gap between your firebox and mantel. Also, an additional inch of clearing for each 1/8 mantel protrudes.
Get a mantel that matches the style and dimensions of your fireplace.
Search for a mantel that will suit the decor, room size, and design of your fireplace.
You should consider the room size, heart size (if applicable), and the overall decor for selecting a mantel that will create a sense of balance.
The medium-density fibreboard or MDF does look like natural wood, but it’s a non-combustible option for your mantel.
If you want an affordable option, you can try out the simple wood mantels. For the mid-range option, you have elegant wood mantels. And for a high-end option, you can get a stone mantel.
Types of Fireplace FAQ
Do you want your fireplace to be the primary source of heat?
While you select the fuel type and you know the fireplace size that you’re looking for, it’s essential for you also to consider the heating requirements.
If you’re buying a fireplace for a large home or room, you should select a style that has more heat output. But, if you want to heat a small room, and you end up picking an overly large fireplace, you’ll be getting too much heat than required.
When you’re searching for a fireplace, you should look at the different available heating sources. And to get a better idea, you should answer these questions:
Is your new fireplace required to be the primary source of heat?
Will you be combining the fireplace with other heating sources?
It should be noted that a wood-burning fireplace does produce a profuse amount of heat. But, a large chunk of it escapes from the chimney as the temperature rises, and it doesn’t spread evenly across your room.
You have quite a few efficient heating options that are available for you such as – ethanol, gas, gel, or the electric fireplaces. Even though it produces less amount of heat, but it’s directed into your room, and it doesn’t rise to the ceiling.
What type of fireplace installation are you looking for?
The fireplace installation can range from spending weeks on remodeling your home for the new fireplace to the free-standing electric fireplace.
The gas fireplace lies In the middle of the installation spectrum. You need to to get it connected to a gas line. But, if you already have a gas connection, it can get simple to install your gas fireplace. When you have to hire a professional to install your gas line, it can get time consuming and expensive.
If you’re building a wood-burning fireplace, then you’ll need the help of a professional for the installation process. You can find a few models of gas fireplaces which you can install without professional help. There are also electric fireplaces that have an easy installation process that can be done alone.
Where do you want to keep the fireplace?
You should decide which room you are going to get the fireplace installed. And the location of the fireplace in that room. With an idea about the location of your fireplace, it will be easier to understand the fireplace style for your home.
If you’re opting for the wood-burning fireplace, it’s best when installed near the exterior walls. The other fuel types of fireplace can be installed on the interior walls.
Are you looking for a fireplace that is lightweight and can be shifted easily without redecoration? If so, we advise you to get the free-standing fireplace rather than the built-in inserts.
The living room is one of the most popular choices for having a fireplace. Finally, the smaller gas and electric models are a good option for the bedroom, dining room, office space, and the outdoors.
What is your budget?
The overall cost of the fireplace depends on many different components. The price of a fireplace can range from $1000 to $10,000 or more, depending on the model that suits your preferences.
For the gas, gel, electric, and ethanol fireplace it can cost you around $500 to about $2500. For an affordable option, you have the wall-mounted and free-standing units to choose from. The built-in inserts are slightly on the expensive side. You’ll have to pay the most for wood-burning fireplaces, especially for the ones that you’re building from the ground up.
If you’re getting a wood-burning fireplace which requires regular professional inspection, you have to consider those costs in your budget. These inspections can cost you from $100 to $250.
You’ll be paying more than $10,000 for a basic model of a wood-burning fireplace, apart from the additional costs such as- construction, remodeling, and installation. It’s also essential that you consider the cost of installation for gas, electric, ethanol, and gel models. A few units you can install on your own, for the others you’ll need professional help which increases your budget.
However, even your gas fireplaces will require a yearly professional inspection, which can range from $100-$250.
What are the fire safety precautions for a fireplace?
All the different styles of fireplaces should be used with a lot of caution, especially the wood-burning one. You should follow the fire safety precautions very carefully to protect yourself, your family, and the house. The fire safety of a model should be questioned right from the time you opt for a fireplace.
The safest option for your family, pets, and home are the electric fireplaces. Even the gas, gel, and ethanol fuel type are safe for your children and home.
On the other hand, wood-burning fireplaces can get pretty dangerous if you don’t use it properly. For a wood-burning fireplace, you should ensure that you get quality fireplace gate and screen, irrespective of whether you have your children or pets around.
You need to clean and maintain the wood-burning fireplace regularly. Also, you need to have a professional inspection and cleaning done for the chimney almost every year.
To install a gas fireplace, you’ll also need professional help to connect your fireplace to the gas line. It might seem like a pretty simple task when you already have a gas connection, but for your safety, we advise to seek professional help.
The gas fireplace should be equipped with a safety pilot, which is the oxygen-depletion sensor. This tool helps to turn off the gas just when there is an increase in the level of carbon dioxide. It’s best if you install carbon dioxide detectors on every floor of your home, which ensures fire safety when using a gas fireplace.
Can you paint fireplaces?
Yes, you can safely paint the interior and exterior of your fireplaces. Most professionals usually recommend you to paint the exteriors with acrylic latex paint, which is heat-resistant for up to a temperature of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. Few manufacturers also make paint for stone, concrete, and brick which you can try out if the heat-resistant part works out fine.
Moving inside, you should use a high-heat paint which can withstand a minimum of 1000 degree Fahrenheit or more. We advise you to use a roller or spray made for textures for applying the paint in your firebox.
Can you recycle the ashes from the fireplace?
No, you cannot recycle the ashes. But, you have different ways to reuse them which includes- to remove algae from your small ponds, as a fertilizer for your garden, a household cleaning product, and as an insect repellent.
In places with frequent snowfall, the fireplace users often prefer to use ash instead of sand or salt on the icy sidewalks. For the adventurous and entrepreneurial soul, you can use wood ash for making lye and soap.
Toggle Title
Toggle Content
Can you remove the regular fireplaces?
Yes, you can generally remove the fireplace. The cost of it will depend on the amount of work required for the removal process. Those who choose to remove just a few selected parts of the system will bear a smaller cost, but for complete demolition, the charge will be high. Few tasks can be done for around $1000, but for a complete demolition; it will cost nothing less than $10,000.
The different factors that you need to take into consideration while setting the budget for the removal of your fireplace are- structural considerations, materials, finishing, and the number of fireplaces.
Can you use the ashes from your fireplace in the garden?
Yes, you have multiple ways to use the wood fire ash in your garden. If you sprinkle a small amount of ash in your vegetable bed, then it’s equal to adding potassium and lime. But, you should avoid using ashes on vegetables that need acidic soil for its growth like peppers, potatoes, carrots, celery, tomatoes, garlic, and blueberries.
Ashes are highly alkaline substances, so it should be used with caution. Adding a sprinkle of ash to your compost pile will benefit a lot of different plants such as- swiss chard, asparagus, beets, peas, kale, and broccoli.
Are the gas fireplaces vented?
You can get gas fireplaces that are both vented and ventless. With an unvented model, there is an equal distribution of heat inside your home, but the drawback is that it carries a lot of carbon monoxide. We advise you to get the vented design, which has fewer safety concerns and is a highly efficient source of heating.
How expensive is a fireplace to run per month?
A gas fireplace is considered to be one of the relatively inexpensive fuel types. The exact cost of running a gas fireplace will depend on two factors- the current price of fuel, and the output of the unit, which is measured in BTUs. Also, you need to consider whether the unit is used for decoration or as a heating source.
There are two subtypes of gas fireplaces, which are: propane and natural gas. If you’re opting for natural gas, it will cost you around three times less than propane.
It’s impossible to give an accurate rate card of the entire cost since the price of gas tends to fluctuate over time, and it also varies from region to region.
For an estimate, an hour of operation of a 40,000BTU unit will cost you around 50 to 60 cents. You can use this for heating approximately 1200 to 1500 square feet living area.
Are gas fireplaces a good option for heating a home?
Yes, a gas fireplace is an excellent heating-source, and it’s also an attractive unit. Some models can very quickly heat around 1000 to 1500 square feet. You can use a gas fireplace quite safely as a primary source of heating small apartments or homes. But, for larger spaces, you should not rely on a single fireplace to evenly distribute heat to every corner of your home.
For your living room, you can use a gas fireplace as the primary source of heat. For places that are far away from the living space, this will work only as a secondary heating source.
What is the cost of a new gas fireplace? How much does it cost for installation?
For the standard gas fireplace model, it will you around $1500 to $2500. The price range depends on the type of gas unit that you’re buying, whether it’s an insert, unvented, or direct-vented model.
The installation cost for a gas fireplace is more than the price upfront, as it depends on the following factors:
Does a unit require a separate construction or it’s an insert?
Do you have an existing gas line or you need a new connection?
Whether the unit requires the construction of a chimney or it’s an unvented fireplace.
This shows that your overall installation cost can range from around a minimum $500 to $2500 or more.
Can we remove the gas fireplaces?
Yes, you can remove the gas fireplaces. It’s quite simple to remove the direct-vented units that are freestanding models. You need to remove the unit, get the electrical and gas work sorted out, and then you can patch the holes in the wall and get it refinished inside-out. But, if your unit has a chimney, it can get expensive and challenging, which also depends on the type of installation.
Is there any eco-friendly fireplace?
Yes, the best options available for an eco-friendly fireplace are electric and gas. These use very little energy, and they have smokeless flames. But, you should bear in mind that they use fossil fuels to run.
This means that it’s releasing carbon dioxide even from a non-renewable energy source. But, the amount of carbon dioxide that it releases into the air is just a fraction of what an open fire produces.
Do fireplaces pose a threat to the environment?
To understand whether a fireplace is harmful to the environment or not, you should focus on the fuel type. The open fires are one of the least eco-friendly combinations; it requires poor quality solid fuel to run, which releases a lot of smoke.
If you’re burning wood, then it’s not necessarily harmful to the environment. But, you should only burn well-seasoned wood in a sealed glass fronted appliance (e.g., stove). This is a carbon-neutral way to heat your home. However, when these measures are not taken up, your fireplaces can pose a threat to the environment.
The efficiency rating of an open fire is just 30%, with the maximum amount of heat rising up the chimney. You should avoid burning dirty coal or wet wood, as it produces high levels of smoke, which leads to environmental damage, health problems, and air pollution.
Are the electric fireplaces safe?
The electric fireplaces don’t produce any heat, and it stays cool to touch. This is even when the heater is in use. It’s just the area around your heating vent which will get a little warm. An electric fireplace is one of the safest options available, and it’s perfect when you have small children or pets at home.
Conclusion
For purchasing a fireplace, there’s a lot to consider and learn. It can feel like a mammoth task when you have such a vast spectrum of fireplaces to choose from. Fear not! We’ve got you completely covered with this informative guide. You can read through it again to have a clear picture of the right fireplace for your beautiful home.
Your cookware can be made from different materials. Each has pros and cons, which you need to know when looking for cookware to add to your kitchen.
Understanding their differences is important, from how they conduct heat to how you're supposed to clean them. This will help you make the most of each piece of cookware.
These are the different types of cookware and when you should use them.
Copper Cookware
Best For: Precision and control while cooking; normally used by the pros
Professionals usually use copper cookware because of its precision. However, you, too, can learn to work with this type of cookware.
Copper has excellent heat distribution, letting it heat and cool down efficiently. This factor makes it easier to control how you cook your food. You can easily find this in a sauté pan, fry pan, or similar cookware.
Unlike other cookware pieces, copper is extremely sensitive and easy to damage. It's best to keep it out of the dishwasher and clean it the old-fashioned way.
They should also be regularly polished to maintain their features. It can develop a natural patina if you cannot establish a proper polishing routine.
When looking for a copper pot or pan, it's best to look for a heavy-gauge one for durability. It can be a bit pricey compared to the other cookware, but it's worth the investment.
This cookware material is also incompatible with induction cooking because of its sensitivity to heat and electricity.
What I like
Beautiful aesthetics
Used by pros
Great for working with high heat
Can be safe for ovens
Superior heat conduction
What I Don't Like
Hand-wash only
Not compatible with induction cooktops
Reactive metal
Cast Iron Cookware
Best For: Searing, frying, slow-cooking
Cast iron is another famous cookware material that is long-lasting and thick. It's so durable that you can easily find a vintage cast iron still being used today despite being passed down for generations.
It usually takes a while to heat a cast iron skillet. However, once they're ready, it distributes heat evenly and helps you get the perfect sear and browning for meat.
Another exciting feature of cast iron is how it can improve your food. It naturally adds iron to your food while cooking, an essential mineral for the body.
Cooking with an uncoated cast iron isn't the most ideal. One of the reasons why it's so well-known is the intensive care required. You must season cast iron properly to get the best results.
Cast iron cookware is one of the most high maintenance out there. However, given its properties and how it can improve your dish, it's a great investment in any household.
An enameled cast iron is practically the more colorful version of plain cast iron. However, they're not as high-maintenance and can work without seasoning.
This type of cookware lets you easily transition from a stove top to an oven because of it retaining heat well. It's great for braising, stewing, slow cooking, and working with very high heat.
Its colorful exterior makes it great for serving food directly from your pot or pan compared to your typical cast iron skillet. The most common type of enameled cast iron is the dutch oven, which will be discussed later.
An enameled cast iron tends to be heavier than other cookware materials, so you must be careful when bringing it around.
It's also common for the more affordable options that the cast iron easily chips and cracks, especially when exposed to high temperatures. Investing in a more expensive one that will last a long time is best.
The light color of its interior may show some discoloration over time. However, this does not affect your dishes. It's so durable that you can easily pass down an enameled cast iron to your children.
Nonstick cookware is another famous material for those planning to cut their fat intake. It allows you to cook with little to no oil.
Its nonstick coating prevents food from getting stuck to the surface. It helps the pan or pot easily release delicate food, like eggs, crepes, and pancakes.
It's best to avoid using metal utensils when working with them, so you don't damage the nonstick coatings.
Nonstick cookware is also easy to clean since the surface allows it to dispatch any residue. However, it's important to be careful when cleaning these types of cookware, so the nonstick surface doesn't get damaged.
When looking for nonstick cookware, it's best to double-check the quality. Many may be affordable but have questionable nonstick surfaces.
What I like
Less oil when cooking
Easy to clean
Can be used with any cooktop
What I Don't Like
Less browning on food
Not good with the high heat of dishwashers
Easily scratched
Stainless Steel Cookware
Best For: Everyday cooking for all types of food
Stainless steel is one of the most common materials for cookware, given how lightweight and durable they are. They're also versatile, making them a preferred material for cookware.
Since they're a poor heat conductor, they're usually constructed with a copper or aluminum disc at the bottom. These materials help the cookware heat up more efficiently and evenly.
Cooking with a stainless steel pot or pan usually requires vegetable or canola oil to keep the food from sticking to the surface.
Since its material doesn't react to other substances, you can easily cook on its surface, regardless of if they're harsh or acidic foods.
Cleaning and maintenance for stainless steel are easy. You can scrub any stubborn residue and finish it in the dishwasher. Any stain and discoloration can be removed with a stainless steel cleanser.
While it does take a while to get used to cooking with stainless steel, it's one of the most accessible materials that can help you adjust to others.
What I like
Extremely durable for different kinds of food
Safe for dishwashers, ovens, and broilers
For multitasking
Resists staining
What I Don't Like
It can be tough to clean
Much low-quality stainless steel cookware
It might take time to get used to
Bakeware
Best For: Baking
If you're a fan of making cakes, cookies, and more, you might need a wide variety of bakeware.
These come in different shapes and sizes because of the different kinds of baked goods available. You may need a separate pan for each kind of baked good.
While variety does have its pros, it can be difficult to store so many kinds, especially if you work with different kinds of baked goods.
These can be made from different materials, like aluminum or silicone. Each also has its pros and cons when baking.
While most are nonstick, you may have to line them with wax paper and spray oil to ensure your pastries don't stick.
When baking, it's great to have a good supply of bakeware in your kitchen. While these types are restricted to one purpose, it's essential if this is your cooking medium.
What I like
Variety of materials
Comes in different shapes and sizes
What I Don't Like
Only for pastries and cakes
Not all are nonstick
Can be hard to store because of the shapes
The Kitchen Essentials
Now that you're more aware of the cookware features of your pots and pans, you'll need to know a few kitchen essentials to add to your kitchen.
This guide will help you determine what you need for your cooking style and the kind of food you want to work with.
Here are the essential pots and pans you can work with.
Pans
While you may know precisely what a pan is and what it's used for, different kinds of cooking exist, as do different kinds of pans.
They can be made of different materials or used for specific types of cooking. From pans for broiling or frying to the different specialized pans for specific dishes, the pan possibilities are endless.
Here are the different types of pans you might need for your kitchen.
Frying Pans
A general frying pan is used for everyday foods, from meat to vegetables.
They can be made from different materials, like stainless steel, carbon steel, and more.
If you're looking for a pan with a more specific purpose, we've also gathered the other types you might be interested in.
Nonstick Pans
Nonstick pans are the go-to when working with delicate dishes. This type of fry pan lets you cook without using much oil.
Omelet pans are nonstick pans specifically made to help you easily cook omelets.
These pans are extremely easy to maintain. However, it's best not to use a metal utensil when working with them.
Cast Iron Skillet
The cast iron skillet has been gaining popularity because of its versatility. You can easily rely on this skillet for deep frying, searing, or other processes.
Modern cast iron pans don't have the same smooth nonstick finish as the vintage ones. However, if finding a vintage one is challenging, you can easily get a modern but reliable cast iron.
Unlike the previous fry pan, you can use metal utensils with a cast iron skillet. Be careful when using them since the utensil can also conduct heat.
Le Creuset is one of the most famous cookware brands, with the best cast iron pans in their selection.
Sauté Pans
A sauté pan is a wide pan that lets you hold different liquids while cooking. It's great for deep frying, sautéing, and more.
Anodized aluminum is a popular material for a sauté pan because it distributes heat.
Sauce Pan
If you work with many sauces, it's best to have a pan that can specifically hold liquids and keep cooking at a constant low heat.
These pans are made explicitly for delicate sauces to keep them from burning.
Grill Pans
A griddle or grill pan is a particular type that allows you to grill burgers, sausages, vegetables, and more.
They have a unique shape designed to let you grill on your stovetop.
Stir Fry Pans
These types of pans are specifically for stir-frying, which is a famous style typical of Asian food.
Much like a cast iron skillet, this type of pan would require proper seasoning to get the best results for your food.
Paella Pan
This type of pan is a large dish specifically used for making paella. They're traditionally made with carbon steel because their thinness can help with heat distribution.
Since it's carbon steel, you must adequately season paella pans like cast iron to keep your ingredients from sticking to the surface.
Roasting Pan
Roasting pans are versatile pieces of cookware used to roast meats like turkey and chicken, staples for any feast.
This cookware material can also be used to roast vegetables, depending on the accessories included.
Casserole Dish
This type of dish is a type of ceramic cookware that's best used for casseroles, as stated in the name.
It's deep enough to hold sauces and thick enough to retain heat.
Baking Pans
Baking pans are made for pastries and cakes in particular. There are different kinds, depending on what you're baking.
They're generally nonstick, but you would still need oil or lining to make them easier to remove.
Pots
Just like pans, pots can also come in different sizes. Each can help you with specific dishes and meal types.
While there are automated cooking pots, like slow cookers and crock pots, there are times when you just want to enjoy the good old fashion way of cooking.
Here are the most common types of pots you might need for your kitchen.
Stock Pots
If you have any leftover bones or vegetables, you might want to make stock out of them. That's where a stock pot comes in.
A stock pot is the largest type you can work with, making it great for making stock and broth for your other dishes.
A stock pot can also be used for pasta, sauces, and other dishes, making it versatile.
Pasta Pot
A pasta pot has strainers to make cooking and draining noodles easier.
It's usually made from stainless steel, making it easy to maintain. It's best for those who eat A LOT of pasta.
Dutch Oven
Originating from the Netherlands, Dutch ovens are a type of enameled cast iron that's best known for its colorful exterior. They're best known for slower cooking styles.
A Dutch oven is easy to clean and maintain. However, keeping it out of the dishwasher is best to allow it to retain its features.
Le Creuset is also best known for its colorful and durable Dutch ovens. While they may be pricey, a Dutch oven is excellent for all cooking styles involving sauces and soups.
Fun Fact
A Dutch oven is also known as a French oven because of French brands like Le Creuset that made the cookware popular with their cooking.
Sauce Pot
If you're working with a lot of sauce, it might be best to level up from a sauce pan to a pot.
You can create more sauce for feasts and larger servings using a deep pot.
These can come in stainless steel or copper, making them great for acidic foods like tomato sauce.
Pot Roast
Much like a Dutch oven, a pot roast is made specifically for those slow cooking processes requiring a lot of heat retention.
As a result, you get meat that falls right off the bone.
Copper Pots
Copper is a great cookware material to work with when it comes to pots because it allows you to have better control over how your food cooks.
Its heat distribution allows your food to cook evenly, especially when working with soups and sauces.
Besides the enormous pots and pans, it's also essential to consider the different accessories that can make the cooking process much easier for you.
While they're not essential for the kitchen, they can help make cooking much easier. They can also help with specific processes and techniques the cookware can't achieve.
These are the following cookware accessories any master chef must have to keep their kitchen ready for cooking:
Pot and Pan Covers - These are ideal for covering your pots and pans while cooking to reduce splatter and speed up the cooking procedure.
Wok Rings - These are placed directly on the burner to support a wok better. Besides accommodating the wok's unique shape, it directs heat evenly across it.
Steamer Basket - This versatile tool lets you steam vegetables and chicken into a pot. You can also use it to blanch vegetables.
Splatter Screens - These mesh screens help prevent oil and grease splashes without blocking your view of the food. Unlike a full cover, it allows your food to breathe while cooking.
Egg Poachers - This tool helps you easily poach an egg, ensuring it's evenly cooked. It's available from 4 to 15 cups, depending on your preference. They usually come with egg cookers to make it easier for anyone to make eggs.
Handle Covers - These covers are often made of silicone and can be easily slipped onto your handles to add comfort while cooking.
Culinary Baskets - These versatile tools come in coarse or fine mesh. They allow you to fry, blanch, skim, and boil at a safe distance from the heat.
Stove Top Griddles - It's a tool that turns your stovetop into a griddle or grill for pancakes, burgers, and more.
Steamer Racks - These racks can go into your pots, pans, and pressure cookers to limit your food's contact with your cookware. It lets you steam vegetables, seafood, dim sum, and other foods easily.
It's best to invest in accessories you'll undoubtedly use when cooking. Some can use the cookware bought as a set, while others are sold separately.
Choosing the Best Cookware
Whenever you cook, it's important to choose the best cookware since it can affect your end product.
These are the things to consider when choosing your cookware materials.
Hand-pick Your Pieces
When choosing cookware, it's best to have a variety on hand. Your pieces should fit what and how you cook since they contribute to the final product.
While many produce cookware sets, cookware brands tend to have many items that might clutter your cabinets.
Their sets usually include the accessories, utensils, and even the cookbook that they add on there.
If you plan on getting a cookware set, ensure you'll use each item to make the most out of the set. If not, it might be best to purchase individual pieces instead.
Treat these cookware as an investment since they're tools you must use daily, especially if you cook your meals.
Go to a Retail Store
Nowadays, it's become common for us to buy everything online. While it's easy to scroll down to the review section of a listing, it's always better to go to an actual retail store and try the pieces for yourself.
It can help you get a feel for the product before purchasing it. You can check its weight and see which is manageable for you.
Observing the attachments while the cookware is in your hand makes it easier to see if they're sturdy or ergonomic.
The best part is having someone from the store advise you on the materials. You can easily ask them about their recommendations and the specifics of each piece.
Glass Lids
Besides aesthetics, glass lids are a great way to keep an eye on the food you're cooking without lifting the lid. That simple action usually interrupts the cooking process.
However, these tend to be heavy, making them easy to drop and break. When this happens, it can be dangerous, especially for households with kids.
Stove-to-Oven Safety
When cooking, there are times when you'd have to transfer your cookware from the stove to the oven. If you're unaware of your cookware's features, exposing it to certain temperatures suddenly becomes dangerous.
Even if the box says it's oven safe, we recommend double-checking the specifications before purchasing it.
The main question is, "What temperatures can this cookware be safely exposed to?"
This information is usually provided on the packaging. You can also double-check with consumer comments to get insight from someone who has used it.
See how much heat your cookware can take. Some can only withstand up to 350ºF while others can take up to 500ºF.
Types Of Cookware FAQs
You might have some questions about the types of cookware options you can have at home.
We’ve cooked up the most common ones to help you with your research.
What Type of Cookware Is Best?
The best cookware usually depends on your cooking style and the food you work with. Some may need specialized cookware material to get the best results.
However, some of the best cookware is usually made of stainless steel. It’s versatile and can work with most foods, making it easy to work with once you get the hang of it.
Most of the best cookware sets in the market are made from stainless steel, making them accessible as well.
When looking for a stainless steel cookware set, don’t compromise quality for the price. While many affordable sets exist, some might work with low-quality stainless steel to compensate.
Which Cookware Is Best for Frying?
When it comes to frying, a stainless steel pan is the most reliable and standard.
It’s versatile and can work with most kinds of food. It’s also a great item when learning the ropes around the kitchen.
However, cooking with stainless steel may entail a lot of oil and fat, depending on your cooking.
For more delicate foods, you can cook them on a copper or nonstick pan. These can lessen the chances of your food sticking to the pan without adding much oil.
Which Cookware Is Dishwasher Safe?
Stainless steel is one of the most dishwasher-safe cookware types on the market, which is excellent, as they’re one of the most common cookware used.
Nonstick cookware is generally not dishwasher safe. However, nonstick Teflon pots and pans are safe in the dishwasher.
When working in the kitchen, there are many things you can use to make the best dishes. While it can be overwhelming to learn about these things, it's essential for cooking.
It's best to know yourcookers and kitchenware to make the most of every cooking experience.
To try and define concept art is, in a way, to attempt defining creativity itself.
In recent times, concept digital art has established itself on a level that’s as high up as any traditional form of art. But the one thing that sets it apart as a unique area altogether is its ability to transform conventional art by animating them on screen!
And we bet no other thing in this world could ever bring a real dragon to you if it’s not digital art! (well, except ancient Asian magic, we suppose)
The task of a concept artist is to primarily come up with ideas and fit them into a narrative to create a digital project. Concept artists, in various ways, design such ideas in certain styles and ways so that they could complement the narrative.
And if you are an aspiring concept artist, then you gotta know a thing or two about how the different types of concept art make up the digital art industry!
Environment Concept Art primarily focuses on structuring and designing landscapes. It is used for setting and defining the place of the action and estimating the time of the action sequence.
Since the setting of this sequence is one of the most challenging aspects of environmental concept art, the skill sets for the artist will require them to possess a good eye for composition, architectural design, and perspective.
Environmental concept art emphasizes the layering and texturizing of the overall layout of the image. Each stroke on the screen that goes into creating the scene should be in accordance with the rest of the subjects, props, and the kind of action that is soon going to take place.
For instance, if an adventurous sequence is going to take place on a sunny day, then the overall layout with all its color and tonal variations would be much different texturally and visually than the one which is meant to portray a much laidback or calming sequence. There would be a considerable difference in the mood of the two sequences.
These environmental sequences are mostly created using 3D software where the artist is in complete charge of reflecting and translating all the digital elements in the final designs. This will form the atmosphere and mood that the project requires.
Understanding the fundamentals of designing anything is the first step to get the job done successfully and in the best way. However, it is only by regularly practicing what you are trying to depict that will help you perfect your art. This holds true for every kind of conceptual art form.
If you do want to take up designing environments, then you should focus on correcting your perspectives first. This plays a significant role in each piece.
Remember that, if any part of your perspective does not fit with the rest of your design, then it may ruin the entire effect of the painting. Environment artists also have to be swift and deft with their art portrayals as that is a crucial aspect of depicting any fantastical or foreign object in an equally unfamiliar environment, such as aliens on a strange planet.
As an environment artist, your primary task would be to imagine and visualize the worlds that don’t exist and turn them into convincing, real thing for your audience to marvel at.
Apart from fundamentals, you need to have an eye for great design and understand the basic objects such as plants, animals, the natural and geological attribute at least to the point where you would be able to easily replicate these ideas.
Once you do understand these essential points, you should really practice environments as much as you can. You can even create a series of thumbnail sketches and painting over a set period of time like a month or so.
It could initially be a pretty challenging job for a paid concept artist to manage all of it on their own when they start creating stuff at first as they will not get to choose what they create. You may select a particular look for your art, but it’s always gonna be the client or the studio who makes the final, decisive call.
And this means that you will have to be an expert enough to portray anything they ask for, whether it is a plush manor interior, a serene village escape or a sandy desert landscape. This will be a real test of your versatility as an artist.
And since environments can often have people in them as well, you will have to be clear in your understanding of human anatomy and gestures as well as understand the height and weight differences.
References and tips
A good way of adding perspective to your work is by adding a person or animal somewhere in the environment. You could find impressive artworks demonstrating the use and placement of birds for defining perspective in a project on subreddit/r/BirdsForScale.
The selection of colors and creating a color scheme is what makes or breaks an art project be it traditional or digital. However, for designing environments digitally, you can get sufficient help from two of these reference guides that will help you learn and progress far in your studies: Color and Lightand Imaginative Realism, both by artist James Gurney.
Character Concept Art
Character concept art emphasizes the overall creation of the convincing characters as well as the creatures for the project. The required skills set for a concept artist mandates them to possess the ability to create and coordinate the different aspects of the characters. These attributes include everything from the costumes, anatomical features, and color variations to the overall movement of the structure and gestures of the character.
The artist is required to have substantial knowledge of human and animal anatomy as well as the perspective to portray them in the right ways.
This is required for creating realistic body types. But more than that, it’s needed to create fantastical creatures and beasts and monsters.
The artist’s in-depth knowledge of anatomy and biological features of humans and animals allows them to create marvelous and compelling characters of creatures that do not exist in real life.
The artist solely does this by basing the creature’s design on the natural proportions of whatever it has been inspired from or just any other point of reference. Conforming to these vital rules of proportions is what makes the make-believe world created by the artist to actually seem believable.
Designing characters is one of the most in-demand jobs in the field of digital arts. The designer artists are paid to create characters that are based on the background, personality traits, as well as other design features that are recommended by the client or studio.
Although the initial designs are mostly etched out in 2-dimensional forms and structures, for the most part, the 3-dimensional renders of the designs are what the industry is actually centered around. Some of the highest level projects also involve both 2D and 3D with more number of artists taking up the task for both kinds together.
Artists designing characters for video games usually have a style that is different than that which visual development or character artists generally use for animation. Animation actually gives more freedom to the artist to try out various creative styles than just plain realism.
This also means that the illustrators may, at times, choose to venture on the character route with their focus more on creative animation than the conventional techniques of depiction.
It is, in fact, just as competitive as designing for video games, and hence, the jobs are similar when it comes to quantity. However, if you are confident that you’re good at, you need not worry about placements at all!
To get a good place in this field, you would have to put many hours into perfecting your skills. The quality of your work is going to be the be-all and end-all in this line of work, and that is what is going to pave your way to success. Practicing will help you understand the requirements for character art and the things you could do to speed up your learning process.
As soon as you understand all the fundamentals of character designing, you would want to dive headfirst into etching out your characters from all angles.
You could look up these inspiring and unique examples created by Moize Opel for a head start.
Character artists can often get assigned with the task of designing fantastical creatures and monsters, mostly for video games. These are often the villains encountered in in-game battles. This requires minute details and just the right levels of movements to be rendered in a realistically simulated action.
References and tips
It goes without saying that character designers work tirelessly to come up with a brilliant and unique idea to animate on the screen for you. With dedication, hard work, and a genuine love for story-telling, you could make it real big in this department.
Being involved in the community for character concept art is one of the best aspects of it. From character art forums to character artist interviews and also other related YouTube Videos, you find a lot online to help you in this field.
You could even check out these books that cover practically everything from basic designed to digital painting technique:
The concept art of creating weapons is actually one of the most challenging tasks in the digital concept art department. This focuses on the creation of weaponry that is meant to be used by the characters in the sequence and the other beings in the plot who are supposed to populate the world that the project will be depicting for its audience.
Similar to the creation of all the environments, weapons and assets are also designed using 3D software.
This artist digitally designing weapons and assets should be proficient in the knowledge of the processes of creation used in industrial designs. The statistics and calculations involved in the charting of industrial designs involve pretty tedious calculations and equations.
Digital engineering required to give shape and form to these objects of warfare also requires for the artist to understand how to customize a particular weapon for the main characters. This will also depend on the nature of the character.
This type of art also provides a vital insight into the department of product designing.
Vehicle Design
Pretty similar to designing weapons and assets, creating the layouts for vehicles is a vital part of producing industrial designs. It is undeniably a pretty tough cookie to crack when it comes to the calculations and equations part of designing.
The designing of vehicles requires the artist to have a thorough knowledge of the programs and tools that are required to chart what could traditionally be called a car or aircraft design.
However, in such an industry that deals with the modes and means of digital entertainment, the artistic approach deviates from the obvious and conventional designs that are found in the automobile and aeronautical industry.
It so happens that a concept artist who is working on films and video games will often find himself designing fantastic vehicles such as strange spacecraft or flying cars.
So, what we can understand from this is that that reference points to any industrial structures or designs will be mandatorily based on realistic objects forming the base for all such layouts.
Props Design
The most important requirement for a digital artist is to be able to design any object from any given angle. Since 3-dimensional projections could be extremely challenging to equate and calculate, it usually takes a well-informed and well-experienced expert to make carefully reviewed choices and approaches when it comes to designing.
And more than being restricted to just video-game designing, creating prop-layouts is one of the essential dimensions of animated movies or TV series.
The visual development artists involved in the project have to first experiment with the different colors and tonal variations in order to be able to set a specific mood and edge to a single sequence.
If you want to practice designing props, you can start by studying anything that appeals to you. Apart from mentally determining the properties of the object itself, an artist has to closely observe and analyze the styles and aesthetics of different periods to place a prop correctly in the appropriate frame and the sequence to which it belongs.
For instance, the props for a story that has been set in the Victorian era in Britain will be very different from the props that should be in a sequence from, say, the American civil war.
It goes without saying that all celebrated artists have always observed and drawn inspiration from what they have seen around them in real life. The history and evolutionary phases of everything had always played the greatest part in studying the structures and forms of whatever it is that you’re keen to depict.
One of the ideal things that you can do is take a tour to museums or old, heritage places and houses. You could keep a sketchbook and doodle to capture every form that appeals to you.
Drawing will help you understand the shapes and structures better as well as enrich your “visual library” of new ideas.
Even the most ordinary, commonplace objects such as stoves, lamps, tables, and literally anything that you want to place in your imaginary world. Because these design and style will provide you with an essential insight into the evolution of designs throughout the ages.
It is entirely up to the designer of props to imagine and visualize how a certain thing will look from different angles and to render the minute details to them accordingly, from scratch!
Artists who take up the task of designing props may often specialize in different types of designs and layouts. While some may take up designing commercial objects of various sorts and kinds such as clothes, domestic things, or other stationery, some artists might take up designing vehicles or weapons specifically.
And even if it isn’t a score on your versatility as an artist, if you are indeed good enough in a specific area of digitally designing props, you stand a fair chance of getting noticed and hired by top-notch studios for freelancing on major projects.
The only thing that you should keep in mind is that the best way to improve your prop-designing skills is to practice drawing props as much as you can. Perfect your concepts and finishes. Add more realistic details to whatever you want to design.
However, this doesn’t mean you should neglect other concepts such as figure drawing or so. And better yet, once the fundamentals of these designing concepts get clear to you, it will help you decide what exactly is it that you want to take up in this field and put more emphasis on those parts accordingly.
References and tips
Remember that all of these efforts will go into making a fantastic props design portfolio. So, it should serve as a goal and an incentive for you to practice what you’re doing and get better at it.
You could check out some of these book recommendations for drawing from imagination or for sharpening your digital structuring abilities and skills.
If you are aspiring to be a concept artist or just starting out in the field, it is likely that you wouldn't know much about the mechanisms of the industry.
Well, it is absolutely needless to say that it is a massive one and incredibly competitive in every segment and department that lie within it.
The industry is run by a number of creative head personnel in each department, a number of publishers to take care of the written work and a considerable body consisting of top-notch artists or designers as you may call them.
Along with experts in the technical departments, their creative-heads and mentors, these artists weave sheer fantastical magic on to the screen putting life into some of the most incredible and unbelievable creatures to entertain you.
And if you desire to join the team, then hard work to perfect your skills is all that you should focus on creating a flawless concept art portfolio.
This could mean practicing drawing and sketching for up to 8 hours in a single day on a single piece of art (if need be) for as many days as you could possibly devote to your cause.
The industry is significantly competitive, and it’s not going to be easy. Rejections may be the norm for some time initially.
But, if you have the confidence to be one of the best illustrators and the tenacity to hold on, then you the stars will align for you just right eventually.
One of the things that the industry professionals look forward to is sharing bits and snippets from their journeys and teach the newcomers the tricks of the trade. This fills them in on how the industry works.
Art Podcasts
A great way to fill up some time while drawing is to listen to art concept art or digital art podcasts. You will get a bunch of these on the web easily. Apart from being immensely helpful for your line of work, but they are excellent spirit boosters that keep you motivated, interested, and focused on your work.
The advent of flat screens and LCDs with sleek designs has made it so much easier to mount televisions on the wall and get it over with these days. And if there’s a fireplace at your home, I’m sure you must have had a thought, at least once, that it would be incredibly great to hang your TV over it. I mean, imagine how awesome that would make your living room look.
But, is mounting an electric contraption over the fire really an idea worth your while? Let’s look at the pros and cons to find out!
The most prominent advantage of mounting your TV set over the fireplace is that you can save space – lots of it. This is beneficial, especially when you are living in smaller spaces.
If you aren't hanging the TV over the fireplace, the chances are that you have a separate entertainment center, TV stand, or a dresser taking up space in the living room. One might argue that the TV stands are getting thinner by the day, but nevertheless, it still take up more space when compared to the mounting, which doesn't take any footage of the floor area.
Creating A Common Focal Point
It’s a well-known fact that both Fireplaces and TV stations act as focal points in the living room. When there’s an absence of one, you know where to face your furniture, and how to set up the rest of the interiors. But if your house has both, then you’re sure to be in a dilemma as to how to set up your room.
Also, if you mount your TV elsewhere, you might feel the need to add extra elements and décor to complete the look, which could be a lot of effort.
In instances like these, opting to mount the TV over the fireplace will simply solve your problem by creating a single common focal point in your room. Now, there would be no more racking of brains as to how the furniture and décor should be arranged, and no more obligation to add extra elements to your setting!
By mounting the TV over the fireplace, you can hide all those ugly wires without having it peeping out and ruining the whole look. This could probably be one of the most important reasons why a lot of people prefer this arrangement. You might say that an on-floor TV station or a dresser also gives an edge of hiding the wires behind the TV, but they are still visible to the passers-by if not appropriately concealed.
On the other hand, TV over the fireplace means that all that mess is just thrown behind the wall, and covering it up with a wall plate. Of course, you would be needing the help of a professional to finish the job. But the end look is worth it.
Makes Your Living Room Look Spacious
Since there is no need for large entertainment stations and bulky table dressers once you mount the TV over the fireplace, your living room not only looks but also feels much bigger and spacious.
For an ideal viewing experience, the TV has to be placed at the eye level of the viewer. But if you mount the TV over the fireplaces, there’s a high chance that this isn’t possible, as you have to place it farther up than the ideal height. And the higher the TV is, the more you will be straining your neck.
Let me make it easier for you. Imagine you are sitting in one of the first three rows at the movies. It’s hard to watch the film, as you have to crank up your neck, ending up straining it. That’s why not a lot of people prefer sitting there, in addition to the poor viewing experience of course. Now, TV over the fireplace means that you are going to have first-seat syndrome every single day. Just think of how much effect it will have on your neck! Also, staring at the screen that’s raised for a long time can slowly cripple the functioning of your neck.
Electronics and Heat? Not a Good Combination
While space-saving is the most important reason why people go for the TV over fireplace setup, its juxtaposition to heat stands as a substantial reason why people go against it. Since electronics and heat don’t go together, they are usually placed in different corners.
A lot of televisions work best while placed in lower-temperature settings. Since a fireplace generates a lot of heat, many people argue that this arrangement could considerably reduce the lifespan of the TV sets, making the reparation costs expensive in the longer run. And then there’s smoke emitting from the fireplace which the TVs don’t get along with.
Despite this, if you did choose to place the TV over the fireplace, make sure to clean it regularly. Or else, the smoke could create a hazy film over the TV set, hindering your television viewing experience.
Affects the Visibility and Overall Viewing Experience
We invest a lot of money in our TVs so we could get a great viewing experience. A TV with pristine quality and visibility can cost you anywhere between $500 - $1000. And if you don’t set it up right, consider all that effort and expense gone down the drain.
Let me explain you why. The quality of the picture in any television changes as you keep getting away from the screen. For the best viewing experience, manufacturers even suggest a particular angle at the TV must be placed at. If you fail to do this, you end up seeing a lower-quality picture. You might as well be getting a cheaper TV instead of that.
So, make sure you think twice before mounting your TV over the place. You could maybe go for a swivel mount to improve the angle if you are extremely particular about the Fireplace-TV setting.
Overall, I can say that mounting your TV over the fireplace can be a pesky business. But if done right, can solve your problem with the viewing experiences while adding a great look to your home. So, consider these pros and cons that I mentioned above, and do a little bit of research by yourself before making a decision.
After all, TV over the fireplace trend has swept across the US and has become second nature to a lot of homes. But whatever you decide, make sure the arrangement isn’t cluttered, and your personal preferences are met.
This product is discontinued in the market and not available in any e-commerce website.
Stalling engines, frequent malfunctions, inadequate grass-cutting efficiency - do any of these embarrassing situations sound familiar? If yes, then it’s time to upgrade your lawn mower!
Anybody who’s truly passionate about DIY home renovation/improvement isn’t a stranger to the tedious hassle of yard maintenance. And that’s why lawn mowers are becoming a must-have gardening tool for every American household.
However, it’s not easy to find a reliable product at an affordable budget in the market these days. It’s also the reason why most of us end up paying higher maintenance costs to cope up with a cheap impulsive purchase.
Speaking of reliability, we’ve recently tested the Troy Bilt TB230 lawn mower, one of the best-selling products these days. Keeping it short, if you’re searching for a long-lasting machine at a negotiable price tag, then it should be your go-to option.
Now, without any further ado, let’s get into the deets!
Troy Bilt TB230 Review
One of the main reasons why Troy Bilt products sell like hotcakes is because this brand never compromises with performance and durability to cut down on costs. The TB230 comes equipped with almost every feature you’d want in your ideal lawn mower, and even more. To be more precise, here are the key features that set this product apart from every average, low-priced lawn mower.
Design and Build Material
When it comes to purchasing tools as expensive as lawnmowers, it’s wise to play safe and opt for products that offer higher user convenience and durability. Fortunately, this product has it all covered with its durable all-steel construction body. It gets even better as the manufacturers provide a set of all-metal axles for wheels, extending product life a bit longer.
Speaking of its intelligent design, this product features a front-wheel-drive setting that rids the users from the stress of motor resistance. As a result, it becomes easier to turn the machine around for a comfortable lawn mowing experience. Also, big ups to its 11-inch wheels for providing optimal maneuverability even in the roughest of terrains.
Furthermore, it offers an extended deck to create a higher vacuum, which makes room for higher grass circulation. This feature isn’t commonly found amidst medium-duty lawnmowers, which makes the TB230 a tad more special.
Last but not least, its single-lever control feature has impressed us with the user convenience it offers by letting us adjust the cutting height with ease.
Motor Efficiency
For those who are tired of average-performing lawnmowers, the TB230 features a beast of an engine that will make you forget about frequent motor malfunctioning problems. In brief, this product is built in collaboration with Briggs & Stratton co., which is the secret behind its powerful 163cc OHV motor. Most of the buyers have rated it quite high in terms of motor efficiency for delivering high-end performance consistently.
However, the cream of the crop here is Troy Bilt’s patented ReadyStart technology, a breakthrough feature that solves one of the most common lawnmower issues. Thanks to this feature, turning this machine on is guaranteed at the very first, or at most, the second attempt. Although most of lawn mower engines require being choked from time to time, this product gets the job done with a single pull.
Also, the brand promises to service the product for free if it isn’t on by the second attempt, which speaks volumes about its reliability. If you value user satisfaction, then this model should be your go-to pick.
Triple Action Mulching Ability
As customers, we’re typically inclined towards products that offer higher versatility, and that’s why this Troy Bilt model stands out as an efficient one-for-all model. It raises the bar too high for mulching ability with its advanced settings, giving itself the upper hand over most of its similarly-priced alternatives in the market.
To put it simply, the TB230 features a triple-action mulching setting that lets you customize the yard maintenance session at your comfort. If you’re in the mood for some typical mulching, this product is one of the most appropriate options to consider. However, if you’re in a rush to get it done quicker, change its settings to side discharge mode for a faster mowing experience.
Also, its rear bag feature comes equipped with a 1.8-bushel grass catcher capacity. This feature reduces the amount of generated waste that isn’t caught by the trash bag. Consequently, you have to clean lesser clippings by yourself later on, which makes lawn mowing an appropriate pastime for your lazy weekends.
Advanced Secondary Features
Coming on to its secondary features, this product comes with a variable speed control feature. This feature allows for covering a larger cutting area within a short time, which is quite amusing for a medium-duty machine. Also, not to forget, its squeeze-grip lever helps the model in offering 100% user control, making it quite suitable for beginners with no prior experience.
Furthermore, this product gets a thumbs up for its ease of use, which is supported by numerous features. But, most importantly, we’re a fan of its advanced blade control button that comes in handy at stopping the machine and its blades at one click. So, in case you need to halt urgently while mowing the lawn, it won’t be necessary to turn the device off completely.
Not to forget, the TB230 is one of the most efficient self-propelled products in the market these days. For those who aren’t familiar with this category of lawnmowers, these are a lot more self-sufficient in comparison. As a result, you need to use very little manual power to push it around the property, which is a lot more convenient.
Last but not least, the manufacturers offer an extended 2-year warranty period with this product. However, if appropriately maintained, multiple buyers have claimed that it can last for around 6-8 years without malfunctioning even once.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Nothing is perfect, and similarly, the TB230 also comes with a few limitations of its own. For starters, this product may appear a tad short for anyone above 6’. It’s because its handle is merely 38 inches high, and doesn’t come with sufficient adjustment settings.
Furthermore, it could've been a little better if the trash bag were a bit larger, considering its wide body. However, the more significant issue to worry about here is that the product doesn’t offer sufficient traction due to its front-wheel-drive mode shenanigans.
Pros
163cc Briggs & Stratton engine
1.8-bushel grass catcher capacity
ReadyStart technology
Triple action mulching setting
2-year warranty period
Cons
Inadequate traction efficiency
Small trash catching bag
Troy Bilt TB230 Verdict
Lawnmowers are slowly becoming a necessary addition to make our lives more comfortable, and everyone’s always on the lookout for a sturdy and long-lasting model for the best value. Speaking of which, Troy Bilt is the ideal brand for anyone who’s searching for mid-range mowers under a bargain-basement price tag.
Even though finding reliable models isn’t a walk in the park, one can rely on this product with their eyes closed. On that note, we’ll take your leave for now, but we promise to return soon with more fun reviews.
With winter knocking on our doors, we can’t help but fret over snow-covered driveways!
Sure, the sight of a snow-covered lawn on a bright day is one to behold. But how do we get over the thought of all that back-breaking effort to clear it? Perhaps by having a snow thrower at our disposal.
So, when we heard about the Troy-Bilt 2100 208cc Single-Stage Snow Thrower, we were eager to try it. And when we got to know that it integrates some features of a two-stage model, we knew it wouldn’t disappoint!
While at it, we also decided to walk you through all the details to help you make the best call. Now without any further ado, let’s begin!
The tagline of Troy-Bilt reads, “We’re built for life.” In that sense, the longevity of their snow throwers always plays an important role in their popularity. However, there are various other factors that make the Squall 2100 model worth considering. Read on to know all the deets.
Power
For starters, let’s talk about the power source. At the heart of the Troy-Bilt Squall 2100 lies a robust 208 cc 4-cycle engine. Its power generation is almost equal to that of a 5.5 or 6 hp engine, which is what you’ll need when there’s a lot of snow to clear.
Another advantage of a 4-cycle engine is that though it needs both gas and oil, the separate chambers means there’s no need to mix them. The four pistons draw fuel to the engine, resulting in optimum combustion but without any annoying fumes or smoke.
Start
On a related note, the unit employs an electric push start button that works just fine to cut down on your efforts. Like any other gas-powered engine, this one too isn't free from priming requirements. However, once you do that, the next step is to simply push the button for seamless ignition.
This feature is especially beneficial for users who don’t have a lot of physical strength. In fact, the hassle of a pull start mechanism is what keeps some users from opting for a more powerful model in the first place.
Maneuverability
To be honest, we weren’t very confident about the unit’s maneuverability, considering that it weighs almost 100 pounds. But we were in for a surprise when we saw how easy it was to move the snow thrower around.
Despite not having a self-propelled system, its auger creates a propelling effect that helps in the smooth forward movement. Thus, you can go about your job quite efficiently in less time. Additionally, there’s a couple of rear tires that aid easy movement.
Sure, it won’t be easy lifting this machine on patios, decks, or other raised areas. That said, its ability to move on varied surfaces compensates for the portability factor.
Single-Stage Auger
Undoubtedly, one of the most important aspects of a snow thrower is its snow clearing ability, so here it goes. For starters, this unit is equipped with a 21-inch wide auger, capable of removing 13-inch high snow accumulation. Not only that, but it also collects all the snow without requiring a set of secondary paddles.
In this regard, it’s not unusual for snow throwers to utilize a set of paddles, whose spinning action simultaneously chops up and feeds the snow to the machine. But thanks to its robust 208cc engine, the Squall 2100 can accomplish both tasks using only one heavy-duty auger.
Even for heavy snowfall, you should be able to get it all with a couple of rounds on a larger driveway.
Remote Chute
Another praiseworthy feature is the 2-way 190-degree polymer remote chute, which can be rotated in any direction using a dedicated handle. As a result, you don’t need to plan your clearance path ahead of time; walk through the snow with the machine and decide the direction of throw as you move along.
But what really appealed to us is that unlike most of its competitors, the Squall 2100 utilizes a 190-degree chute to offer greater flexibility for choosing the throw direction. Long story short, the larger angle allows you to throw the snow behind and not just straight to the sides.
Other than that, the chute can also be controlled to adjust the throwing height. In case of higher piles, it can dispose of snow at 30 feet or more.
Drift Cutters
Talking about piles, homeowners often find heavy snow accumulation on the sides of the driveways, which needs to be moved out of the way. And this is where the snow thrower’s adjustable drift cutter arms come to the rescue. Much like the auger, they are capable of cutting into the drifts while also picking up and pushing the snow away.
This feature will come in especially handy during the last months of winter when the snow begins to pack down on the sidewalks. Plus, the drift cutter helps maintain a nice level surface by keeping the snow from falling back to what has already been cleared.
Storage
No matter how compact a snow thrower looks, the real test of storage is figuring out a proper space where the handle fits without incurring damage. And the foldable gull-wing handle of this unit does just that. With a slight twist, the handle folds down,facilitating hassle-free storage. Furthermore, the ergonomic grip ensures optimum comfort for users of varied strength and height.
Warranty
With a 2-year manufacturer’s warranty, Troy Bilt provides enough time for users to replace any defective parts or the unit as a whole. Beyond that, the brand also offers a fast, responsive customer service helpline that assists users with easy returns.
Customer Reviews
The Troy-Bilt Squall 2100 has earned a reputation for efficiency, especially in areas with heavy snowfall. Among the most liked features are its electric start, ease of maneuverability, and the combination of a powerful engine and robust single-stage auger.
However, some users have raised concerns about poor packaging and broken parts on delivery, which are replaceable under warranty.
What Could’ve Been Better?
It’s practically impossible for any product to be absolutely perfect, and the same can be said for this snow thrower. Apart from the obvious challenges of portability mentioned earlier, there are some minor flaws that we must mention.
Firstly, the wheels could’ve been sturdier since it’s meant to tackle heavy snow. Also, they tend to get stuck while moving on heavy and wet snow. That said, you can always replace the wheels for a few extra bucks.
If the snow accumulation is deeper than 13 inches, you might have to go over a couple of times to clear everything. This can feel like an added task, but we didn’t mind sparing some more time for precise cleaning.
Pros
Comes fully assembled
High-efficiency engine
Smooth start and pickup in colder temperatures
190-degree remote chute
Adjustable drift cutters to break intense piles
Cons
Wheels could be sturdier
May require multiple passes for clearing snow deeper than 13 inches
Troy Bilt Squall 2100 Gas Snow Thrower Buyers’ Guide
Before we put down our final thoughts, here’s a bonus buyers’ guide that states the most important features to consider before buying a single-stage snow thrower.
Power Source
One of the first things to consider while buying a single-stage snow thrower is the power source. And there are three types to choose from. Gas-powered units, like the Troy-Bilt 2100, are generally more powerful than the others.
On top of that, most of them don’t require you to hook the machine to a power source. However, they are more suitable for clearing large patios or driveways. Besides, they also need more maintenance, especially when you take one out after the warmer months.
Electric single-stage snow blowers, on the other hand, are more convenient to use. Sure, you’d need a power source and cord extension, but they are your best bet if you have a smaller lawn. For one, their lightweight design aids hassle-free maneuverability. Plus, they don’t require oil or gas changes, meaning there are fewer chances of leakages and mess.
Battery-run single-stage snow throwers are slowly on the rise. Not only do they cost comparatively less, but they save you from the trouble of having an electric power source, gas, and oil nearby. Moreover, they have almost zero sound emission, making them suitable for use at any time of the day.
Chute Rotation
Irrespective of the power type, chute rotation is a must-have feature to save time and effort while cleaning snow. You can select a chute that can be rotated across 180 degrees or more for optimum custom disposal. But do keep in mind that you have to change its direction according to the wind. Furthermore, many snow throwers come with the option of adjusting the throw height.
Auger Width
The auger width you go for will depend on the area that is to be cleared. Naturally, a wider width is better for clearing larger driveways and patios. But the thing to note here is that you don’t want a snow thrower that is too wide for the hard to reach areas.
So, if you’re looking to clear compact spaces, we’d recommend going for a narrow auger width, even if you have to go for multiple rounds in the wider areas.
Ergonomic Handlebar
Whether you spend a few minutes or a few hours working with a snow thrower, the last thing you’d want is strained hands. And to avoid that, look for models that have some sort of a protective covering, be it a cushioned padding or PE waterproof guard. Beyond that, you can also opt for a foldable handle that will save storage space.
Tires
It’s advisable to select a model that has sturdy and slip-resistant tires. Apart from that, we will recommend investing in a snow thrower whose tires can be changed if the user isn't satisfied.
Headlights
Headlights are a popular additional feature that potential users generally look for. Depending on the weather, you may have to bring out the snow thrower at night or in low light conditions. So, instead of carrying a separate light, the integrated LED headlight will do the job.
In our opinion, it’s definitely worth the money. The combination of nifty features on this unit makes it a very suitable choice for small-to-medium-sized lawns. Although you may have to go over more than once for the latter, the precision on offer will make up for the added effort.
Besides, the adjustable chute cuts down on the task of planning a clearance path in advance. That said, its portability and sub-standard wheels aren’t the most sought-after features, but those aren’t dealbreakers.
So, go ahead and bring home this highly efficient unit to make your winters a bit more bearable. And when you do, let us know about your experience in the comments down below.
Wood is the perfect material to add equilibrium, coziness, warmth and elegance to any given interior design, be it modern or classical in essence. For ages it has been used as the primary base material for furniture design and even though the modern contemporary age nestles and encourages plastic, acrylic and other synthetic materials, people always go back to their roots and instincts, even if they do not necessary realize it. We live in an era in which cutting down entire rain forests is a daily occupation for the massive companies who are constantly on the search of getting richer and richer, with no regard for the destructed environment left behind.
Nonetheless, leaving pieces of wood already cut to go to waste seems like a crime we should not be responsible for. Recycling , reusing, reviving old items, materials represents the duty of a modern society looking forward its future and to the generations that will follow. It is the right time to teach the young ones about responsibility, proper control and a constant balance between the natural factor and human impact. We were meant to coexist and to offer support to one another and investing time into green solutions, economically friendly is a great starting point.
With this green mind set, today we have chosen the topic of Tree Trunk Ideas, the perfect raw material for modern interior designs. It can serve multiple purposes, from wall art pieces using several sized log slices to naturally looking coffee tables, side tables, delicate candle holders or simple yet gorgeous planters nestling fresh greenery. You can cut up slices of tree trunks and use them as glass coasters or as a rustic basic for your dinner table setting. Use Scandinavian hues like stark white, charcoal grey and mint green to dress up the tree trunks and create a modern fresh vibrant appeal to your interior décor. Enjoy our selection of 35 Tree Trunk Ideas For A Warm Décor and transform your décor today.
How do you add the warm appeal to your home and which are your favorite materials or interior décor? Feel free to share your thoughts and ideas with us in the comment section below.
Nature support us, nature nurtures us offering us its everything, its all, we stumble across its greatness everyday even in the urban environment, in potted plants and parks and equally in everything else that surrounds us from clothes and textiles up to furnishings, jewelry or food. We ought to cherish everything, we ought to be happy with what we got from it, we ought to learn to enhance and emphasize it with every opportunity.
A collection of spectacular tree logs ideas follows, it includes simple and highly practical ways to repurpose wooden stumps into various forms ranging from flower pots to furniture pieces, stumps very much like twigs and tree branches can be the subject of extraordinary creative diy projects, cast a glance and type your thoughts in the comment section below.
Spectacular Tree Logs Ideas
1. create rustic log stools
Recycle textiles, wooden textures and logs into epic rustic stools to use around the bone-fire this summer.
A simple process that requires a bit of experience to pull of professionally but a hardly rewardful project nonetheless, take a wooden log, slice it and create a bowl like space within that you finish off with colorful epoxy for crafts.
via fab.com
3. log porch bench
It can be materialized in minutes with the right tools and materials and it will last decades easily. It`s naturalness speaks of rustic and calm, wooden logs are an infinite resource for DIY and creative projects.
Simply find the right wooden log to ensure that it contains something organic, natural, interesting, the bottom part, near the roots is usually quite graphic, sculpted.
Bigger, wider wooden logs can become coffee tables and stools thus shaping a really neat, unique corner for your household. Children can enjoy this set too thanks to their reduced height.
If comfort is what you`re aiming for and the hard edges of a wooden log are a problem, use thumbtacks some sponge stuffing and leather to boost your comfort on the log stool could surely help.
A really simple and beautiful design that requires a power drill and the right candle-width drill bit and you are good to go. Feel free to experience with tree branches and logs of different essences, the bark armor can change everything.
It would make a great fit in a small hobbit home, it would make a great fit in a rustic chalet nestled in the mountains, the design principles are simple enough for a diy project, start crafting !
via themetapicture.com
10. Use Logs as they are
Regardless of the stump`s position or its roots it can always carry greenery, sheer beauty. Emphasize it.
Source Unknown
11. SIDE-TABLE with book storage
The volume of a log can suit one`s storage needs, simply sculpt it to fit your needs.
Intriguing, graphic and with the right textiles probably incredible comfortable, this lounge chair speaks a whole lot about the endless possibilities, in the garden of your mountain retreat this could make you great justice.
via homemade-modern.com
16. Fairy castles in tree stumps
An old wooden stump can represent the ideal foundation for a small fairy castle, an exquisite, intricate decoration that you ought to shape in a very magic state of mind with your little ones. If the stump is in the right place the castle can also hold your home number and your email box in disguise.
A log, white wooden rope to carry it around and complement its texture and that is it, the exemplary design above is nothing but simplicity at its best.
You can use this solution to shape a coffee table or little stools for children,.
Photo Courtesy of Nicole Belanger of Nickadoo Tree Trunk Tables
19. infuse your personality
The stump above might look exactly like the various other log side-tables featured above yet this one is different, those metallic inserts combined with the leather couch with metal legs speak of a certain combination, in only two pieces you can read something about the personality of the owner, a really simple but authentic look, what do you think?
The fairy garden can come in different shapes and sizes, in here the fairies can be your pet, the door might open to expose a small dog shelter, the tree home can also invite squirrels to take refuge, simply provide good peanuts.
Two logs and a piece of wood can shape an extraordinary unique bench for your garden, feel free to scale, you can use these components as modules in your work.
Source Unknown
22. Decorate with tile shards
Old pieces of tiles can be broken into small pieces only to decorate your logs or desk, counter or coffee table surface with a elegant, simple mosaic, it can be abstract or it can be inspired by the environment, simply choose something you love; if the shards resulted from the broken tiles are not sharp this project can be a great craft for your next diy session with the little ones.
Wood is the supreme material, warm, cozy, easy to work with, renewable, and accessible material, the one that changes the world every day, twig by twig, branch by branch.
How do you see the collection of logs above? We would love to hear from you in the comment section below!
No place in our home we can call more relaxing then the bedroom, the warmest part of our home, a place to refresh and rejuvenate.
In this short article we are going to niche down in some really spectacular ideas wrapped around tree bed designs; a solution mainly aimed at children that will easily make a lot adults shiver with joy too. The focus is to create a small awe-inspiring fairy tale atmosphere into the bedroom, a place in that creates a child feels inspired and encouraged into his pursuit of the incredible, a place in which creativity flourishes.
Without further ado, let's get started!
This design looks like it came straight out of a fairy tale dream. Along with some painted trees at the back or all around the room, this would look like a place where you would go and rest your tired mind.
Imagine coming back from a long workday to enter another realm in your very own room. You can always add other accessories to make it seem more like a real forest.
If you like spending your alone time in the woods close to your house, you’d love having a hammock like this.
Being with nature and enjoying every moment of it while lying down on a comfortable, rocking bed… sounds like a perfect day to gain some peace of mind. We can’t think of a better option that’s closer to a vacation in the woods than this.
via www.luuux.com
Here is a bed tree design that’s perfect for those who want to combine style and nature at the same time.
Going well with a single color, this looks very similar to a beautiful autumn scenery when leaves have fallen, allowing you to see the details of each naked branch and fall asleep to it.
Picture having this bed when living alone in an apartment that’s waiting on your mind’s creativity to give life to it.
via domain.com.au
If you like minimal greenery designs, you’ll definitely love this idea.
It has nothing to do with the bed, yet makes it appear bright with plenty of energy to brighten up all your days by reminding you about the beauty of nature and life.
If you live in a city that has no resemblance to the serenity of forests, having plants by your bedside brings you closer to nature, soothing your mind every night while energizing it every morning.
If luxury is what you’re into, yet still go crazy about nature, take a look at this one. It reflects someone who has a taste in both an expensive lifestyle and nature’s simplicity.
Living a great, sophisticated life does not necessarily mean losing touch with things closest to your heart; and seeing them before going to bed will give you a sound sleep throughout the night.
With natural branches and twigs, one can only feel like sleeping under an old rugged cottage in the woods.
Craving for the warm cuddle of birch trees every night? Take a look at this bed frame design and see how they make a bed look beautiful effortlessly.
If you are inspired by simplicity, you’ll love using this idea for a room. It may not look much but it maintains that grandeur feeling. As Chanel would say, “Simplicity is the keynote of all true elegance.” - which truly applies here.
Matching walls, bed sheets, and pillowcases give a modern chic look to the whole bedroom.
The next one is very cozy. It provides a homely feeling to those who love closed, warm spaces.
If you're living in a crowded city and don’t get too much peace, then you’ll be happy to come home to a bed frame like this with your favorite book on the side table waiting just for you. Enjoy your nights living a vintage life.
Feel the comfort and belongingness which the bare naked logs give you every time you lay down on the bed.
Here’s another bed frame design with birch trees surrounding your bed. And this one has got a touch of little extras to it.
Match up the colors in the room and throw some decorations, making it look a bit more sophisticated.
What would make it perfect is if you add some of your favorite collection of antiques and a pair of antlers to give the rustic look that it craves. It’s like you get a private vacation in your own home.
via interiorsbystudiom.com
Love the embrace of dark rooms? This one looks like a Halloween theme.
With a bed that’s designed like a nest, you’ll be safe and sound underneath the sheets, with either a lantern (as shown in the picture) or your favorite lights tucking you in.
It kicks you even to imagine sleeping through a thunderstorm in this bed and feeling protected and comfortable.
Not many would be into this idea but if you’re someone who loves the aesthetic pleasure of darkness, you’ll get what we mean.
The first thing that comes to mind when we see this is that it suits people who are frequently on the go - they can just crash in it whenever they’ve had a long trip. It is pretty simple, yet it holds a lot of modern beauty with it.
But most importantly, we love that there is not too much stuff lying around. It’s a free space with no other furniture. The bed frame design here shows that ‘less’ is better. It looks neat, tidy, and pretty easy to maintain.
If you are looking for a bed frame design that spells ‘family’, we have this one. Just a look at this bed, we can picture a kid waking the parents up while their dog is running around doing the same thing. That’s a beautiful sight to see.
And the flowers will enhance your mood anytime you go to bed, which is important especially in the morning to have a good mood.
via 1decor.net
Whether we want to deny it or not, this one looks like a bed where the Ice Princess would sleep on. We are also sure if you surprise your little girl with something very similar, she will start going to bed early from now on.
Plus, every girl’s dream once was to become a princess, so we guess something like this will help you relive that dream even if you’re not a little girl anymore.
Are you more of an indie gal? What do you think of this idea?
There is no right or wrong way when it comes to styling an indie bedroom. Everything depends on the creativity of the owner. Also, don’t be afraid of trying out colorful extras and mix-matching them.
Add any kind of decors that complement your spirit and you’re good to go!
via shopstyle.com
This next one will make you feel like you’re on stage performing a musical. Children will probably love it for its cut-out appeal. But even if you’re an adult with a young heart who enjoys fun bed frames, you’ll love this bed idea.
Make yours look fancy by accessorizing it with what you like most.
If you wanna feel like you’re living in the Bahamas every day, get a bed with this bed frame or something very similar.
We’d recommend getting a stuffed toy piggy if you’re considering the Bahamas look to complete the theme. Otherwise, add more seashells and other ocean accessories inside the room and bring your little sea world to life.
Next up, we have this crazy idea of making your bedroom or your bed look like it’s on a tree house.
At least, it’s more exciting than a normal bedroom could ever be. We will suggest a theme that appears more outdoorsy and adventurous. The right decors and paints will play an important role in making the theme realistic.
Are you the girl who is enthralled at the sight of fairy lights? Or perhaps, you love daydreaming and any kind of art? You might like this idea for your bed.
The room does not need to be very big; the average one is enough for this bed frame. You can enjoy your personal space.
via ideasforho.me
We think this one looks like some room you’d find in an exotic Bali house. Make your room look like you’re living on the other side of the world.
This is a light theme in which there is not much to add to the room, therefore, creating a more relaxing environment which is perfect when you've had a day surrounded by people.
The idea is to make the room look as plain as possible.
via www.themarchcollective.com
What do you think about a room that looks like a hunter’s den? If you love going outdoors for a good hunt, then you might just consider this theme.
Set up your room with polished branches, especially for the bed, and just throw them anywhere you feel like it. It may look disorganized, but isn’t that the beauty of forests?
When you’re done, add more extras that go well with the overall theme so that it reflects your passion for hunting.
Alright, so this one is a blend of modern design and the beauty of nature. You’re most likely to see these types of designs in hotels and expensive guesthouses.
Some people love the idea of making their home look just as posh. The minimalistic environment will make you feel as if you are living the life of a celebrity or a millionaire.
Birch trees will look perfect for this idea, but if you want to be creative and explore more ideas, feel free to do so!
We have here a very simple, average-looking bedroom. Unlike the rest on the list, this one is what you will mostly find in many houses.
But the idea is to add some wooden décor so that it adds more style to the home environment. Maybe you don’t like making yours or the kids’ room look too fancy but you’d love to add just the right amount of accessories that will reflect your appreciation for nature.
If that’s the case, then having a plant or a branch like the one in the picture can elevate things a little bit more.
And now we have a very cute bed frame which is suitable for both kids and adults.
As you can see in this picture, the bed is made up of multiple branches which aren’t polished. And that’s the main idea of it - it has to look like a cot inside a cottage in the middle of the woods.
The picture depicts a tiny bed but it actually depends on your preferences to choose just how big you want it to be. All you have to do is gather more wood if you want a king-sized version. So, chop-chop!
We personally love this one. It has a touch of rural life to it and it doesn’t seem to show anything off, yet it displays tranquility - something anyone would want to come home to after a hard day’s work.
The environment inside the room will be welcoming with the simple decor. The bed would be carefully crafted with wood branches and perhaps a few twigs as extras.
To create a pleasant experience inside, there should be enough windows for the sunlight to pass through.
Here’s another one which resembles a small cottage in the woods. This is a perfect idea for summer or winter homes, mostly.
However, that doesn’t mean it won’t work for an actual room. A shared bedroom for kids will be amazing with this idea. It probably will cost a lot since everything is made of wood, but the concept is unique.
And let's not keep aside the fact that this room looks magical - as if a lost princess used to stay here (maybe you get the reference). The point is that kids will fall in love with it.
via imgfave.com
Similar to the above, this bed is also meant for kids but younger. If you see that your little one loves sports and adventure at a young age, why not start off by personalizing the bed?
There is also a high chance that your kid will have more appreciation for nature later in life.
Anyway, coming back to the bed… If you have an apartment space in the city, this would be more convenient because it consumes less space and you can store multiple things underneath.
Moreover, you can always choose to paint it or not. Either way, it will look amazing.
If this one doesn’t look like a honeymoon bed to you, then we don’t know what does.
Boost up the romantic mood with this idea or something similar to it - all white with just the right amount of lighting. And yes, this will also work if you’re looking for ideas to dress up your bed and surprise your significant other.
To achieve that classy look, it’s always safe to match the sheet's color to that of the room. And as you can see in the picture, a large painting will complete the whole look.
via imgarcade.com
So we have already seen a few cottage-like bedrooms before, but nothing beats this one.
If you like the idea of building things from scratch and not using a single ready-made item (including decors), then step up your DIY game and get ready for this bed frame.
Of course, you will need to have enough knowledge about carpentry to come up with something like this. But once you get a hang of making furniture by yourself, we assure you it will be one of your favorite hobbies. Most people who get into DIY projects love expressing their own creativity every time.
Want an odd wood bed frame for your bed? Check this one out.
There are people who love things that appear organized, while there are people who find messy bed frames to be more aesthetic. This option is for the latter group.
The bed you see here looks as if it’s just been constructed 5 minutes ago using whichever wood we could find. But the thing is, there’s beauty in it.
The best thing is that you can have it made however you want it to be - it does not have to look exactly the same as the one in the picture.
After speaking about messy bed frames, here’s an idea for those who love symmetrical ones. Everything is uniform and in place.
The idea is to not make the bed too fancy and instead, use simple tree designs (as seen in this picture) which add enough beauty to the room.
The best trick to execute an idea like this successfully is to maintain a level of minimalism. If you feel that there’s too much stuff lying around in your room, maybe it’s time to consider decluttering?
The next bed frame we have is entirely made of polished wood.
This one has a lot of details which make it look unique. Of course, you can also have yours made according to your unique preferences.
Well, something like this would go better with a room that has a fair amount of antiques and plant decors. Let’s also not forget to match this with other wooden furniture such as wardrobes, chairs, and tables. This will give your space somewhat of a Victorian-era touch, hence, making it look highly expensive.
Source Unknown
If you like the idea of having a normal-looking room without too many extras, yet with a few nature-related decors, we can suggest making it look something just like this.
As you can see from the picture above, both the room and the bed look just like any normal bedroom would. But with the presence of the tree bed frames as bedposts, it looks more defined and beautiful.
via www.hotelphilosophy.com
Okay, so we have chosen this bed frame for those who do not like to include anything else in their bedroom except for a giant bed and a couple of side lamps.
If you like to have more space in your bedroom (at least around the area where the bed is), you might just need something like this.
We would understand if you find a big room with monochrome matching to be boring. That’s why we will suggest opting for a different wall color so that the room looks balanced, lively and a bit colorful.
Our next bed frame looks like it came straight from the 18th c period. With its black-painted tree designs, thick sheets, and fluffy pillows, you’ll feel like you’re living in the classical era every single time you step into the bedroom.
If you would like to experience what it’s like to sleep in a bed like that, try out an idea like this. Make sure to decorate your walls and have some expensive-looking vase (which you can get for cheap in thrift stores) inside the bedroom.
Want one more bed frame specifically for kids? Check this out.
If you live in a small house with not enough room to move about, consider having something like this installed. Children love extraordinary beds, so you might as well need to give them one. In which case, it will be a win-win situation for both you and the kids.
There will be plenty of room underneath where you can make good use out of it. Take the place from the photo, for example. There is enough space for a tiny living room with a bookshelf opposite to it.
Well, here is another design with stairs. This is great for both kids and adults to lay down on a hot sunny day.
If you want something similar to the picture, keep in mind that there is not a lot of room for storing other things underneath it. It is more of a fancy bed which is suitable for a house with a large space.
Rather than just leaving it as is, we would recommend either painting or polishing it so that it looks less messy and more attractive.
We know what you might be thinking: This looks as if someone just chopped big logs and kept them there.
Well, that may be true but we think this has to do more with being artistic than anything else.
If you have a creative mind which does not like to follow traditional designs, you’d love this idea at first glance. These logs don’t necessarily have to be attached to the bed as bed frames, but instead, can be set up as decors.
And as we mentioned that this is just an idea, take this as a sample to make use of your creativity and explore new designs.
via findingshibusa.com
Last but not least, we have this design that spells ‘Christmas’ all year round!
With a red theme, wooden bed, and a pair of night lamps beside, you’ll feel like you’re on winter holidays every time you step into the bedroom.
The best way to create this bedroom theme is to have a fireplace inside the room, some fluffy pillows or cushions, and some tree decors, of course! You might just fall in love with the idea of having your own Christmas theme inside your bedroom to turn any sad day around.
We usually complain about not having enough space in our closets for ll of the things we tend to gather in our life. But most of the time the problem is not the lack of space itself but the poor organization of it. We need to keep every little corner of our house organized in order to function properly everyday. Which is why we present a few methods of organizing an transforming your unused or poorly used better said closets. You will find that organizing and dividing the space can increase your storage and transform it as a whole. The entire organization scheme is not a complicated one, it just requires the proper shelves, cardboard boxes and a little bit of imagination and creativity. because you can turn your closet into a private little study, a hidden desk, a reading nook or a playground for your kid with little effort while being practical at the same time. So get bold and Transform and Reorganize Your Unused Closet And Think Outside The Box!
Transform and Reorganize Your Unused Closet
1. Organize the doors and store your wrapping necessities on it
2. Keep your clothes in order
3. Make a sewing desk
4. Organize your entry closet and make a bench where you can sit and put your shoes on
5. Turn an unused closet into a bar
6. Make a hidden work area
7. Play with colors and wallpaper for a beautiful design
8. Use cardboard boxes to store paperwork
9. Mix the sleeping area with a reading nook
10. Pops of color bring everything to life
11. Surround a sitting area with books
12. Don't be afraid to make a drastic change
13. Colors can make a huge difference
14. Hide a bed in a deep closet
15. Transform your unused closet into a kid's fortress
16. Or store your wine
17. Another sewing station
18. A little library in a closet
19. Turn an unused closet into a laundry station
20. Or a kid's changing station
21. Add more sitting spaces
22. And store your paperwork and stationary properly
23. Add chalkboard paint
24. And display your art
25. Make it into a cozy relaxing space
26. Use even the tiniest of spaces
27. Place the crib in an unused built-in-wall closet
28. Mix storage with a playground
29. Hide the desired space with curtains or doors
Pellet grills are also called pellet smokers are outdoor cooking systems that bring together elements of a gas grill, oven and charcoal smoker. The pellet grill works by using a hot rod that ignites the pellets along with a combustion fan that helps keep the fire burning. There are vents that line the interior of the firebox which creates a rounded airflow. The fan that’s placed in the pellet hopper helps maintain pressure and prevents any burn-back inside of the auger tube.
Using a pellet grill is the preferred choice for many who love outdoor cookouts in the summer for the variety and ease of use that it offers. An added advantage of using a pellet grill is that using this type of outdoor cooker can actually be good for your health. Keeping the benefits of using a pellet grill in mind, here we are going to review the Traeger Renegade Pro Grill.
6-in-1 Versatility: The Traeger Pro 22 is the original wood...
Precise Temperature Control: Achieve consistent results with...
Traeger is a brand that has been involved with grills for a long time. In fact, the company was the first one to invent the wood-fired grill over 30 years ago. Traeger continues to lead the way being the number one builder of wood-fired grills in the world. Spending years mastering their craft, the company is expected to deliver an exceptional level of quality with every wood-fired grill they produce and the Traeger Renegade Pro Grill is no exception.
One of the main benefits of cooking with wood is that it makes the food tastier. Apart from that, the Traeger Renegade Pro Grill is powered by top quality hardwood pellets and the temperature is controlled by a digital pro controller. This makes it possible to cook on a low heat and fast grilling. Thanks to the integration of the digital controller, all you have to do is to turn it on and set the temperature you want to cook on, and you’re good to go.
Some of the standout features of the Traeger Renegade Pro pellet grill are the digital pro controller, the duel meat temp probes, and the company’s patent advanced grilling logic. Other important features of the Traeger Renegade Pro pellet grill includes a convenient hopper clean out for easy maintenance along with sturdy all-terrain wheels.
Specifications
Dimensions: 39 x 27 x 50
Cooking Area: 380 square inches
Hopper Capacity: 18 lbs.
Weight: 109 pounds
Max temp: 450 degrees (F)
The Design
The design plays a big part while choosing a pellet grill. The first thing one notices with this grill’s design is its rounded shape that is large enough to cook in but small enough not to seem bulky. The brand name has been embossed in large letters right at the front of the lid. It’s underlined by an orange handle that’s used to slide open the cover once you’re ready to start cooking.
The pellet grill features a large 22” barrel where you can bake, smoke, grill, braise, BBQ and roast. The grease is discarded from the cooking area via a tube that runs into a cup on the side of the grill. On the other side of the unit is the mechanics of the pellet grill, which includes the temperature gauge that offers multiple temperature options for cooking. The addition of precision temperature control technology maintains the temperature within the grill ensuring precision while cooking.
The Traeger Renegade Pro is supported with a combination of two sturdy legs that are rounded at the bottom and a set of all-terrain wheels to pull it through grass or gravel. The stainless-steel handles on the side and on the lid have been well-built. It’s easy to see that Traeger used high-grade metal for the design, which ensures long-lasting service.
The Features
Traeger grills have always been known for their versatility as outdoor grills. The inclusion of pellets rather than charcoal means that you get food that’s tastier and healthier. For those who prefer that smoky taste, the pellet grill not only cooks the food but smokes it as well. The following are some of the features of the Traeger Renegade Pro pellet grill.
Versatility
One of the main features of this pellet grill is its versatility. With this grill, you can easily cook with a low of high flame. Its 6-in-1 cooking options means you can either grill, bake, roast, BBQ, braise or smoke your food with precision.
Precision Temperature Control
Being pioneers of the wood-grill, Traeger is always pushing the envelope when it comes to grill design and functionality and the Renegade Pro is no exception. Expect to get excelled precision while you cook using this pellet grill with a feature called Precision Temperature Control. According to the company, the control uses advanced grilling logic which helps maintain the temperature in the cooking area at (+/-) 15 degrees Fahrenheit for unmatched precision while cooking.
Auto-Start
Starting the Traeger Renegade Pro pellet grill is as easy as pushing a button. The design of this pellet grill features an electronic auto-start ignition, so you are not going to have any problems firing up this grill.
High-Grade Wood Pellets
Being a pellet grill, the Renegade Pro uses high-quality wood pellets as a source of fuel for cooking. Each bag of wood pellets can power the cooking system for up to 20 hours on the ‘smoke’ setting and up to 6 hours on ‘high’ mode. The pellets can deliver a maximum temperature of up to 450 degrees.
Ideal Size
One of the main standout features of the Renegade Pro is its grilling area which measures at 380 square inches, making it the perfect size for cooking foods, ranging from burgers to ribs.
Hopper Clean Out
The hopper clean out has been included in the design of this pellet grill which makes it easier to replace the pellets. Whether you’re looking to replace the pellets in the grill or just change the flavor of the pellets, the hopper clean out makes it easy to clean and maintain the grill. It should be noted that the hopper has a capacity of 18 pounds, which should not be exceeded.
Pros
Solid steel construction
Versatile 6-in-1 cooking options
Dual meat temperature probes
Features a Digital Pro Controller with AGL for cooking precision
Cons
Not big enough to cook for larger families
Traeger Renegade Pro Conclusion
The Renegade Pro is the ideal size for cooking meals outdoors for family and friends. The Traeger Renegade Pro is one of the latest models from the company that has been building wood grills for more than three decades. In short, the Renegade Pro delivers unmatched quality when it comes to its build and functionality, which makes it a must-have for those who love summer barbecues in the backyard.
Not everybody is born with an elephant’s memory, which leads to a tendency to lose things. However, finding things is much easier and effortless with advancing technology.
If you are the kind of person who always wished there was a tracker on everything, you’re in luck. Tech companies have taken the onus of making life a little bit easier for everyone by making products that track lost items. The two most popular ones right now are TrackR and Tile.
In our guide today, we will be exploring what both these products are about. We will be going into some details like how they function, some similarities, and of course, what differentiates them from each other. Hopefully, by the end of this guide, you will be able to make a clear decision about which one is better for your needs.
So, without further ado, let’s look for some answers!
TrackR vs. Tile | All You Need to Know
Before we get into which out of the two products is better, let’s talk about why you might need a tracker and when to buy one. Most Bluetooth trackers are quite affordable and compact, so they do not take up a lot of space. These trackers are great for small items as well as for kids and pets that like to run about.
Bluetooth trackers are ideal for people who have a tendency to lose things like keys, glasses, wallets, or just want a tracker as a precautionary measure. Since they are usually compact, attaching them to anything does not add to the item’s weight. And that’s why products like TrackR and Tile are so popular. Now, let’s explore each of them individually!
TrackR launched in 2010 and has been a helpful little device to everyone ever since. This one launched before Tile, so it had an advantage since it was the first of its kind. It’s basically a small Bluetooth tracker that effortlessly attaches to any item. TrackR is a battery-operated device with replaceable batteries.
Coming to how it works, it is reasonably easy to understand. It can connect to your phone or any device that has Bluetooth. Once it is attached to the item, it will keep an eye out for it. If the item goes too far from the phone, it can notify you, hence making it an excellent anti-theft device as well.
All the tracking is done via a phone app which makes it easy to monitor. The product itself is not very expensive and is catered to people who are on a tight budget. Apart from having a loud and audible alarm, it also has lights to make it more visible. However, it does come with its own set of drawbacks.
TrackR comes in two versions - TrackR Bravo and TrackR Pixel. Unfortunately, those are the only two options available that are limiting when compared to Tile’s product options (which we will discuss in a bit). Plus, it is not waterproof, so it cannot be attached to anything that primarily stays outdoors like bikes.
TrackR Types
As we mentioned above, TrackR is available in two versions. They are both great trackers with a decent range of about 100 feet. Plus, it is compatible with both iOS and Android devices. However, the Bravo is an older version which is why Pixel is the preferred one.
While they both function quite well as trackers, Pixel is more compact than Bravo. Moreover, the former is also louder in terms of decibels. Pixel has a decibel level of 90 while Bravo stands at 82. Another great thing is that the shape of the TrackR Pixel is circular with light around it, which makes it more visible in dimly lit rooms.
Tile launched in 2013 but gained traction rather quickly. It is a small weightless tile that can track anything it is attached to. Just like TrackR, this one also needs to be connected to Bluetooth. After its initial launch, it released another generation with added features and enhanced performance in 2015.
In the second generation batch, the products were made to have a better range and louder speakers. The tile mobile app is pretty simple to understand as well. All you need to do is head over to the map section of the app to see where things are.
From this point on, it is quite easy to find the missing item. Just like any map, you can navigate to the item to locate its exact spot. After reaching the area, if it is still not visible, then click on the “find” button, and a loud audible alarm will go off.
As we mentioned earlier, the second generation has a better Bluetooth range than the first. The most baseline model has a range of about 200 feet, which is a lot more than what TrackR has to offer. Tile’s premium model has an increased range of 400 feet.
Other than these features, an additional (and subscription-based) feature is info sharing. Tile users can share information regarding the items a Tile is attached to along with tracking privileges on paying the subscription fee. This makes it easier for two people to locate shared things like house keys and car keys.
Tile, as good as it sounds, also has a few drawbacks. To start with, it is much more expensive than TrackR, especially the premium models. Plus, it does not have replaceable batteries, which means that users will have to buy a new one if it gets spoilt.
Tile Types
Tile takes a very common problem everyone has and attempts to solve it while maintaining an elegant design that is suited for all. Tile Sport is rugged-looking and made for the outdoors, while Tile Style focuses on having a feminine design as it is made for women. However, both of these are waterproof with an IP68 rating. Apart from the different look, they are essentially the same.
Apart from Style and Sport, Tile has two more variants - Mate and Slim. Tile Mate is the baseline model and the least expensive of the lot. Slim, on the other hand, is a bit more expensive and has a sleeker look. They both have a range of 100 feet and a waterproof rating of IP 57.
They are both similar in everything except design as Tile Slim is made to fit into thinner spaces like a wallet and passports. On the other hand, Tile Mate is a little thicker and can be attached to backpacks or used as a keyring.
Tile and TrackR - Similarities
App
The first similarity between the two is that they both need to be used with an app. Whether it is an iOS or Android device, the app is the most critical aspect of this product. In order to use these trackers to the fullest of their capabilities, it is necessary to register on the app and then set it up.
Usage
There is no way this can work if the tracker is not attached to the item since those items usually do not have an independent bluetooth connection. Hence, the trackers need to be hooked, glued, or just slipped into all your stuff that needs monitoring.
Alarm
The tracker loses its efficiency if it cannot alert the user of the missing items’ whereabouts. This is why both the products have loud and audible alarms that will notify you about the items as long as you’re in the range. TrackR even has an alarm that will go off if the item goes too far away from the phone.
Tile and TrackR - Differences
Batteries
One of the most significant differences between the two is that one has replaceable batteries while the other does not. TrackR is the one with replaceable batteries, and what this does is, it eliminates the expense of buying new batteries. Since Tile does not come with replaceable batteries, people will have to buy new models if the old one gets spoiled.
Water Resistance
TrackR is not waterproof while Tile is, making it a better option for people who need to monitor outdoor items. The baseline products have an IP 57 waterproof rating, while the newer premium ones have a rating of IP 67. The latter is aimed for more outdoor use and the Sport variant is one of them.
Needless to say, this waterproof rating does not allow the Tile to be submerged in water. However, slight water contact like at the pool or during light rains is not going to affect its performance. This is a lot better than TrackR, which is not waterproof at all.
Range and Geofencing
TrackR only offers a range of 100 feet in all its models. This is a lot lower than Tile, the baseline model of which has a range of 200 feet, and it goes up to 400 feet in the premium models. However, the good thing about TrackR is that it will notify you if the item is too far from the phone.
Geofencing is a product’s ability to inform you about the area you are in. TrackR’s feature where it notifies that the device is out of range is called Geofencing, which is not available in Tile.
Shape
Lastly, the two differ in shape. Tile is a small square-shaped device, sometimes with a hook to convert it into a keychain, while TrackR is circular. This is not much of a factor that can determine whether you will buy it, but it is definitely something to keep in mind.
Which Bluetooth Tracker Is Superior?
After discussing both in detail, it is evident that these trackers are not very different from each other. However, the differences they do have can be a strong reason for choosing one over the other. There are certain aspects to be sure about before you decide which one is best suited to your needs.
The first thing to consider is whether the item that needs tracking is an indoor or outdoor item. If it is mostly indoors, buying TrackR will be a much better option since it is not waterproof and does not need a huge range. This can actually save you some bucks as well.
However, if the item that needs tracking is a bike or car, then Tile is better. Even if you want extra protection and a longer range for an indoor item, then Tile is the one to choose. The only issue is that it is a bit more expensive than TrackR.
The next thing to keep in mind is whether you want to spend money on new batteries or a new tracker altogether. If it is the latter, then it won’t be an issue to invest in Tile. This is mainly because Tile does not come with replaceable batteries and needs to be replaced if damaged.
In this regard, TrackR is better if you do not want to spend excessive amounts on new trackers. Having a spare set of batteries at home is much more cost-efficient than going out and buying new trackers.
Geofencing can also be a significant point to consider, but this is only helpful if it is actually needed. This is especially for people who want to put trackers on pets and children. This way, they will know if the kid or pet has run out of range.
Conclusion
And there you have it - a detailed guide on everything you need to know about TrackR and Tile. We hope this has been informative and cleared the air of confusion regarding these products.
Both the brands we have reviewed are very efficient and reliable, so it can be challenging to pick a favorite. We strongly suggest noting down which features are the most important and then seeing if the desired brand has those features.
To sum it up, TrackR is affordable, small, and does what it says. Tile, on the other hand, is the more premium alternative. The choice is, now, in your hands.
We shall be back soon with many more such guides. Until then, stay safe and alert!
Buying a new toilet calls for a lot of brainstorming and intensive research!
Given how indispensable toilets are, you don’t want to end up with a sub-par model that provides neither comfort nor efficiency. So, shelling out a few extra dollars and getting a reliable model might be the most intelligent way to go about your purchase.
Toto is one of the leading toilet manufacturing brands since 1917, and we’re sure the internet has told you as much. With its durable frame and powerful flush technology, its appeal and functionality are unrivaled.
The Neorest range from the brand, in particular, offers several smart toilets with highly advanced features. In this guide, we’ve reviewed the best Neorest toilet models and included a buyer’s guide to help you make an informed decision.
The perfect integration of luxury and comfort, the NX1 is one of the finest models from this series. Its elliptical silhouette becomes a stylish addition to your bathroom, and the durable ceramic framework enhances longevity. Besides, several hi-tech features add to its overall appeal.
CEFIONTECT ceramic glaze creates a very smooth surface for...
Why Did We Like It?
The Toto Neorest NX1 offers a customized experience with its adjustable spray that includes pulsating, oscillating, rear, and soft rear cleanse options.
It comes with a dual, automatic flush system that operates on siphon jet technology and focuses on water conservation. As a result, the flush works independently and alternates between 0.8 GPF and 1 GPF, depending on the requirement.
Besides its Tornado flush system, we have Ewater+ technology that automatically sprays electrolyzed water to keep the bowl in top-notch condition and reduces the need to use harsh cleaning chemicals. In addition, the Cefiontect glaze ensures that residue doesn’t stick to the bowl.
Also, we’d like to highlight certain features like the nightlight, remote control, and seat sensors that activate automatically and enhance the overall toilet experience. Finally, there is the air deodorizer that keeps the air around the toilet clean and odor-free.
What Could’ve Been Better?
With the inclusion of numerous deluxe features, it doesn’t come as a surprise that this unit is pretty expensive. Besides, although the one-piece design makes it easy to clean and install, in case of any damage to one part, the entire toilet needs to be replaced. This can be pretty inconvenient, given the price of the model.
Another favorite among buyers, the 550H is for all the minimalists out there! With its Sedona beige finish and one-piece design, it can blend with your bathroom décor and fit into small spaces. But that’s not it; read on to know what makes this product such a popular pick.
A cold toilet seat on winter mornings is an inconvenience we’d all like a solution to, and you have to look no further than this Toto Neorest 550H model for it. The seat sensors open and shut the lid automatically, and you’ll always be met with a comfortable, heated seat.
Moving on, we have its cyclone flush technology that pushes down water at an accelerated pace for efficient flushing. Adding to the water conservation efforts of Toto, this model features a dual, automatic flush option, using 0.8 GPF and 1 GPF for different requirements.
Focusing especially on hygiene, the Ewater+ technology uses electrolyzed water to rinse the bowl and disinfect the wand, thus preventing dirt and debris accumulation. In addition, the SanaGloss glaze minimizes the chances of mold, gunk, or bacteria sticking to the surface and keeps your toilet in a sanitized condition throughout.
Finally, we have the three adjustable washlet modes - rear, soft, and front - for proper cleaning.
What Could’ve Been Better?
Although single-piece toilets are usually easy to install, that is not the case with this Toto Neorest model. Even if you are an expert in DIY plumbing jobs, the task at hand is quite tricky, and you should go through the instruction manual carefully.
Alternatively, we recommend hiring a professional to install the toilet for you.
The Toto Neorest 700H is the meeting point of opulence and quality. Its sleek appearance and single-piece design can fit into any bathroom space and enhance its overall appearance. Despite being compact, it doesn’t compromise on comfort and is ADA-compliant too. Keep reading to know all the deets about this brilliant product!
Bidet seat with rear cleanse, soft rear cleanse, front...
Auto Open/Close lid and seat with heated seat and...
Why Did We Like It?
Made of high-quality ceramic material, the toilet is durable and features an elongated bowl for added comfort. Besides, the Cefiontect glaze doesn’t let debris or mold cling to the surface, thus improving the longevity and hygiene of the toilet.
The tornado flush technology releases a powerful stream of water that cleans the entire bowl in one go while merely using 1 GPF. In addition, the rimless bowl design prevents the sticking of dust or bacteria.
Moving on, the Ewater+ technology acts as a bleaching agent and cleans the bowl and the wand with an electrolyzed solution. This helps in keeping the toilet stain-free and well-sanitized.
Furthermore, the toilet comes with a wand that offers multiple washing options such as front, rear, pulsating, and oscillating modes to ensure efficient cleaning.
With automatic seat sensors, a night light, an air deodorizer, and remote control operation, this model has a range of hi-tech features that improve its performance.
What Could’ve Been Better?
The 700H model from Toto is a near-perfect unit, and we don’t have any complaints as such. However, it’s quite an expensive purchase, thanks to its numerous new-gen features.
Besides, since this model is tankless, it depends on electricity to function correctly. This can be an inconvenience in case of a power failure.
Pros
Low water consumption
Focus on proper sanitization
Efficient flushing technology
Multiple wash options
Stylish and comfortable design
Cons
Costly
Needs electricity for optimal performance
Toto Neorest Toilets Buyer’s Guide
Those were our reviews for the top three models from the Toto Neorest range. These models have made quite a name for themselves with their numerous and highly advanced features and intrigued potential buyers. But, which model should you buy? To make the decision easier for you, we’ve curated this buyer’s guide. So, let’s take a look!
Water Consumption
The growing focus on sustainability across the globe has compelled leading brands to launch toilets with water-saving technology. Incorporating a powerful flushing system and dual flush technology are surefire ways to guarantee low water consumption.
The water consumed is measured in gallons per flush (GPF), and the industry standard is 1.6. Any toilet model that consumes 1.6 GPF or less can be classified under high-efficiency toilets.
Besides, brands like Toto have teamed up with WaterSense to combat water wastage and design highly sustainable models.
Flushing Technology
A toilet is only as good as its flush. Cyclone flush or tornado flush technology creates a powerful siphon that allows water to flow downwards in full force. This eliminates the waste while also ensuring the residue doesn’t stick to the surface.
Furthermore, the dual flush option allows the user to alternate between half and full flushes, depending on the type of waste.
Design
Toilets come in different shapes and sizes. The type of toilet you need primarily depends on the space availability, bathroom aesthetics, and of course, the features.
Single-piece toilets are compact with an integrated tank that makes installation easy. Owing to its stylish appearance, it has gained widespread popularity on the market.
Moving on, toilet bowls usually come in three shapes - elongated, circular, and square. The elongated design is the most popular, given its comfort and large surface area. Today, most brands, including Toto, focus on manufacturing elongated yet compact bowls that can fit into narrow spaces.
Lastly, we'd like to point out that all models in this range are ADA-compliant, with seat sensors and auto flushing, making it a fantastic choice for people with mobility issues.
Advanced Features
Besides the fundamental factors, there are certain advanced features that enhance the overall efficiency of a toilet. Let’s see what they are!
Multiple Wash Modes
The Toto Neorest range offers multiple cleaning options, such as front, rear, soft rear, oscillating, and pulsating modes. The adjustable wand helps you set your preferred positions and ensures proper cleaning.
In addition, you can also modify the water pressure and temperature as per your needs.
Ewater+ Technology
Perhaps the most striking feature of this range is the Ewater+ technology. In this, regular tap water is converted into an electrolyzed form that cleanses the bowl and prevents the accumulation of dust and residue.
It acts as a bleaching agent and breaks down any stains that might form on the ceramic seat. Once it is done cleaning, the acidic water goes back to its original form. Thus, you don’t have to waste time scrubbing your toilet with harsh chemicals to get a clean washroom.
Smart Features
Certain smart features such as night light, seat sensors, remote control operation, and auto open/shut lid add tremendously to the overall user experience. Minimizing the need for human intervention, these features create a comfortable atmosphere for you.
It also makes controlling the device a breeze, thus simplifying operation and increasing user satisfaction.
Air Deodorizer
The in-built air deodorizer comes with a carbon filter that absorbs unpleasant odor from around the toilet, creating a pleasant atmosphere. You can activate and control the deodorizer through the remote control or the side panel.
Toto Neorest Toilets Verdict
With that, we come to the end of our reviews and buyer’s guide.
The Toto Neorest series is one of the most reliable and efficient toilets on the market, with a particular focus on hygiene and user comfort. It's exceptionally advanced features and luxurious design make it an excellent addition to your bathroom space.
Besides, with in-built deodorizers and a self-sufficient cleaning system, it saves time and effort. We hope our guide has helped highlight the key features and advantages of the three best models in this range.
Although their characteristics closely overlap, we’d still recommend the 550H unit for those looking for a relatively low-priced model. If you want a highly advanced toilet with all the upgraded features, then look no further than the 700H model.
That’s all for today. Do let us know which model caught your eye in the comments below.
The flooring industry has recently seen a boom in the use of epoxy resins, because of which multiple products have emerged on the market. This has consequently made it quite difficult for the buyers to choose which product to invest in.
If you find yourself in such a dilemma, our guide might be of help to you. We’ve put together a detailed review-based guide, talking about all the features of TotalBoat resin epoxy.
We’ve also included a buyer’s guide to further simplify the decision-making. We hope you’ll get a better picture after going through it.
Let’s get started without further ado!
As you must already know, TotalBoat resin epoxy is a formula used for fixing, repairing, or curing wooden objects like boats in particular. People also use it for artistic purposes like creating resin art or laying down different types of floors.
Don’t let the name delude you because TotalBoat resin isn’t restricted to boat use only and has an extensive range of applications. The brand started with marine epoxy but now has a significant line of products, including hardeners, polyester resin, alcohol inks, powder pigments, fiberglass sheets, and epoxy adhesives.
TotalBoat resin epoxies are one of the best options available on the market right now. They are known for their weatherproof and moisture-resistant properties. Once you use them on a project, you can quit worrying about a recoat or repair for years.
As we discussed, TotalBoat has many epoxy resins that specialize in different areas. Let’s have a look at the major types one by one.
1. TotalBoat Table Top Epoxy
As the name suggests, Table Top Epoxy is tailor-made for covering tables, kitchen countertops, and bar counters. Ideal for remodeling projects in bathrooms and kitchens, this epoxy resin is ideal to use if you want an ultra-clear and top-quality finish.
You can use it on a variety of surfaces like metal, wood, stone, concrete, and ceramic. It is also suitable for resin art and serious applications like decoupage, casting, and embedding.
Furthermore, the resin is super-easy to apply and levels itself without much hassle. Just mix one part resin with one part hardener, and there it is! You can add liquid stain, mica pigments, or alcohol dye for coloration if you want some jazz, otherwise, leave it as it is, and you’re good to go.
However, the epoxy might turn yellow if exposed to sunlight for a long time, so it’s advisable to use another hard resin covering on top of it. Doing that will also protect it from scratches, making it long-lasting and rugged.
What We Like
The finish is as smooth as glass
Easy to handle and pour
Self-setting and leveling
Simple mixing ratio
What We Don't Like
Might get yellow if exposed to the sun a lot
Best Used For: Coating table tops and bar tops with a clear, high-gloss finish | Mix Ratio: 1:1 | Full Cure Time: 5-7 days | Finish: Clear | UV-Resistant: No | VOC-free: Yes | BPA-free: Yes
2. TotalBoat Penetrating Epoxy
Apart from being good covering agents, resin materials are excellent sealants and can be used for curing holes and damage. The penetrating epoxy specializes in sealing and protecting purposes, especially when it comes to wooden objects or furniture.
It is a dual-part epoxy resin system that penetrates deep inside the wood and protects it from rotting. The formula hardens inside the damaged area and serves as a filling, preserving the object from moisture and environmental factors.
Moreover, TotalBoat penetrating epoxy is one of the earliest products manufactured by the company and, therefore, is equipped with fantastic repairing and restorative properties. You can use this marine-grade resin for renovating your wooden boat, repairing wooden structures, and woodwork projects.
What’s more, the formula has a sleek finish like that of paint yet doesn’t release any toxic fumes or VOCs. It has a wide scope of applications and sticks well on softwoods like cypress, pine, cedar, redwood, fir, and hardwoods, including maple, teak, oak, and mahogany.
What We Like
Two different formulas for hot and cold climate
Has low viscosity
Sticks on almost all types of woods
Seals damaged and rotten wood
What We Don't Like
Can get really hot while curing
Best Used For: Sealing new wood or restoring rotten wood | Mix Ratio: 2:1 | Full Cure Time: 2 days @ 80°F, 4 days @ 40°F | Finish: Clear | UV-Resistant: No | VOC-free: Yes | BPA-free: Yes
3. TotalBoat ThickSet
Living up to its name, TotalBoat Thickset epoxy resin can be poured in multiple thick layers and is primarily used for molding. It has a crystal-clear sheen and is cast deeply on horizontal surfaces. The best part is, that it is available in three different packages so you can get exactly the quantity you need.
The epoxy resin is mixed with a hardener in a 3:1 ratio, with a 1-inch thick pour for large molds and a 2-inch thick layer for smaller ones. You wouldn’t need to level or smoothen out the final surface since the resin is self-leveling.
Although the epoxy has several upsides, it is slightly difficult to pour, given the thick formula and high viscosity. Other than that, this one is the go-to type for DIYers and professional artisans.
Additionally, the clear and glossy surface can easily be colored using mica granules and highly concentrated liquid dyes. The low VOC formula is ideal for both indoor and outdoor use.
What We Like
Specially designed for moldings and thick pours
Easy to color or tint
Sufficient time for modification since the curing time is long
High-end glossy finish
What We Don't Like
The mixing ratio is tricky
Best Used For: Smaller castings and pours; ideal for castings using less than 16 fl. oz. per pour | Mix Ratio: 3:1 | Full Cure Time: 5-7 days | Finish: Clear | UV-Resistant: No | VOC-free: Low VOC | BPA-free: Yes
4. TotalBoat Makerpoxy
Makerpoxy is a professional-grade resin that TotalBoat developed in collaboration with the immensely talented resin artist Jess Crow. With her experience and knowledge, Jess precisely knows which type of resin is well-suited for which project, and Makerpoxy was designed keeping in mind all her requirements.
The mixed formula flows freely and is used for furniture pieces like river tables, coffee tables, headboards, and art (both resin and wall). Having been crafted by a designer, it’s a given that the resin takes up color exceptionally well and can be used to create intricate patterns. That’s because it has a very long curing period, giving you enough time to play around with the texture.
You get about sixty minutes after mixing the hardener and the resin ( at 75 degrees Fahrenheit) to create your design, which is ideal for beginners. In addition to that, you can secure the epoxy against UV radiation using an overcoat of urethane or varnish. The resinous surface has a glass-like and scratch-resistant finish that doesn’t turn yellow over time.
What We Like
Low odors, safe for longer usage
Luxurious and elegant look with a glass-like finish
Extended work time, perfect for first-timers
Easy mixing ratio
What We Don't Like
The air bubbles are challenging to get rid of
Best Used For: Jewelry, coasters, geode art, coating bars and table tops, and ocean wave effect serving boards | Mix Ratio: 1:1 | Full Cure Time: 5-7 days | Finish: Clear | UV-Resistant: Yes | VOC-free: Low VOC | BPA-free: Yes
5. TotalBoat High-Performance Epoxy Kits
Last but not least, we’ll tell you about the all-inclusive high-performance epoxy kits. This one is made keeping in mind the convenience of the users, as it offers all the necessary equipment in one package.
The kit comes with a blush-free hardener, low viscous resin, mixing cups, and sticks. It also priorly measured hand pumps for dispensing hardener and epoxy accurately and with ease. This means no more stress about taking accurate measurements while working on your projects.
Furthermore, the resin is made to be used on boats for coating, laminating, and vacuum bagging purposes. The hardener is clear and non-blushing, ensuring there isn’t any pre-added tint and the epoxy coating remains clear. One part is mixed with two parts of resin to obtain the perfect composition.
Since there isn’t any blush in the hardener, you wouldn’t have to wash the surface repeatedly while working, and that saves a lot of time.
What We Like
You get a choice between three different hardeners
A straightforward mixing ratio of 2:1
All in one kit, wouldn’t need to buy anything else
No time-wasting washdowns
Top-quality end finish
What We Don't Like
Strong smell
Can soak into woods
Best Used For: Boat building and repairs, glassing projects & clear coating applications | Mix Ratio: 2:1 | Full Cure Time: Slow Hardener: 5-7 days @ 77°F, Medium Hardener: 3-5 days @ 77°F, Fast Hardener: 2-5 days @ 77°F | Finish: Clear/Light Amber | UV-Resistant: No | VOC-free: Low VOC | BPA-free: Yes
What is the Best TotalBoat Resin Epoxy?
This table serves as a concise guide to TotalBoat Resin Epoxy options, offering insights into their recommended uses, mixing ratios, curing times, finishes, and additional features like UV resistance and environmental friendliness.
Boat building and repairs, glassing projects & clear coating applications
2:1
Slow Hardener: 5-7 days @ 77°F, Medium Hardener: 3-5 days @ 77°F, Fast Hardener: 2-5 days @ 77°F
Clear/Light Amber
No
Low VOC
Yes
TotalBoat Resin Epoxy Buying Guide
Now that we’ve told you all about TotalBoat resin epoxy and its different products, we’re done with the first half of our extensive guide. We’ll proceed to discuss all the parameters and features that you must consider before buying a resin epoxy.
The following are the key points worth noting:
Application
First and foremost, you need to have a clear idea of where you’ll use the epoxy resin before you buy any product. As we already discussed, there are different types of epoxies that specialize in different areas; for example, TotalBoat Table Top is the best for countertops and surfaces, Thickset works wonders in molding, penetrating epoxy is good for sealing, etc.
So, once you know your needs, choosing an epoxy resin becomes child’s play. However, if you don’t have any specific usage, you can go for a general multi-purpose resin to have a more comprehensive utility. In our opinion, the TotalBoat high-performance epoxy kits are the best when it comes to all-around use.
Curing Period
The curing period is another crucial factor that you should consider while buying epoxy resin. Some products have a short drying period, while others take multiple days to set. If you’re in a hurry to lay down your flooring or a basic tabletop, quick-drying epoxies are your best bet.
However, when it comes to bigger artistic projects, a fast-curing resin won’t work when you want to create a detailed pattern in the epoxy. For that, you’ll have to use the products with longer setting periods, so you have ample time to create your artistic pattern. That’ll give you the freedom to manipulate the epoxy and work creatively on your piece.
Durability
Naturally, when you’re spending your hard-earned money on something, you want to have good returns on your investment. That’s why it’s important to look at the longevity of an epoxy resin. If your project cracks up or loses its sheen in a couple of months, all will seem like a waste, a situation you must avoid.
The question is, how will you find out if an epoxy resin is sturdy or not? Well, it can only be found out after use, but a few ways can help you make an estimation. All TotalBoat products are extremely durable as they have a formula that sticks well to most surfaces and acts like tough cement.
Also, more rugged formulas will come at a higher price range than usual, so avoid buying the cheapest option.
Weather Resistance
It matters whether the resin is weather-resistant or not, especially if you’re going to use it for outdoor purposes. Some resins tend to get yellow when kept in the sun for a long time and lose their initial shine and finish.
In contrast, many TotalBoat epoxy resins are weatherproof and UV-protected, making them immune to their surroundings’ negative effects. They are also resistant to moisture and do not react badly to frequent water contact. Since the company specializes in boat resins, water resistance is the strongest suit in its entire product range.
Hardener
Hardeners are of different types; some are harsh, while others are soft. They come in different curing periods and can be categorized into slow, medium, and fast hardeners, depending on their drying time.
Tough hardeners are more likely to release noxious fumes. Hence it is advisable to restrict them for outdoor use or structures requiring high tensile strength, like lying on the floor.
Additionally, some hardening agents have an inherent tint and are known for their blushing properties, while others are blush-free. If you want a crystal clear final finish, then avoid the former. It requires a lot of washing and water runs down during the process and doesn’t give the desired result.
Where Can You Buy TotalBoat Resin Epoxy?
TotalBoat resin epoxy products are very easily available in local hardware and DIY stores, and of course, if you don’t want to go about searching in a store, you can order them online.
An extensive range of resins is available on Amazon, which might be difficult to find in an actual store. Other than that, the company has its own line of online stores, and you can find all the details on its official website.
The brand offers a very helpful customer assistance service, where boaters having hands-on experience answer all the queries. So, whenever you feel stuck with anything related to resin epoxy or boats, you can simply call them for solutions.
Which TotalBoat hardener is the best?
Well, that mostly depends on the qualities you’re looking for, but to give you a general overview, we’ll tell you our top picks. You can use a high-performance fast hardener if you’re short on time and want faster curing. This hardener is best for overnight curing at 55 degrees Fahrenheit.
Most commonly, medium hardeners work effectively for general applications and cure overnight at room temperature (77 degrees Fahrenheit). Lastly, slow hardeners are better suited for warmer conditions and higher temperatures.
Are TotalBoat epoxy resin-coated tables safe for food?
Yes, TotalBoat epoxy is BPA-free and is safe for indirect contact with food. You can go ahead and coat your table with this resin without any toxic hazards or health implications.
What are the ideal conditions for working on epoxy?
There aren’t any hard and fast rules when it comes to working with epoxy, except being mindful of the temperature. The advisable temperature range for the resin application is 55 degrees Fahrenheit, but it can be slightly higher while pump dispensing.
Conclusion
And with that, we’ve reached the end of our review-based guide on TotalBoat resin epoxy. These resins are quite popular in the industry, and their buzz is completely justifiable, given all the features they offer.
TotalBoat epoxy resins are strong, long-lasting, and give a beautiful finish. They have multi-dimensional applications, ranging from coating tables to creating patterned floors and artistic pieces.
You can further research the specifications of products offered by the company to get a better idea. That’s it for us guys.
Until next time!
Christmas is just a few days away, and we could not be more excited. It is a time of joy, celebration, peace, and tranquility – a moment when everything falls into place, and we have the chance to spend more time with our loved ones. By now, the Christmas tree is usually decorated in anticipation of Old Saint Nick, and the remaining time is spent adorning the rest of the household, preparing sweets and treats for the Christmas family dinner, and making last-minute errands and gift purchases.
For those who haven't had the chance to take a break and properly prepare for the winter holidays, finding the right Christmas tree can seem overwhelming. However, recycling comes to the rescue, offering a charming and creative alternative to the traditional pine tree: pallet Christmas tree designs. The incredibly versatile pallet can serve as the foundation for string lights, handmade decorations, and even as a canvas for your painting skills. You can use the wood in its classic pallet shape or disassemble and rearrange the pieces as you see fit. Let's take a look at a few ideas.
Pallet Christmas Tree Designs
1. simple distressed pallet tree in a silver coat
Use half a log to form the base of the tree and white string lights for an elegant effect.
2. hand painted white Christmas tree on a brown pallet
You could sketch the tree with a pencil and follow the lines using white spray paint. Add nails from which you can then hang your colorful ornaments.
Have you ever considered using a pallet to form your Christmas tree instead of buying the classical pine one? Feel free to share your decorations and ideas in the comment section below.
The door is the first thing you present and expose of your home to the rest of the world. It tells a story of the mysterious world contained inside and expresses a little bit of your personality as well.It makes of statement about your character and the method chosen for you to present yourself to the surroundings. Bright tones tend to attract curious eyes and excite the senses. Pastel tones or natural hues and materials such as aged wood exudes romanticism and a tendency to dream and wonder. Stone carved intricate doors are mysterious, strange and alluring in a peculiar way telling yo to keep a safe distance whilst drawing you in like a magnet. Whatever design line and style you opt to go with, take into consideration the impact your front door has to your guest and yourself as well. How do you want your home to be perceived? How would you like to be received? We have dared to dream and searched in lost forgotten corners for a little bit of magic.Top 20 Out Of This World Magical Door Designs await your critical eye int he gallery presented below. We invite you to cast a glance at the wonders they hold and to leave your valuable feedback in the comment section placed at the end of the gallery.
World Magical Door
1. A bold red and brick contrast
2. Yellow and mint green in a fresh colorful combination
3. in a corner of a forest lost between roots and magic
4. powerful contrasts catch the eye
5. elegance and refinement in blue hues
6. dream in pink tones
7. Mediterranean design line
8. romance and nature taking over
9. bold and powerful
10. old and intricate
11. magical and sumptuous
12. delicate and fragile
13. the power underneath the colors
14. mysterious and odd
15. intricate and strong
16. complex in design and elegant in details
17. simplicity overpowering
18. organic baroque
19. cheerful and fresh
20. delicate and vibrant
What do you think about the collection above? What does your front door look like? Feel free to share your thoughts in the comment section below.
Decorating a child;s room is something we have become more and more interested in the last few years. We begin an entire process of nesting from the creation of the baby nursery to its development further on and transformations as the kid's preferences evolve with time. An unique method of decorating a room without going through the expensive stage of changing furniture is the creation of a wall mural. Under this term we define a variety of wall treatments, including wallpaper, wall decals and even hand painting.Here are some tips on how to create a wall mural for your child's room:
if uncertain use pastel neutral hues
delicate flowers and canopies are suitable for a girl's room
tr and invest into an educational wall mural such as the animal world map mural
never forget about fairy-tale characters, they will always be loved
opt for a hand painted mural if you feel up to the challenge, it will mean more to everyone
Now let's cast a glance at a few wall mural ideas and projects and seek inspiration.
1. choose a mountain landscape and paint it onto a focus wall
Never underestimate the power of the natural landscape, it will create a dreamy serene and calm atmosphere you should desire in a child's room.
Have you ever considered creating a mural in your child's room? Feel free to share your ideas and projects in the comment section below.
The kitchen represents the core of any home, modern or traditional in essence. It is only space we all tend to gather each day, for breakfast, dinner and other special occasions. Each and every single one of us clings to one sweet memory from childhood involving this special place, memory that in most cases will last for a lifetime. Decorating a kitchen has become more and more easy with each passing day as new appliances rise on the technological market, aiding us in our daily incursions in the culinary arts. Nonetheless, contemporaneity has preserved the basic primary requirements of the kitchen itself and evolved around them: modern sleek finishes, state of the art gadgets, all meant to improve our lifestyle and shorten the actual time spent cooking.
But for the ones who are in love with the culinary arts, the time spent in the kitchen mixing up special ingredients and producing magical dishes for the loved ones is essential. Here details come into perspective: texture, hue, material, lighting, overall decor, greenery, atmosphere, all contribute into creating the perfect environment where everyone finds "home". Wood has been and we hope will continue to be the primary material used in kitchen designs due to its immense attributes: intricate texture, cozy warm feeling exuded and multitude of varieties. It can be mixed and matched to respond to any style and tendency whilst preserving its noble origin and aesthetics.Below we have chose what we fave found as the Top 20 Most Beautiful Wooden Kitchen Designs To Pin Right Now. Cast a glance an choose your favorite design.
1. SIMPLE MODERN WOODEN KITCHEN WITH AN IMPRESSIVE BACK-SPLASH
We invite you to choose your favorite from the above 20 beautiful wooden kitchen designs and to pin it, share it, and express your opinions about the design itself with us in the comment section below.
One of the motivations behind undertaking a DIY craft is to recycle the used products or emptied containers, which otherwise get thrown away and add up to the garbage pile. A toilet paper roll is one such thing.You can undergo a series of crafts that revolve around recycling toilet paper rolls, some of which will be strictly functional, while others will provide purely aesthetic pleasure. In addition, there are some toilet paper roll crafts that manage to combine both the functional and aesthetic aspects, which this article hopes to talk about in the paragraphs that follow.
Toilet paper roll crafts
Toilet paper cables and chords manager
Digital civilization has many benefits. A large number of people are reaping the benefits of new technologies and changes made possible by them, but there is one thing that annoys almost everyone. It is the number of different cables and chords that have become a regular feature of our daily life. Managing them, storing them and keeping them properly organized poses a challenge that every user of modern technology faces. Technology is yet to reach a point where everything become wireless and cables will no longer represent an organizational challenge, but until that happens, we can use toilet paper rolls to build a cable and chord organizer like the ones shown below.
Another big challenge of the modern city life is a heavily cluttered work table or workstation, as they say. Almost everyone has tried many different ways to keep the table tidy, but the end result is never that satisfactory. The solution either lacks on functionality or on aesthetics. What if someone says that one can achieve a nice balance of functionality and aesthetics by using toilet paper rolls to organize your table? Will it look believable? The answer is yes.
There are many kinds of desk organizers that one can make from toilet paper rolls and to do so a DIY enthusiast only needs some paper rolls, various colors, paint brushes, colorful paper, glue, and decorative items, as per the need. The time and skill needed to make an organizer depends on the kind you are pursuing and its complexity.
Talking of organizing, this article should emphasize the importance of having a notepad and pen within reach in the kitchen. This will help in the making of grocery lists or taking notes for diverse recipes. In this, toilet paper rolls can be helpful as well. As shown in the picture below, it can function as a pen and pencil holder that can be fixed to the wall near a notepad properly taped on the wall.
Some people use napkins and paper towels daily and from here comes the necessity of napkin holders. Will it come as a surprise that toilet paper rolls can work well to produce cool-looking napkin holders like the ones shown below? To get that done, all one requires is paper rolls, colors, glue, decorative items, and some imagination. It is creative imagination that has allowed a DIY geek to use ropes to decorate toilet paper napkin holder in the second example and use colors wisely in the first one. So inspiration plays a key role in all DIY crafts.
After facing a steep decline, knitting yarn and crocheting are picking up again as a hobby, in the recent years. And with it came a necessity to keep yarns and threads organized. Toilet paper rolls can be helpful in that as well. A lesser mortal could have accomplished that goal with any simple thing, but a DIY person is not at rest until it does not find an elegant solution for every problem it faces. Fortunately, for the geek inside all DIY experts there is a way to use toilet paper rolls to create an elegant looking yarn organizer like the ones shown below. The second one is, of course, just a simple basic re-purposing of the toilet roll, but it does the job, for lazy ones, who do not feel like undertaking creative projects to create a yarn organizer.
For a house with a little boy, keeping toy cars organized, which counts in dozens if not hundreds, is a constant problem. The problem of organization becomes even more serious when the child asks for one particular car to pay and that very car is lost somewhere in the house. He will create ruckus until and unless that particular car is found and given to him. There is a way to solve this problem and it involves using toilet paper roll crafts.
Like any other ideas shared above, to make a car garage from toilet rolls, one will need some paper rolls, adhesive, colors, paint brush, color papers and a box to stack all the paper rolls together, if one wants to build a garage like the one shown in the second picture.
Time is always in short supply, particularly when you are getting ready to go out for lunch or to meet people or even to work.One thing that gives constant headaches is finding matching cloths and with it matching scarves. Chances are pretty high that you have a big collection of those, if you are like other women, and instead of solving the problem, it makes it further difficult for you to choose the right one. In situations like this a toilet paper roll craft can come to your rescue by showing you simple ways to organize scarves in a cupboard in a manner that all scarves are at display at once.The toilet paper scarf organizer shown below is not very funky, but you can also make more appealing ones using some craft materials and ideas shown above or in other articles on Homesthetics.
One of the main motivations behind any DIY craft is to save the planet, which one does by recycling the use of already-used products or its containers. How exciting will it be if the used item can be reused in gardening? Will not it double the benefit?
One can easily make a sturdy seed starting pots using paper rolls by taking some simple steps. The benefits of pots made of toilet paper rolls is that it is sturdier than newspaper and like newspaper seed containers it can also be placed directly in the soil, for it also gets decomposed in the soil. However, one key consideration while converting toilet tissue rolls into a seed pot should be to properly seal the bottom in such a way that soil or nutrients do not flow out of the container.
The heading may sound like taking the idea of DIY toilet paper roll crafts a way too far, but it is not. Paper rolls may not function as the best speakers out there for iPhone, but it will work pretty well. Additionally, it does not take a whole lot of things to make a functioning iPhone speaker from toilet paper rolls.
Along with a paper roll, colorful paper to decorate and glue to fix it, you will need a knife to cut a slot in the paper roll for the iPhone to go inside, color paper to decorate the exterior of the toilet paper roll speaker and 2 push pins that will be placed on the other side of the slot and which will keep the speaker stable. The resultant speaker will make your phone sound louder and perhaps better.
As promised in the beginning, this article has shown some amazing toilet paper roll crafts to make quite a few functional as well as aesthetically beautiful items from used paper rolls. There are many more exciting crafts that can be made using toilet paper rolls, so you should think hard before throwing away the next one.
If you run a house, you might already have a plumber’s number as an emergency contact. But we have a cheaper solution right here.
Toilet augers can be kept in the house, and you can use them yourself. There is no need to call up professional plumber services, which would mean spending a lot of money. You will get products with additional cable length, which can be used to clear both difficult and simple clogs.
Some crank manually while others run on a battery. You can toggle among variable speed trigger modes that will help in clearing the drainage pipe well. Some products come with multiple plumbing tools to help you take care of the bathroom sink, toilet bowl, and kitchen sink.
We have made a list of the top options that will help you find the best toilet auger, 11 toilet augers were tested in the group review but 4 did not make it through due to their low quality overall or weak performance.
Let's get started!
Listed below are the Best Toilet Augers:
Cobra Products: The Cobra Products 40030 is ideal for hands-on homeowners, installation ease meets professional results. Initial use may require extra patience.
Ridgid: The Ridgid 59787 is durable and kink-resistant, it guarantees longevity. Repeated usage may be necessary for hard clogs.
Gulrear: The Gulrear Toilet Auger optimizes user control with robust grip and affordable pricing. Large obstructions may pose slight challenges.
FEIYABDF: The FEIYABDF Toilet Plunger is a high-pressure design that efficiently clears multiple drain types, though instructions may puzzle beginners.
Liboyixi: The Liboyixi Drain Clog Remover is multi-functional and priced economically. Recommended for use with safety gear.
1. Cobra Products
If you are looking for a tool to clean your toilets well, the Cobra Products 40030 will be a brilliant choice. It can be installed easily, and you can get clean toilets without calling for professional help. Please keep reading to know more about one of the best toilet auger options available today.
While blockages in pipelines are a very common thing, it can cost a lot if you have to call up professionals to do the job. This toilet auger will give you the liberty to remove the blockage yourself without having to call up professionals.
Next, this toilet auger is very easy to install and use in a toilet bowl. The 3 feet by ⅜ inch spring wire will allow easy movement, which will help in cleaning up a clogged toilet.
A big issue that can occur with toilet augers is that they can cause scratches. But the poly safety tube is safe to use inside a ceramic toilet bowl. It will not lead to any scratches on the surface, making it a great choice.
Moreover, the drain snake only weighs 1.2 pounds, and hence, it will not lead to any hand fatigue during usage. It comes with a non-slip grip, and you will be able to hold it well.
If you have never used a toilet auger before, then this product may take some time to get used to. You can ask someone who has used it to show you the right way. But once you get the hang of it, our hands-on review showed that it’ll be a breeze to work with this tool.
What We Like
Highly durable and will last for long
Easy to install
Molded plastic handle for easy use
Can be used to clean clogged toilets
What We Don't Like
Takes time to get used to
Material: Metal | Dimensions: 3 x 3 x 8 inches | Weight: 1.2 pounds | Adjustable Length : No | Cable Length: 3 feet
2. Ridgid
One of our top suggestions for cleaning porcelain bowls as well as tough blockages is the Ridgid 59787. Affordable and easy to use, you can use this toilet auger for water-conserving, water-efficient, along with WaterSense toilets. Additionally, it is reliable enough to be kept as an emergency tool in the bathroom.
We have used many augers in the past and we have noticed that they kink after a few months. This means spending more money and purchasing a new one. However, this drain auger has proved to be very different in our tests, it was and still is durable and is kink-resistant, making it an incredible choice.
Moving on, the toilet auger features a sturdy compression-wrapped inner core cable, which comes with 3 wrappings. They are wrapped separately around the cable at the core. This mechanism will help you clean stubborn clogs and power through them.
Furthermore, the product comes with ergonomically designed handles, which makes it easy to use. The tube is also resistant to corrosion, making it an ideal option to remove clogs.
Plus, it is 3 feet long, which makes it easy to reach blockages without any extra effort. Just wear proper safety gear while using the toilet drain auger, and you should not face any other issues.
While toilets can be cleaned with this auger, you will need to use it multiple times in one area to clear it out properly. This might take a little more time than expected, but it will work well. Now that you know this, we will not be holding this as a drawback.
The high-quality Gulrear Toilet Auger makes for a perfect choice for those looking for a safe way to clean toilets. It comes with a premium handle along with a telescopic rod, which will help you clear away all waste from the inside.
This home toilet auger will help you clear out clogged drains, remove a blockage in pipes, clean dryer vents, and reach objects that cannot be accessed by hand. It is meant for heavy-duty use and is 51 inches in length. The body contains a steel hose along with a spring-loaded cable.
Moving on, you will get a thick non-slip handle. It is made of red ABS plastic, which is thick to ensure proper grip. The toilet auger comes with a telescopic rod, which makes it easy to adjust the length. Paired with a quadruped claw design, you will be able to achieve a better and strong grip.
Moreover, this is a much cheaper option than most other products on the list. You can end up saving a lot of money that would otherwise be spent on using chemicals and calling up professional plumbers for help.
Through our trial and error, we discovered that while the drain snake will work very well for smaller blockages, it may not be the best choice for bigger obstructions as the claws are not able to hold something large. Just keep this in mind before purchasing and check if the item will serve your needs.
If you are looking for a drain unblocker that is known for its high efficiency, then the FEIYABDF Toilet Plunger will work well. There’s a good chance that you will love the high-pressure equipment, which is capable of dealing with tough clogs easily. Read on to learn more about its bells and whistles.
First of all, we love the versatility that is offered, which makes it possible to use it for multiple occasions. It can be used for showers, toilet drains, kitchen sinks, and floor drains. You can remove all kinds of dirt, including tea leaves, soil, grease leaves, hair, along with cloth bits.
Further, you have an ergonomic handle that can be used to operate the product easily. The tool has buttons and pumps, which are also very easy to work with. You will just have to put the pump into the product before pressing the airbag. After that, insert it in the blocked drain and tap on the air button. It should clear out the toilets well.
Another thing that we liked in our tests was the air pressure. It will easily loosen and help in clearing out any object that you may have dropped in the drain system. You can keep your toilet bowl safe, thanks to this.
The instruction manual provided with this pack is not very useful. Now, the plumbing snake works well, but you will have to know how to use it for maximum benefit. Such a device is not very difficult to get accustomed to, but you might have to ask customer care to help you with the instructions.
We have reached the middle of this list, and it is time to introduce the Liboyixi Drain Clog Remover. It comes with a pack of 6 + 1 toilet augers with different auger cable length designs. You can use it around the house for the entire drainage system.
First of all, you will get a toilet auger that will help remove heavy-duty clogs from the drain. There is a set of 2 drain cleaners measuring 24 inches, which can be used to remove hair from the inside. Also, there is a pack of drain strainers along with a pack of 3 hair removal tools, which measure 20 inches.
With so many options, you can easily clear different bathrooms and sink drains. You can bend the drain auger so as to approach obstacles that are in the path. The auger cable is made of stainless steel, which will easily remove food, garbage, hair, and other bigger objects. One of the cables comes with a 4 claw retractable grip, which can be used to grab the items.
While you are using the toilet augers for different purposes, it is best if you wear safety gear. Otherwise, you might get the mess that is being taken out on your hands and body, which is not needed, do ask us how we found this valuable trick in the comment section below.
Up next is a product that runs on a battery, making the entire process of cleaning heavy clogs easy. The Populo Toilet Auger is ergonomically designed and ranks high in providing comfort and control. You can have a smooth working experience with this in the house.
This is indeed one of the best toilet augers because it is powered by a lithium-ion 20 volts battery. You will get a long run time, and the battery fuel gauge is very easy to check.
Moreover, you can look at how much power remains so that it can be charged in time. The battery does not need to be replaced, and that will save you from spending a lot.
Next, you will get a flexible cable that measures 2.5 feet. This can go inside drains with a width of ¾ to 2 inches. We were able to use it for multiple projects.
Moving on, you will get a built-in LED light that will amplify the working experience. The light will allow you to work in the dark and will provide you with more precision and control.
This toilet auger functions very well, but you will have to get used to working with it. The brand provides a user manual, and it is best if you read through the manual very carefully before starting out. The manual will help in slowly understanding the use of every button.
What We Like
Adjustable speed depending on the need
Rear drain port to prevent water build-up
2.5 feet long cable
Provides better control and visibility
What We Don't Like
Takes time to learn how to use the machine
Material: N/A | Dimensions: 17.24 x 9.85 x 7.5 inches | Weight: 8.8 pounds | Adjustable Length: No | Cable Length: 2.5 feet
7. DrainX
One of our final recommendations is the DrainX EHX1-1010. This product is known for the versatility offered when it comes to cable lengths. You can use it for deep clogs and blockages without having to call a plumber. Read on to know more about this toilet auger.
The best toilet auger is supposed to unclog your pipes in the bathroom as well as the kitchen. This one offers a cable length ranging from 25 to 50 feet, which will work for all kinds of situations.
You will get a grip handle along with a turning knob that can be used to push the pipe into the toilet bowl. One can use it for bathroom and shower drains too.
Next, the product comes with very durable housing. You will get a grip handle, which will make it easy to use. Also, you will get gloves to work with, ensuring that you do not have to spend more money purchasing them separately.
Moreover, a drawstring bag is provided to keep the entire unit in one place. You will not misplace any of the parts, and the bag can be stored easily.
After trying it in various situations we had some queries, and we wanted to talk to customer care regarding the same. However, we could not find the customer care number anywhere. Ultimately, we took to Youtube to find answers. It would be great if the brand looked into this.
The following table offers a comparison of some of the highest-rated toilet augers currently available. These tools are evaluated based on their material, dimensions, weight, whether their length is adjustable, and the length of their cable. All dimensions are given in inches, weight is measured in pounds, and cable length is indicated in feet.
The best toilet auger will always be able to take care of all your pesky clogs without making the process very difficult or messy. Remember that the most expensive option will not necessarily come with all the benefits. You will also find a lot of toilets clog removers on the market, which can be tried.
Also, you will find information about the things to do when the toilet does not flush. Read through the factors listed below for better clarity.
Manual Auger V/s Battery Operated Auger
There are many kinds of drain snakes and augers on the market, and you can choose manual augers or battery-operated ones. Manual ones will work in removing toilet paper along with other smaller objects.
But if you need more pressure and want to clear deeper clogs, then you will require a battery-operated one our tests show. These have different speeds, ensuring that you can shift depending on the need.
Length Of The Toilet Auger
The best toilet auger will fit your toilet needs, and the length should be good enough for you to work with. Please check the description along with the toilet auger reviews to find the right option. The length varies depending on the brand that is picked.
Also, check for a flexible down head that can be used inside the U-trap. It needs to be able to move to take out the more serious clog from the toilet bowl.
Safety Guard
The toilet auger should be such that it does not lead to scratches inside the bowl. To prevent scratching, you need to check the edges of the toilet auger, flexible cable head, and teeth. They should have rounded edges that will eliminate scratching. A clogged toilet does not need external scratches or breakage of smaller parts to worsen the problem.
Hence, you should check if the end is protected with a vinyl guard. That should keep the porcelain or tiles safe, and you can work easily.
Some products come with interchangeable tips. In this case, you need to check for vinyl coverings for all the tips.
Ergonomic Grip
You will want a comfortable handle to hold on top while working, making this a very important factor. Please check the grip and the size of the handle before purchasing. It should provide enough space for your fingers to wrap around the handle. Plus, you should not have to suffer from hand fatigue at the end of the day.
Corrosion Resistance
Most toilet augers will be made of plastic or metal. The metal needs to be corrosion-resistant as it will be exposed to water and moisture whenever used. Also, rust should not build up on the product, hence, it should be coated well.
The best toilet auger will come with an efficient spring coil, which will allow you to reach inside the drain easily. Now, remember that the best drain snake may work well with smaller or medium-sized obstructions.
They are lighter and smaller in length. A toilet auger can be longer, which will work with tough toilet clogs as well as blockages. However, they are very similar and can act as an alternative.
Before we wrap up, let us take you through our favorites of this test group: Cobra Products is our topmost choice because of the efficiency offered. On the other hand, the Ridgid toilet augerworks well for tough blockages.
While the Gulrear Toilet Auger comes with an easy-to-use handle that works really well. You will also find toilet plungers that may help in the job. And we will soon be back with more informative reviews.
Until next time!
Don't you hate it when you've brought home a delicious piece of meat but fail to cook it properly?
While using electric smokers is easier than charcoal grills or gas grills, there are several intricate steps involved. Since it doesn't cook at a higher temperature like some other units, you'll have to be patient and dedicate a couple of hours for the meat to cook well.
But we can guarantee that it'll be worth the wait. You'll also need to consider the size of the model you're purchasing based on what meats you usually cook. Plus, let your imagination run free and mix different types of wood to get lip-smacking results.
So, we have narrowed down seven tips for using an electric smoker to cook meat. Remember to follow these steps and be meticulous in your approach.
Without further ado, it's time to turn up the heat. Let's begin.
Workings of an Electric Smoker
Before getting to the details, it's essential to understand the workings of an electric smoker. While it may seem complicated, it's not very difficult to use, and there aren't too many components involved. The central part is the cooking chamber, where the action takes place.
Once you heat the chamber, the air circulates, thereby heating the meat by air convection. Apart from that, every unit comprises an electric heating element, grill racks, and a water pan. You also have the option of burning wood with the electric heater, which lends unique flavor and smokiness to the meat.
Tips for Smoking Meat with an Electric Smoker
The key to getting perfectly smoked meat is sticking to the basics and thoroughly following the essential steps instead of trying something fancy.
Having used an electric smoker ourselves, we have narrowed down seven points for you to keep in mind. These points may look simple, but they are very important.
So, read on to find out.
Seasoning The Grill
First and foremost, it's essential to season the smoker before starting to use it. The residue is often left behind from the manufacturing process, so seasoning ensures you can burn it off from the cooking racks, stainless steel housing, or the chip tray.
You'll also have to cover the smoker's interior surface by applying a gentle coat of cooking oil and cranking up the temperature to 275 degrees Fahrenheit. Let it sit for three hours and add wood chips during the final hour of seasoning. The smoke that's emitted helps to prime the smoker, making it ready for cooking.
Using A Temperature Probe
Next, you'll need to get hold of a temperature probe. We recommend that you buy a good quality unit, but if you're unwilling to incur added expenditure, you can use the one that comes with the smoker.
However, it does tend to malfunction, so remember to be careful. The probe must show an accurate value for you to move on to the following steps.
Cooking
It's vital to ensure that you get the right temperature because different kinds of meats don't have the same range at which they smoke best. If you're using brisket, pork butt, pork shoulder, or ribs, they'll cook well at 225 degrees Fahrenheit, while chicken and turkey are capable of withstanding higher temperatures.
If you're cooking at 275 degrees Fahrenheit, you may even have to opt for multi-hour smoking to get the best results.
Using Hardwoods
Along with your smoker, you'll have to buy a wood-burning option if it's not included with the model. Apart from the custom dry rub, marinade, or wet brine, you can make a custom wood blend. Even if it seems a bit extravagant, you can try to blend different types of wood.
You'll be awed by the results and further encouraged to try and mix hickory, alder, or mesquite with fruitwoods like apple or cherry. For instance, beef smokes well and tastes fantastic when used with maple, pecan, or hickory. Likewise, with pork shoulder and butt, you can use almost anything other than oak or mesquite.
Keep Time On Your Hands
Another crucial aspect to consider is that electrical smokers cook meat at a lower temperature than charcoal or gas grills. So, to get the right balance of textures and ensure the meat has optimal tenderness, you need to get ready for a long cooking session. We are talking anywhere between several hours to a whole day.
A lot depends on what you're cooking, and something like ribs can be completed in a couple of hours while a whole turkey or ham requires a day's work.
Similarly, for the brisket, one of the most popular food items for smoked meat, the ideal cooking time is 75 minutes for a pound of beef. Besides, you have to cook it at an optimal temperature of 225 degrees Fahrenheit to smoke it well.
Give Yourself Space
Meanwhile, one of the most important factors people don't consider is the area needed for cooking. Sometimes having a cozy cooking corner is not enough, and you may have to look for someplace other than the patio. The purpose of finding the right space is to be able to work with the utmost precision.
Using a vertical smoker requires a substantial area because it doubles or triples your requirement. Similarly, by using a wide smoker featuring a double-door design, you won't have to slice the meat, and you can quickly cook large pieces.
It's not that you won't need a small cooker, for instance, tailgating, but we believe it's better to have a large one rather than having to compromise.
Keep The Smoker Clean
You have to ensure the smoker is clean, enabling you to carry out your cooking needs uninterrupted. People mainly use an electric smoker since it burns cleanly, but leaving charred food on the grill could have a negative impact over time. So, it would be best if you were watchful.
After the food is cooked, you'll need to spend some time cleaning the cooking surface and the cast iron pans as well as the cooking grates. You can try to use a drip pan while cooking, thereby ensuring the cooker remains clean, and you won't have to spend a lot of time cleaning up.
However, it does entail you'll have to clean the pan after you're done.
FAQs
Where is the heat generated by electric smokers?
Unlike your conventional units, electric smokers have the cooking space at the top while the heating space is towards the bottom. There you have one or more electric rods generating the required amount of heat to cook the meat.
What is the function of the wood chip tray?
The wood chip tray allows you to keep selected hardwoods, burning them slowly, thereby giving off smoke. You can also add cups of your desired wood to the firebox or heating zone at the halfway point. It imparts the necessary smokiness to the meat.
How to regulate the temperature in an electric smoker?
To manage the temperature, you'll have to use the water pan filled with cold water, preventing the internal temperature from rising beyond control. Moreover, as the water heats up, it turns to steam, which helps in convection cooking.
Why does it have dampers and vents?
The dampers and vents play an essential part in using air to fan the flames. To control the temperature, you have to manage the airflow, and as a result, there are dampers at the bottom.
By opening the dampers, you can allow more air to pass through, thereby raising the temperature. And to lower the temperature, you need to open the vents at the top of the unit, permitting the heat to escape.
Final Words
We hope you have a much better understanding when it comes to using an electric smoker.
Electric smokers offer great versatility, and you should play with your imagination to get exciting results. Remember to follow the steps we listed in this guide to use it for a long time and cook the meat just right.
Plus, you can do the cooking yourself and make a day out of it. It's a brilliant opportunity to get together as a family and enjoy good food without having to go to a restaurant.
Do your kitchen counters need a makeover? You’re sure to like some of these design ideas for a fresh and updated look.
As you can imagine, there are limitless options of countertops which you can choose from. But we know that everyone and their neighbor has a preference! That is why we have curated more than a dozen ideas if you are looking to change the look of your kitchen.
Now, there is a reason why tile is the most popular option for countertops. The main reason is that, unlike natural stone or laminate, tiles offer an incomparable variety of options ranging from hexagons to mosaics.
Also, when it comes to working with tile, the advantage is that you can do it yourself. That in itself saves a massive chunk from the budget.
So, without further ado, let’s see the different types of tiles and designs.
Types Of Tiles
Porcelain
Porcelain is made using clay, sand, and feldspar, which are baked in high-temperature ovens. The final product is quite dense and durable lasting for many years once installed. Porcelain is non-porous and is often applied to walls, flooring, kitchen countertop, and backsplash.
Also, it can be found in many outdoor projects because of its resistance to pressure and water. As far as maintenance is concerned, they are pretty easy to clean and take care of.
Ceramic
Ceramic tiles are also made out of clay which is heated and set into shape. The reason they are so popular is that they come in a wide variety of patterns and colors. The good thing about ceramic tiles is that they are scratch and stain-resistant. However, they are prone to cracking if you drop heavy containers on them.
Vinyl
This is a synthetic option often used for flooring and countertops and even kitchen backsplash. They have a stone-like finish but can be designed to appear like wood. One interesting feature about vinyl is that you do not need to remove the previous installation to add new tiles.
Also, it gives a smooth and seamless appearance which is pleasing to look at. However, they are not durable enough to hold very heavy objects.
Vitrified Tiles
Have you seen glazed tiles with a gleaming appearance? It is most likely that those are vitrified tiles. They are similar to traditional ceramic tiles, but they have an additional ingredient, silica.
While mixing, clay and silica are blended together to form tiles that look shiny like glass. The benefit of this tile is that it is water and frost-resistant, along with being durable enough to last many years.
Stone Composite Polymer
These tiles appear like stone, but if you take a closer look, you’ll find they are, in fact, composite polymers mimicking stone tiles. They are constructed using a composite material with a mix of PVC, limestone, and stabilizers.
What makes this option so popular is its use in multiple areas of the house, not just countertops. It can be used in kitchens, bathrooms, and porches due to its heat and fire resistance, impact resistance, and waterproof properties.
Tile Designs For Countertops
Square White Tile Countertop
Let’s start with the classics. The square tile kitchen counter itself comes in many styles, but we recommended you check out this clean floor-to-ceiling tile pattern. The straight-lined edges are far too familiar anyway, so you can opt for these unique curved lines which cover the entire countertop. This retro design extends to the sink and microwave slot and gives a uniform and clean look to the kitchen.
Large Neutral Color Tiles
Some people prefer larger tiles because they have lesser seams which offer a gorgeous and lush look. They are also easier to clean and wipe. There are various sizes available, but the most common is 12 or 13-inch tiles which look great in neutral colors like beige and pale yellow.
You can install the same kind of stone on the peripheral. However, the stone tile needs to be sealed to grout before use.
Large Format Tile Countertop
These are much larger tile options for those of you who want to avoid installing separate tiles altogether. This option comes in large pieces which are arranged to fit the size of the counter. Large-format tiles help the countertop to appear larger and even. If your kitchen already has various colors and patterns, this simple look will give a pattern break for a harmonious look.
Handcrafted Rustic Kitchen Countertop
If you are looking for a rustic, cottage-core aesthetic for your home, this option will fit right into this vibe. This design involves handcrafting individual pieces of stone and placing them one by one on any surface you want.
The slightly uneven effect gives a warm, rustic vibe which works well in neutral colors. However, this option is on the pricier side, so you may have to reconsider if you are on a budget.
Pop Of Color Retro Design
Another option we have selected for you is this lovely color pop option giving a retro look to your countertop and kitchen. You can recreate this look in your kitchen by choosing a neutral color and selecting a secondary color to add interest.
For example, the backsplash and bottom of the counter can be white, but the countertop can be a pale shade of yellow, blue, or grey.
Handmade Square Tiles
You must consider this option if you want a unique look for the kitchen or even the bathroom. There are endless color options to play around with, and there are different sizes that you can select for different areas of the house.
For the kitchen, a square tile with a pastel color would go well, especially if there is plenty of sunlight flowing in through the windows.
Hexagon Pattern Countertop
This style gives your kitchen a lovely retro feel. The hexagon pattern adds interest and gives a visually distinct look that is suitable for primary colors like white and beige. If you are looking to keep the color scheme simple and classic, then this is an attractive option to add a unique touch.
Marble Hexagon Tile Countertop
Another beautiful European-inspired tile countertop is the marble hexagon one which gives a smooth finish. The good thing about this design and choice is that it is quite durable and does not shatter easily, even if you drop heavy utensils. A smaller-sized hexagon tile in a pale grey or blue would look amazing, just like a Swedish kitchen.
Mismatched Color Countertops
For eye-catching and distinct looks, you can opt for opposing color schemes and mismatched counter options like this one. There is no limit to the creative possibilities with these patterns, and you can make your own unique look by experimenting with placing options.
One idea we liked was selecting three colors and placing them in either chunks or a whimsical mix to create a never seen before pattern.
Glossy Tile With French Style Trims
If you love European-style furniture and decor, you are sure to find this beautiful tile stunning. This is a lovely 6-inch tile created for a smaller kitchen in a lovely shade that has a glossy finish. Apart from that, it has an eye-catching trim that is 3-inches wide and adds to the beauty of your countertop. This type of pattern is available in porcelain and vitrified material.
Mosaic Tile Kitchen Countertop
One of our favorite patterns is the old-fashioned mosaic. Even though it has been widely used for decades, the look never gets old. You can use it to add short bursts of focus to an otherwise plain kitchen.
However, you might want to tone down the color if you are not a fan of a busy-looking countertop. Sand, cream, pale pink are excellent color choices for subtle coloring with a stunning mosaic look.
Italian Stone Countertop
This design looks extravagant even though it is simple and classic. Adding Italian stone-cut tiles to the countertops immediately elevates the beauty of the kitchen. You get many customizable options to select the size and color of the natural-looking stone or porcelain. Some brands also provide matching quarter rounds and caps for completing the installation.
Terrazzo Tiles
If you are looking to add some pattern to the countertops, terrazzo might be a suitable option. Since there is no defined design, the end product you get will always vary. This type of tile is usually made of marble or glass elements added to cement bases.
They are widely used for flooring due to their durability, but you can also opt for this design on countertops. If drastic color patterns are not your style, you can customize a terrazzo pattern with only one color.
Final Words
So, here we reach the end of our guide for the best tile design ideas for countertops.
As we mentioned previously, there are literally hundreds of designs already available, and on top of that, you can create customizations to your liking. But the design you select must match the overall aesthetic of your kitchen or bathroom.
That should not be too difficult since all you need is an idea of a color scheme. First, select a countertop that would go harmoniously with the room. Next, you can select a few color options that suit the rest of the walls and floors.
And that’s it! All you have to do is go to the store or check online for a similar pattern. After the final selection is made, hire a professional to apply the tiles or simply do it yourself. We hope this guide gave you plenty of ideas for your next countertop project.
Tattoo drawing is one of the first creative works of humanity. It has been around for ages and has evolved from simple primitive drawings to intricate works of art.
With the help of technology, you can get inked for just about any tattoo design on your body these days. You’re only limited by your imagination and the ink you are willing to take!
But how can you choose which ones to have in this vast world of drawings?
If you’re a new tattoo artist looking for inspiration or someone considering getting inked, you’ve come to the right place.
Take a look at these 74 popular tattoo drawing ideas. You might find one you’ll be dying to get!
74 Popular Designs for Tattoo Drawings
There is no one template on how tattoo drawings should be. Hone your creative side with these drawing ideas.
Tattoos are artistic expressions of one’s emotions, memories, beliefs, and values. You will often find flora, fauna, a famous scene, life, death, words, and symbols a common theme.
Tattoo drawings differ in shape, size, and concept. They can also be made up of defined lines and shading and often use black ink as the primary color option.
Crows are clever birds known for their wits and resourcefulness. Many also see them as a symbol of strength, power, and versatility. With that said, people often get crow designs as a statement of masculinity.
This drawing's fairly complex, so you and your tattoo artist need to practice getting it right. To avoid using too much paper, try a cheap drawing tablet!
If you’re into cosmology and numerology, celestial-inspired tattoos are perfect!
This design entitled “The Creation of the Universe” showcases planets, stars, galaxies, the moon, and the sun at the centermost in a beautiful bohemian way.
You’ll find one too many anchor tattoos inked among men. It’s one of the oldest designs ever! Anchors symbolize stability, given that they keep a ship grounded.
For anybody wanting to remain strong and afloat in difficult times, an anchor tattoo is for you.
A favorite among women is the gypsy girl tattoo. These tattoos depict a beautiful woman with nice flowing hair dressed in ornate clothes and accessories.
This beautiful drawing signifies a strong and independent woman. It’s the go-to feminine-themed design.
Among snake tattoos, cobra tattoo design drawings are the most common. Cobras symbolize wisdom, power, and protection. If you want safety and control, consider a cobra design.
A snake skull tattoo is a symbol of transformation and rebirth. The snake winding around the skull gives off the feeling of power and danger. It can also be a symbol of death and the underworld.
This drawing is a nice suggestion if you want a dark and dangerous design.
Mushrooms are mysterious and magical organisms. They can also symbolize fairytales and fantasies. This trippy design has mushrooms growing out of eye sockets.
It’s one of those unique drawing ideas that attracts hippies.
This sketch of an owl beautifully showcases its eyes which are famous for their ability to see in the dark. Owls represent wisdom, knowledge, and protection. As nocturnal creatures, they are also associated with the moon.
An owl is a good idea if you want a deep spiritual tattoo!
Lions are on top of the food chain for a reason. They are brave and powerful—a lion tattoo designed for anybody who wants to wear their pride and masculinity on their sleeve.
This one beautifully encapsulates the four elements of nature, fire, earth, air, and water. Its clean, distinct lines make this work of art even more elegant and stunning.
Many tattoo artists take inspiration from zodiac signs. A Ram represents the Aries. People with the Aries sign are thought to be independent, impulsive, energetic, ambitious, and passionate.
If this is your zodiac sign, getting tattooed for it would be nice.
Koi fish swim against the current, making them a relevant symbol for anybody bracing and overcoming difficulties. Koi fish in Japanese culture represents strength, power, and determination.
If you want to be reminded of these beliefs, you better start sketching some koi!
An angel is derived from the Latin word “angelus,” meaning the “messenger of God.” Most people get angel tattoo drawing ideas to represent their faith. Angels also serve as a reminder that you are protected.
Angel tattoos like this can be simple, elaborate, or even comedic.
Rose drawings are one of the most popular tattoos for men and women. A rose and dagger tattoo drawing represents life's harshness, playing with the phrase, “Life is no bed of roses.”
It’s one of those sketch tattoos that never go out of style.
Here is another rose tattoo drawing, but this time with a snake winding around its stem. The snake is fierce, while the rose is elegant. This combination represents love so strong that it has lost its innocence.
This rose, and skull drawing carries the meaning of rebirth after facing adversity. A skull symbolizes death and darkness, while a rose symbolizes hope. These beautiful sketches are easy to build with more color, depending on your taste.
Butterflies as a tattoo on someone’s body is always a beautiful sight to see! Butterflies are symbols of new beginnings and transformation. It’s a great tattoo drawing for anyone going through a major change.
A sword in a horned skull is the perfect design for anybody who wants a dangerous tattoo. Naturally, both the skull and blade represent fighting to the death.
This blade in a horned skull drawing also symbolizes your willingness to fight for what you believe in.
Wolves are considered noble warriors, great leaders, and family protectors. Native American warriors get tribal wolf tattoos to represent their loyalty to the tribe and willingness to protect their own people.
Mandala tattoos are popular drawing ideas today. They are not the easiest to sketch or tattoo on the body, but they can be worth it! Mandala tattoos represent eternity and perfection, given their intricate and seemingly endless patterns.
Ornamental tattoos may look simple. But don’t be fooled. These tattoo drawing ideas are not that easy to sketch. Ornamental tattoos have to be perfectly symmetrical. A steady hand will do the trick!
This minimalistic sketch of a hand, skeleton, and butterflies is a work of art! These simple yet impactful tattoos are easy on the eye. This tattoo, in particular, represents the beautiful fleeting moments of living.
Now it’s not just a skull; it’s the whole rib cage! This skeleton, butterfly, and flower tattoo drawing is a unique play on life's relationship with death. It is symbolic of the circle of life.
This tattoo of a hand-playing puppet with the mind and heart works on overcoming difficulties in decision-making. What prevails, emotions or logic? This sketch is a beautiful piece that represents emotional intelligence.
In the animal kingdom, elephants represent strength, loyalty, divinity, and good luck. These sketch drawings can be simple or intricate, with shading to look as realistic as possible. It’s up to you!
Let your imaginations run wild and free! Get creative with your drawings. This dreamy hot air balloon, sailboat, and ocean drawing look like they came off a fairytale page!
The three elements have strong and deep symbolism. The wolf represents loyalty, love, and integrity. The lily represents purity and innocence. The arrow represents struggle and triumph.
Skull tattoos are very visually striking. This is a unique take on the popular and classic smoking skull tattoo designs. It is a symbol of the working class and a humble beginning.
In many cultures, mushrooms represent good luck. They also symbolize magic and mystery. This ghost mushroom will make a cute little addition to your tattoo count!
This bird skull and crystal tattoo look both creepy and cool. Bird skulls often mean courage and the power to rise again from trouble. Crystals growing from that could mean a beautiful triumph.
If you are into magic and fairytales, this is a pretty design. This crescent moon tangled with mushrooms and strawberries is a feminine design you can easily have on your arm.
This beast woman can mean power and independence. It can also represent your ambition and ferocity. Some people also get these tattoos when they feel devilish or ruthless.
This animal or fairy-looking women's tattoos are drawn with beautiful, distinct lines. They’re great for feminine-themed tattoos that also give that mythical and magical vibe.
People with crystal tattoos are often seen as firm and strong-willed. Matched with the mushroom drawing representing good luck, it’s all positive energies for this tattoo drawing of choice!
This tattoo with distinct deep eyes almost seems to look into your soul. This unique play with floral designs makes this tattoo drawing very visually striking.
This detailed tattoo drawing is very intriguing. Different elements that represent math and sciences growing out of the figure of a thinking man could mean these are the thoughts that consume him and shape his reality.
This intricate geometric tattoo has symmetry all over it. It is also composed of various elements that represent all living things and nature. It could seem religious or scientific to get a tattoo design like this.
This tattoo that involves a meditating human and a double helix could be interpreted in many ways. But all in all, the theme is about living and balance.
The two-face tattoo symbolizes the balance of good and bad in one’s eyes. Humans face many circumstances that shape themselves into meaning and purpose. This is a good tattoo if you’re working on what nature throws at you.
A popular interpretation of this tattoo is the omnipresent eye of god watching over you from above. It is a symbol of providence and guidance from the divine. It’s a good tattoo design to represent your faith.
Grasped hands tattoo designs could represent two people committing to each other. This tattoo with the planets and the sun surrounding the grasped hands could play with the thought of “us against the universe.”
As skull tattoos remind us that death is inevitable, and butterfly tattoos signify rebirth and change, this unique combination can remind us of accepting fate and living in the present.
In Norse mythology, Valkyrie means the “chooser of the slain.” These are a group of maidens sent to battlefields to choose the slain worthy of Valhalla, the “hall of the fallen.” Valkyrie is an image of female domination, power, and prestige.
A deer skull represents re-growth, rebirth, protection, and balance. Crescent moons represent wealth and good luck. Combining these two elements in this tattoo generally means protection against negativity.
This dark and scary tattoo could be interpreted as a person leaving behind a certain chapter in their past and is about to start their life anew. This could be in terms of religious beliefs or a way of living.
Frog tattoos differ in meaning from person to person. But generally, a frog tattoo symbolizes wisdom, transformation, growth, and abundance.
In Japanese culture, they are also believed to carry good luck and protection. Have this design inked to carry luck everywhere with you!
Tips for Beginner Tattoo Artists
Tattooing skin isn't easy. You must have strong artistic skills and a good hand with the technical stuff.
Admittedly, there's no such thing as “the perfect design.” One design might be better than the other based on the eyes of fellow tattoo artists.
However, any criticism should only help you better create your style and push you harder to pursue this artistic passion!
If you are a beginner tattoo artist, here are a few tips to help you develop your craft:
Practice Drawing
A successful tattoo artist needs to have strong sketching skills. Designs will vary per client, so you better be equipped to fulfill their requests.
These tattoo drawings may be as basic as lines, geometric shapes, and patterns. But they can also be as detailed, intricate, and realistic-looking as a full-bodied dragon on a full sleeve!
Drawing is difficult to master. But your drawings should look better daily as long as you put in the work hours.
Experiment with the Tools
Before tattooing real skin, you must practice using tools and machinery on the affected skin.
This will help prevent clients from making expensive and embarrassing mistakes on clients. If you're not ready to practice on fake skin, consider makingdigital drawings on an iPad instead.
Build a Portfolio
Every tattoo artist should create a strong portfolio for future clients to believe in and buy into their craft. Make sure to showcase your best works.
If you’re still new, start working on a portfolio now!
Apply for an Apprenticeship
Find yourself a mentor, or look for tattoo shops that accept interns.
In the tattoo industry, it is crucial to learn and be amongst the masters of the craft to be successful.
How to Make Your Own Tattoo Drawings
Designing your own tattoos will make the experience even more meaningful!
Remember, tattoos are amazing works of art that permanently stay on the body. So get creative and make it personal!
If you don’t know where to start, here are some great tips:
Consider the Placement of the Tattoo
Before considering what tattoo drawing to get, consider where you want your tattoo to be inked.
Do you want to show off your tattoo to the whole world? Or do you prefer it to be more discrete?
Draw Inspiration From Tattoo Magazines
Consider a theme, belief, or message that you live by. Or perhaps an image that reminds you of a significant someone, something, or event in your past.
Look up relevant keywords on Google or gather ideas from art books and tattoo magazines. Discover a list of ideas for things to draw.
The best works of top-notch tattoo artists get showcased in these magazines. No doubt, you’ll find something that will catch your eye!
Start Sketching
If you have the talent, sketch your tattoo design. If you have a lot of ideas in mind, jot them out on paper and brainstorm on incorporating them into your tattoo design.
If you want color on your tattoo, that's fine. But do consider the need for ink touch-ups in the future since colored tattoos require more maintenance.
Most people will choose a monochromatic tattoo design because it also looks cleaner. Other options include glow-in-the-dark and white ink.
If you're sketching a black-and-white tattoo, try using mechanical pencils to avoid the hassle of sharpening.
Find the Right Tattoo Artist
After coming up with your desired tattoo design, look for an artist to bring it to life. Ideally, you want someone professional and licensed to ensure the job is done correctly.
Examining their portfolios is the best way to determine if they're the perfect fit for you. Some tattooists may even give you valuable suggestions that can take your idea to a new level.
Tattoo Drawing Ideas Conclusion
Tattoo artists and tattoo enthusiasts, your opportunities are limitless!
Creating beautiful and meaningful designs is at the tip of your pencils and, eventually, at the end of a needle.
Whether your tattoo is an eagle for strength, a flower for femininity, or a skull for death, every tattoo should be memorable and worth permanently marking on the skin.
We hope this article stoked your creativity and helped you choose your tattoo design!
If you are a beginner at woodworking, choosing between a table saw and a circular saw will be hard.
While beginning to set up your workshop, selecting the correct power tool is essential. However, because of the many choices, novice woodworkers may end up making the wrong decision.
Hence, to create a smoother process, we have come up with a guide that compares the two types of saws. And, to be honest, even professionals often need a bit more help when it comes to purchasing new tools.
Table saws and circular saws may look starkly different, but both are capable of performing similar tasks. Unfortunately, this makes choosing between the two even more confusing.
But, you don't need to worry, as we are here to give in-depth information about both products. Additionally, the differences will give you a clear idea of what to expect from each variant.
So, without much ado, let's learn about the saws!
Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw
Before we start putting out the differences between these saws, it's best to give a brief overview of both. This is especially for beginners who are just starting to learn about different saws. So, we will begin with the most basic features seen in the products.
Table saws are a boon for woodworkers when it comes to DIY projects. Compared to earlier times, this power tool has made shaping and cutting wood much easier. However, irrespective of the manufacturer, most table saws have some basic characteristics.
To begin with, the word “table” in table saws is self-explanatory. This table or work surface is the stationary portion of the saw. The surprising part is the circular blade that comes up through a slit placed on the table.
Because it comes with an attached table, it's easy to get a sharp cut with the saw. The user only needs to push the wood piece towards the blade to create the cut. As there is no wobbliness, every cut comes out clean and precise.
You can easily recognize table saws in workshops due to their immense size. The top and sides are usually made of metal, and it's often placed on an elevated surface. Further, the low learning curve of table saws boosts a user's confidence in creating new projects.
Moreover, even professional woodworkers love table saws because of their high accuracy. This is mainly made possible through the guide rails present beside the work surface. Additionally, some models may even come with laser pointers for proper measurement. Other qualities include effortless cross-cutting and ripping wood boards.
As a long-lasting and easy-to-use option, it is the foremost choice of new woodworkers. Also, with a little more practice, users can even perform angled cuts with a table saw. It might not be as proper as a miter saw, but it works well for beginner-friendly projects.
In addition, newer models have started getting smarter with the inclusion of more features. For example, some table saws also come with the ability to angle the blade for diverse cuts.
The foremost thing to notice about this saw is its true “circular shape.” As it's a handheld device, this saw feels much more potent as a power tool.
Even though it can be expensive, many professionals prefer to have it due to its versatility. Rather than just working with wood, circular saws can even cut through concrete or tiles. Also, with a proper option like that of a diamond blade, it can prove to be more powerful.
To make a cut, a user needs to place the blade directly on the wood. It might not be as stable as a stationary surface, but the control comes from the user.
Like table saws, it cannot produce angular cuts, but it's suitable for straight cuts and ripping. Hence, many professionals prefer circular saws to cut through thinner wood and plyboards.
Additionally, its portability makes it a good choice for woodworkers who need a power tool for job sites. But as it's an expensive option, a beginner may find it intimidating due to the initial investment.
Circular saws can either run on external power or batteries, which add to the portability. Also, most will have a plastic body to make it lightweight for a better user experience. And, depending on the model, it might have interchangeable blades for cutting different materials.
A novice woodworker will need to dedicate time to practice and master using the circular saw. The main reason behind it is that shaky hands may cause uneven cuts and affect the look of the finished project.
The circular saw can be easily packed up and stored in a cupboard, making it a space-saving option. Moreover, it seldom occupies a lot of space, making it an excellent tool for those lacking a workshop area.
Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw Differences
Yes, we have reached the point where we will lay down the major differences between the two saws. These may appear a bit obvious, but it's essential to know about them before getting a power saw.
Additionally, this will also help out those who are still unsure about their projects. If you are new to woodworking, pay extra attention to this crash course of knowing a power tool.
Ease Of Use
On the first point, we would like to bring up the factor of useability. Think about the first time you got a power tool. It must have come with a manual, but that wouldn't have been much help.
The only way of demystifying the use of such tools is by continuous practice. Moreover, individual products do come with a learning curve. While comparing the saws, the table saw invariably came up as an easy-to-use power tool.
Because of its fixed table or workspace, the user doesn't need to focus much on being steady. Instead, all it requires is to push the wood against the serrated circular blade. Hence, even a beginner feels comfortable using a table saw because of its user-friendly design.
The situation flips completely while using a circular saw. Unlike the table saw, it lacks any stability, and the user will need to learn the proper way of controlling it.
Moreover, as it's a handheld device, a woodworker will need to get used to the added weight. So, a circular saw might not be the most comfortable thing you may hold as a novice builder.
Portability
Are you someone who likes to work outside? If yes, then lugging a table saw to the woodworkers' meet may not be the brightest idea. For such times, when you need to use a power tool outside the workshop, the circular saw comes up as a savior.
It makes things much easier for woodworkers who may need to work on-site. The portable design of the circular saws provides the option to carry it along with you. Additionally, newer battery-powered models are able to run without a fixed power source.
In comparison, the table saws sitting in the workshop seem like antique tools. Besides, you will also need to make room for this giant power saw. Also, working with it becomes tricky if ample space isn't left around the table. So, it’s best to think about having a proper workspace before purchasing this bulky power tool.
Precision And Accuracy
The table saw has the upper hand when it comes to precision and accuracy. Its stationary design and comfortable working space provide the sharpest cuts. As a result, even a beginner seldom faces a problem when using a table saw.
Additionally, the current models have features like laser lights and guide rails to increase precision. After taking the measurements, you just need to push the wood into the blade to cut. Because of its stable surface, it drastically reduces probable messes while cutting.
Even after the portability offered by circular saws, many professionals prefer to work with table saws. Moreover, it is also easier to crosscut and rip big pieces of wood on stationary surfaces.
In contrast, circular saws perform poorly when it comes to precision and accuracy. You would need to learn ways to control the blade if you expect similar results as a table saw. Also, it's much easier to make mistakes with it because of shaky hands.
However, when it comes to time spent on preparation, the circular saws take much less time. All you need is to attach the correct blade and proceed to cut the material. Whereas, in the case of table saws, you will need to invest time in setting up the height of the table and the saw fence.
Versatility
To keep up with the latest materials used in woodworking, you need a tool that offers versatility. The flexible design of circular saws makes it one of the most valuable tools to have for a professional. Unlike stationary table saws, they can cut through various materials.
Superior quality circular saws come with interchangeable blades for ease of use. Additionally, some diamond blades can even cut through concrete and ceramic tiles. Some models also contain the ability to provide different cuts compared to table saws.
Having a versatile tool allows you to face all kinds of materials while creating new projects. However, it is better for small to medium-sized pieces than table saws to cut large wood boards. When it comes to table saws, it is only suitable for woodwork. Hence, someone who wants to work with multiple materials will need to invest in a good circular saw.
Sawdust Disposal
Sawdust gets blown into the air when you cut through the wood. This can block your vision, along with being unhealthy for your body. However, there is usually a sawdust disposal method in most table saws that prevents it from making the place dirty.
Additionally, a disposal system also helps keep the workspace clean while working with multiple pieces of wood. So, you wouldn't need to tidy up the space after cutting a single piece of wood.
In contrast, most circular saws lack a sawdust disposal system. Some may have a guard, but it is inefficient in most cases. You will need to spend time cleaning up a large area, having finished working with the tool.
As a side note, we would like to add that it's important to wear safety goggles and a mask while working with saws. It helps to remain safe from ingesting sawdust.
Safety
Using a power tool may seem intimidating for a beginner. The foremost reason for this worry is the issue of safety. While thinking about these powerful tools, we are bound to consider the problems that may occur.
When it comes to a power saw, the sharp serrated blade may give the chills owing to countless horror movies. However, the table saw manufacturers have done a fabulous job in making them as safe as possible. Also, the pro woodworkers often recommend starting with a table saw to season your hands.
In contrast, the circular saw may make nightmares come true if proper safety isn't followed. It does require you to practice a bit more to get the hang of using it. Nevertheless, newer models are much safer than their predecessors due to the added safety measures.
As you aren't directly exposed to the blades of a table saw, it appears to be a much safer option. Moreover, current models also include blade guards as protection.
On the contrary, the circular saw has much less safety due to the exposed blade. Also, we should make it clear that it is crucial to wear proper protective gear while working with any type of saw. This includes respiratory masks and safety goggles to protect against harm from the sawdust. In addition, wearing proper woodworking gloves also ensure that your hands remain appropriately protected.
Maintenance
Seldom do we think about the maintenance of a power tool before deciding to buy it or not. However, missing this point will only bring more trouble afterward.
The most common steps of maintaining a saw include cleaning and lubrication. Other than that, you may also need to check the power system at times.
When we look at the table saw, it is baffling to see the numerous intricate parts that make up this tool. Nevertheless, because of its robust parts, a table saw will seldom get sick.
When it comes to cleaning, the process is super simple. Most table saws contain a dust collector that needs cleaning after the work gets over. You may choose to wax the metal top surface from time to time, but overall maintenance is straightforward.
On the other hand, circular saws may require a bit more care. You will need to clean the blade after every use, and it may also need lubrication or oil filling. Also, for cordless models, regular battery changes might be necessary. But, when you get into the routine of using the saw, maintenance does become like any other chore.
By now, you must have guessed table saws tend to last more than circular saws. The latter may also require a frequent blade change compared to the former variant. Also, many cheap circular saws die out fairly quickly.
Table Saw: Advantages
Precise and accurate cuts
Easy to use
Beginner-friendly
Last for a long time
Best for rip and cross cuts
Useful to cut big wood pieces
Better safety
Table Saw: Disadvantages
Requires space
Lacks portability
Expensive
Circular Saw: Advantages
Portable and lightweight
Works with various materials
Great for outdoor projects
Affordable
Quicker cuts
Easy storage
Circular Saw: Disadvantages
Demands skill
Average lifespan
Mastery needed for straight cuts
Requires additional safety measures
Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw FAQ
More than often, we have come across questions regarding both saws. Here is our trial to quickly demystify some of them.
Can a circular saw be used as a table saw?
In essence, a circular saw should work just like a table saw. However, when it comes to actual practice, using circular saws requires some amount of skill. Nevertheless, spending a bit of time honing your ability to get straight cuts will give good results.
Which is more dangerous: table saw or circular saw?
In general, circular saws are regarded as less safe compared to table saws. However, we wouldn't call it a dangerous tool as it's an essential equipment for woodworking. Instead, it's always better to follow proper safety measures and usage precautions to avoid accidents.
Is a circular saw worth it?
The versatility and portability of circular saws make them a worth-it product. It is a vital instrument for professional woodworkers who may need a saw for an outdoor project. Also, the circular saw can cut through various materials like plastic and metal, making them even more helpful.
Who Should Go For A Table Saw?
As we near the end, it's time to come up with a verdict. But, before doing that, we would like to talk a bit more about who should go for which saw.
To speak of table saws, it is an excellent tool for anyone looking to get precise straight cuts while working with wood. This makes it apt for beginners and amateur woodworkers who are starting with woodcutting. Seldom do things go wrong with table saws, and it creates an excellent environment to catch up on new skills.
If you want a saw that provides a fuss-free woodcutting experience, go for a table saw. Additionally, it is also a great investment for setting up workshops. Also, nothing can beat a table saw when it comes to cutting large pieces of wood.
Ultimately, the table saw is an excellent option for anyone who wants an accurate, easy-to-use, and low-maintenance power saw.
Who Should Go For A Circular Saw?
The decision to pick a specific group is tricky when it comes to a circular saw. It may seem inferior to the table saw, but there are times when it becomes a necessity.
Having a circular saw is a must for those who value portability. It would allow you to work with it from anywhere, especially if it's a cordless model. Moreover, circular saws are excellent to widen the power tool collection of professionals.
When it comes to versatility, a circular saw will win the race. With interchangeable blades, you can cut through various materials and even through concrete. This makes it valuable for those who seek to widen their horizon to use newer materials.
An additional advantage of circular saws is the ability to perform bevel cuts. Yes, you may need to spend more time practicing on circular saws, but it is worthwhile. This makes it an excellent choice for avid DIY-ers.
Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw: Winner
So, you must be quivering to know the winner? However, there's really no clear champion when it comes to Table vs. Circular saws; both are good in their ways. Even though there are some hiccups while using a circular saw, practice is likely to solve most of them.
If you are brand new to using and purchasing a saw, the table saw is the way to go. Besides, the table saw is the winner for anyone who likes to finish projects in their workshop.
On the other hand, the versatile circular saw seems like a good investment for anyone who needs portability. Also, professional woodworkers should definitely think about getting it if they feel confident about picking up a new skill.
Now, go and look for the saw that suits you. Please let us know if there are any further queries.
We found that the GoSports Splash Pro Pool Volleyball Net comes at the top of the list because of its sturdy build and adjustability. Likewise, the Swimways Poolside Volleyball Setand Poolmaster Across In-Ground Pool Volleyball Net are viable options for children and adults.
The goal of buying the best pool volleyball nets is to have a fun and relaxed time in the pool. So, if you plan on spending some quality time with friends and family in the swimming pool of your backyard, you know what’s needed.
Setting up a pool volleyball net set is pretty simple, provided you follow the steps mentioned in the instruction manual. But finding one that meets your pool size requirements, allowing you to keep your loved ones entertained for hours together with a fun sport like volleyball, is no easy feat.
There are many options on the market, and finding a suitable pool volleyball set can take time and effort. So, we took the responsibility of seeing some of the best options and reviewing them for you. There is certainly one option in this list that would suit your needs.
POOL VOLLEYBALL: Splash into the ultimate pool day and play...
ADJUSTABLE NET: Splash Net PRO is compatible with virtually...
What we like
Easy to set up
Comes with two volleyballs
Sturdy and stays in place for long
Suitable for all pool sizes
What we don't like
Height of the volleyball net can’t be adjusted
When it comes to choosing the best pool volleyball nets, GoSports is a brand to take into consideration.
This pool volleyball net has sturdy bases that keep the net intact and uptight. Even after hours of splashing around in the swimming pool, the net won’t be tipping over. Engineered to withstand all the fun and frolic that comes with pool volleyball, this setup is perfect for a sunny day.
Moreover, the GoSports Volleyball Net is compatible with all kinds of inground pools, be it lap pools, rectangular, or even rounded pools. The net straps can be adjusted according to the pool size and can be extended up to 25 feet.
Coming to the other inclusions of the set, you get two volleyballs and a ball pump with inflation needles besides the volleyball net and posts.
The only issue is that you won’t be able to adjust the height of the volleyball net posts. This might make it difficult for children to play freely in this setup.
But overall, it is an ideal option for any adult pool party or just a casual day at the backyard with friends and family. You can either opt for the red or blue color variant, depending on your preferences.
Material: Plastic poles and nylon net | Packaging includes: Adjustable volleyball net with two side posts, two volleyballs, a ball pump with an inflation needle | Pool Compatibility: In-ground pools - lap pools, rectangular pools, rounded pools, etc. | Net Width: It can be extended up to 25 feet | Color: Blue or red
SUMMER FUN: Keep active this summer with the SwimWays...
DURABLE: This outdoor swimming pool game's durable 24 ft...
What we like
Easy to set up without any tools
Good for inground swimming pools
Fill-base for stability
High-quality build
What we don't like
Side posts may tip over if not filled
Here we have reviewed the pool volleyball net manufactured by SwimWays. The brand makes recreational water products for all age groups and it’s respected for its high quality pool volleyball equipment.
On that note, the SwimWays Poolside Volleyball Set has been specifically designed for inground pools. The pool volleyball net measures around 24 feet in width and fits seamlessly across all pool sizes and types.
Explicitly recommended for children aged six and above, the swimming pool volleyball setup is easy to assemble. It includes a volleyball, two heavy-duty side posts, a volleyball net, and an inflating needle. And no tools are required to put all the accessories together.
Overall, the product is a good choice, but the only thing that might be a problem is that the side posts are a bit lightweight. As a result, the entire setup might tip over frequently. But there’s a solution to this problem - all you have to do is fill both the heavy-duty side posts with either sand or water to keep the entire setup stable.
Material: Plastic | Packaging includes: Two heavy-duty side posts, a volleyball net with a ball, an inflation needle, and an instruction manual | Pool Compatibility: Suitable for most standard size in-ground pools | Net Width: It can be extended up to 24 feet | Color: Blue
Entire swimming pool game set that is epecially designed for...
Pool game bases can be filled with water or sand for...
What we like
Suitable for larger pools
Includes a deluxe water volleyball
Includes tall side polls (30 inches each)
Compatible in all kinds of settings
What we don't like
Setting up the volleyball net may be a bit time-consuming
Poolmaster has been a leading name since 1958, known to produce pool and spa products. Famous for its durability, high quality product line, and quick service, this brand also makes pool volleyball sets.
As such, this pool volleyball set, including a volleyball net, sturdy side posts, a ball, and an inflating needle, is designed for across-pool volleyball sports.
You can set it up anywhere, be it in your swimming pool, backyard, or any other surface. The pole is 30 inches in height, and the net size is 16 feet, extending up to 38 feet. So, it can fit in almost every kind of pool with perimeter decking. We’d recommend this one for pool parties, picnics, beach outings, or any other getaway.
The side posts of this pool volleyball set can be filled with sand or water for stability. Meaning, there’s no scope of it tipping over at any point during the game.
Overall, the product is ideal for children and adults who want to spend a fun summer afternoon playing volleyball in the comfort of their swimming pool. The only issue is that we noticed the caps for the poles were a bit too small and difficult to fit, which made the assembly process comparatively time-consuming.
Material: Nylon | Packaging includes: Volleyball net with 30-inch tall upright poles and two bases, a deluxe ball, and an inflating needle | Pool Compatibility: Suitable for larger pools with perimeter decking | Net Width: It can be extended up to 38 feet | Color: multicolor
The inflatable pool volleyball netmanufactured by Omotiya is a suitable lightweight and portable pool game setup option. While helping build hand-eye coordination, this pool volleyball set offers many advantages, which is why we have included it in our review list.
To begin, the volleyball net is made of high-quality ABS material, making it lightweight yet durable. It can be set up anywhere, be it swimming pools, your lawn, or beaches. Moreover, it comes with a six-gallon capacity water base that makes it all the more stable. You can fill this uniquely-designed base with water or sand to prevent the net from tipping while enjoying a pool game with your family.
The pool volleyball set is compatible with all kinds of inground pools, including rectangular pools, lap pools, and rounded pools. The sturdy net can be extended up to 16 feet, and the set comes with other accessories, including two colorful volleyballs, a pump with an inflation needle, and a sturdy net with two side posts.
One can easily clean the entire setup by spraying water on it. What’s more, the instruction manual provided with it makes the whole assembly process much easier and hassle-free. However, we felt that the expandable width of the net was not close to the previous three options on the list. This is a small pool volleyball netthat would be a better choice for a relatively smaller pool.
Material: High-quality ABS material | Packaging includes: Volleyball net with uptight poles and high-capacity bases, two colorful balls, a pump and with inflating needle | Pool Compatibility: Suitable for smaller in-ground pools (rectangular pools, rounded, and lap pools) | Net Width: It can be extended up to 16 feet | Color: Blue and yellow
125" EXTRA LARGE & ENDLESS FUN: Every family is worth...
A MUST-HAVE SUMMER HIT: The competitive rush you get from...
What we like
Easy to inflate and deflate the equipment
Good for inground pools
Includes two weight bags
Comes with a basketball and hoop
What we don't like
The volleyball included is a bit big in size
The next option in our inflatable pool volleyball net sets list is the Kidditoy Pool Volleyball Set and Basketball Hoop. This option is suitable for inground pools and can be easily set up across any swimming pool irrespective of the shape and size.
This is a complete pool volleyball set, including an inflatable pool volleyball court, a basketball hoop, a volleyball, and a basketball. You can easily set them all up using the instruction manual that gives a pretty clear picture of the assembly. And the net has straps on both sides that will help you to adjust it according to your requirements.
Now’s when we’ll mention the floating weight bags of the Kidditoy Pool Volleyball Set. They act as anchors, similar to bricks and sand bags, thereby stabilizing the volleyball net to prevent it from tipping. Moreover, the net and other equipment are pretty sturdy because of the PVC material, which is 30 percent thicker than the others.
The brand’s excellent customer service can cater to your needs, listen to your complaints, and act accordingly. And while most other brands focus on volleyball sets and balls, Kidditoy has also added a basketball and a hoop. This makes this swimming pool volleyball set stand out from the other options on the list. The only complaint we have is related to the size of the volleyball that is included in the set - it’s a bit too large to play with.
Material: 0.3 mm PVC | Packaging includes: Volleyball net with two side posts, basketball hoop, two weight bags, a 21-inch inflatable volleyball, 13-inch basketball, and instruction manual | Pool Compatibility: Any small inground pool | Net Width: 125 inches | Color: Blue and orange
Regulation size set includes red/white/blue soft touch water...
Mounts directly to concrete surrounding your pool via two 2...
What we like
Sturdy aluminum posts
Can be adjusted according to the length of the pool
Won’t tip over
Quick set-up
What we don't like
Assembly can be a bit complicated for first-timers
The Dunn-Rite Deck Volley Water Game pool volleyball set comes with an adjustable net, side posts, and a ball. It consists of every accessory and hardware that you may need to arrange a pool party.
This net can easily fit into any inground pool, and its height and length can be easily adjusted according to the size of the pool. It can be set up within just a few minutes, provided you are well-acquainted with the steps and can extend up to 24 feet. And you need not worry about the volleyball net tipping over as it comes with sturdy aluminum posts and anchor caps.
As such the entire setup is sturdy and you won’t have to pause your fun. However, assembling all the accessories and hardware together can be a tad bit complicated for a first-timer.
Material: Powder-coated aluminum posts with brass anchors and nylon net straps | Packaging includes: Adjustable net, two aluminum posts, a volleyball, and other hardware for setting up the swimming pool volleyball set | Pool Compatibility: Compatible with any inground pool | Net Width: It can be extended up to 24 feet | Color: red, white, blue
Swimming Pool Volleyball Set Buying Guide
We know that purchasing the best pool volleyball nets is more challenging than it may sound. You need to buy a pool volleyball set that includes all the required accessories, is sturdy, and meets your pool size requirements, or you'll just be wasting money. Keeping that in mind, here are some essential factors to consider before buying a pool volleyball set.
1. Price
Customers often need clarification regarding what price they should pay to purchase a pool volleyball net set. It is advisable to shop for a pool volleyball set that is within a reasonable price range. Most of the brands available on the market are available in a diverse price range.
You may opt for a cheaper volleyball net that will last for a season or two, but a more expensive one (not too expensive though) will give a much better performance and last for many years.
2. Above Ground Vs. In-Ground Pool Volleyball Net
There are two types of swimming pools- above-ground and in-ground. While all the pool volleyball sets we have reviewed are for standard size in-ground pools, you can also set them up in an above-ground pool setting.
Just ensure that the net width is expandable enough to fit your pool size. And the volleyball net set should include heavy-duty posts with sturdy bases so that you can set them up even on the deck surrounding your swimming pool.
The fill-in bases will prevent the net from tipping over - so you're all set to have a fun, sunny day with your family and friends.
3. Ball
Make sure that the volleyball net set you choose to buy comes with a volleyball made of inflatable vinyl because it is more durable compared to other materials. It’s even better if the set includes a basketball and hoop along with other pool toys. These inclusions will only increase the fun.
4. Inflatable Vs. Non-Inflatable Pool Volleyball Set
You should choose an inflatable pool volleyball set if you're looking for a leisure volleyball game where mostly children are involved. However, if you're looking for a more serious and intense pool game, then a non-inflatable pool volleyball set is what you will require.
5. All-Weather Components
It is essential to check that all the equipment of your pool volleyball set is built with all-weather materials. Your pool volleyball set will be exposed to water, sunlight, sand, and other factors that might cause damage. Therefore, one should always ensure quality and durability before buying a volleyball set.
Top Swimming Pool Volleyball Set Final Verdict
Now that we have ended with the list of six best swimming pool volleyball sets, we hope you have found your match.
Before wrapping up, allow us to list our favorite products from the list. GoSports Splash Pro Pool Volleyball Net is one of our top recommendations owing to its sturdiness, adjustability, and brand value.
Most DIYers would agree that epoxy resin is one of the most effective and versatile products used in a variety of projects.
It can be used with various materials including metal, glass, and wood for its strong adhesive qualities, high resistance to chemical applications, and heat. Naturally, this makes it a suitable product for those who need a strong surface to withstand pressure.
However, there are certain surfaces that epoxy resin won’t stick to. And every DIYer must know about these surfaces unless they want to put their project at risk of a massive disaster. That’s why we have written this guide mentioning most of the surfaces that epoxy resin will not adhere to.
So, without further ado, let’s jump right in!
Materials That Won’t Stick To Resin
In this section, we have listed some of the most common materials that resin won’t stick to.
Polyethylene Plastics
Polyethylene plastic is a very common material that epoxy resin doesn’t stick to and it is widely used in the production of resin molds. One of the best things about polyethylene plastic is that it is high-quality and reusable, making it an ideal option for table mold or other similar items.
Professionals mainly use it for making river tables. Hence, it is used in cutting boards and a range of other items as well. You can easily order the size as per your requirements, including the desired durability.
However, a major downside to polyethylene plastics is that they are pretty expensive. Also, it might take a while for you to figure out what size and density you need.
Plastic Containers
Plastic containers such as plastic cups, Tupperware, and bowls don’t stick to epoxy resin, making them a good mold for DIYers searching for a different shape. One of the significant advantages of using plastic containers is that they are budget-friendly and readily available around the house. This lets you make bowls of various sizes and shapes.
The only drawback to this option is that you cannot alter the outcome of your item. Plus, it can’t be used for large items such as tables.
Parchment Or Wax Paper
Epoxy resin doesn’t adhere to parchment or wax paper, making it suitable for resin DIY projects. Not only is it one of the most affordable options out there, but it is also easy to use.
You can use it to make a simple mold for small tables without breaking a sweat. That being said, it does come with its fair share of drawbacks that you must be aware of.
Firstly, it is not as effective and clear as the other processes, mainly when the epoxy comes off. On top of that, the wax paper doesn’t securely remain in place, creating complications during the curing process.
Hot Glue
As far as hot glue is concerned, it is widely used for sealing cracks and making molds. Plus, it can be used on top of river tables to stop overflow while pouring. However, hot glue cannot be used on its own; it’s more of an addition to other materials used to achieve desired results.
Besides, hot glue is a bit complicated to remove from rough wood and can also leave marks.
Silicone, Vinyl, Or Rubber
Not only does silicone mold not stick to resin, but it is the most prevalent mold among DIYers. The main reason is its use in making various uniquely shaped items, including coasters and jewelry.
With silicone molds, you get the freedom to make any item as per your requirements with just a small amount of epoxy. Additionally, they are resistant to heat and cost-effective, and the best part is that they require a minimal touch-up after the cure.
Having said that, remember that silicone molds can’t be used for big objects like tables or desks. So, before purchasing the mold, kindly read the reviews.
Sheathing Or Painter’s Tape
Sheathing tape is a cheaper and versatile option that doesn’t stick to the resin. With it, you can easily work on large objects. Needless to say, you can make items of various sizes and shapes, maintaining a shiny appearance without a hassle. If you use it correctly, you can use it multiple times.
The only problem with this material is that it tends to leave too many seams. But fortunately, it can be rectified; all you need to do is just sand and buff it after some time.
Surfaces Resin Won’t Stick FAQs
In this part, we have tried answering some of the most frequently asked questions regarding the topic.
Q1. Will epoxy stick to the epoxy that has been cured?
No, it will not, unless you sand the surface of the cured epoxy resin. Sanding the surface will allow a new layer of epoxy to stick to the cured one. Although the two might form a bond, it won’t be durable enough to withstand strong impacts.
Therefore, if you plan on applying an epoxy formula on a cured epoxy, you will need to use a sander and run the surface over with 180-grit sandpaper. When you are done sanding, ensure you clean the surface thoroughly to allow the formation of a durable chemical bond.
Q2. Can resin be used on outdoor surfaces?
Only certain waterproof epoxy formulas are ideal to be used on outdoor surfaces. Hence, we highly recommend you be cautious about your choice, especially when using them on outdoor surfaces.
Epoxy resin formulas designed for outdoor surfaces come with anti UV features to prevent the surface from discoloring due to exposure to the sun.
Q3. What is the right temperature needed for the epoxy to cure?
The appropriate temperature required for the epoxy to cure is around the 75 degrees Fahrenheit mark. However, more often than not, it depends on the depth of the pour and the type of epoxy used.
Final Thoughts
So, that was pretty much everything you needed to know about the surfaces resin won’t stick to.
If you are a DIY enthusiast, we bet that you don’t like using ready-made products. Instead, you get creative and build them on your own. Hence, it is important for you to know the materials that epoxy resin works well with.
That said, keep in mind that all the items mentioned above are different from each other. You need to assess each item separately to find out which material suits your project requirements.
On that note, we’ll call it a day. Until next time, bye!
![Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop [Reviewed]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/03/Waring-Pro-ICT400-Double-Induction-Cooktop-01.jpg "Waring Pro ICT400 Double Induction Cooktop [Reviewed]")
![Vitamix 5200 vs Vitamix 5300 [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/Vitamix-5200-vs-Vitamix-5300-01.jpg "Vitamix 5200 vs Vitamix 5300 [All You Need to Know]")
![11 Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners [Reviews & Buyer’s Guide]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/02/Best-Upholstery-Steam-Cleaners-1.jpg "11 Best Upholstery Steam Cleaners [Reviews & Buyer's Guide]")
![TrackR vs. Tile [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/TrackR-vs.-Tile-01.jpg "TrackR vs. Tile [All You Need to Know]")
![Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw [Differences & Winner]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2021/08/Table-Saw-Vs.-Circular-Saw-101.jpg "Table Saw Vs. Circular Saw [Differences & Winner]")
![Surfaces Resin Won’t Stick to [All You Need to Know]](https://homesthetics.net/wp-content/uploads/2022/01/Surfaces-Resin-Wont-Stick-to-1.jpg "Surfaces Resin Won’t Stick to [All You Need to Know]")
